JP7127878B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine").

Conventionally, this type of gaming machine is known to perform a lottery game based on the winning of a game ball in a winning area of a game area. A plurality of winning areas are provided in the game area, and a lottery game corresponding to each winning area is performed. Even if the winning of game balls to the respective winning areas occurs at the same time, only one lottery game is performed according to the priority, and the other lottery games are put in a standby state (for example, See Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-148017 A

However, the gaming machine described above has caused a decrease in interest in the game .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The problem to be solved by the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the loss of interest in games .

In one form of the representative gaming machine of the present invention, first lottery execution means for executing a first lottery based on the winning of game media in the first prize area within the game area, and a second prize area within the game area. a second lottery execution means for executing a second lottery based on the winning of the game medium to the game medium; execution means, variable display execution means capable of executing variable display of symbols based on the first lottery or the second lottery, and different probabilities depending on the game state based on the first lottery or the second lottery. 1st specific game executing means for executing the first specific game that can give a game profit with the operation of the condition device, and the second lottery, less than the first specific game without the operation of the condition device A second specific game execution means for executing a second specific game capable of imparting a game profit, and execution of the first specific game executed in response to a specific lottery result being derived by the first lottery execution means. A specific game state transition means for shifting the game state to a specific game state different from the normal game state, and the first lottery execution means Executed in response to the special lottery result being derived A special game state transition means for shifting the game state to a special game state different from the normal game state and the specific game state with the execution of the first specific game as a trigger, and execution based on the second lottery. lottery frequency suppressing means for suppressing the execution frequency of the second specific game by making the variable display that can be performed for a long time; and the variable display that can be performed based on the second lottery in the specific gaming state and a lottery frequency improving means for increasing the execution frequency of the second specific game by making it a shorter time than the specific game state, the frequency in which the movable member is operated by the movable lottery executing means. Although not increased, the lottery probability that the first specific game will be executed is higher than the normal game state, and is given in the first specific game that can be executed based on the second lottery. A plurality of times that can be executed during the period from when the variable display based on the second lottery is set to the short period until the first specific game is executed by the lottery frequency improving means than the game profit to be played It is the most advantageous lottery state for a player who hopes that the total game profit given by the second specific game will increase, and suppresses the execution frequency of the second specific game in the normal game state. As the variable display of symbols executed based on the lottery of the second lottery executing means for the purpose, the fluctuation of the longest time among the variable displays of symbols executed based on the lottery of the first lottery executing means in the normal game state. A variable display for a longer time than the display can be executed, and the special game state is different from the specific game state, and the first game state is executed based on the lottery of the second lottery execution means. Although it cannot be expected that more game profit than the game profit given in the specific game can be given by the second specific game multiple times, the first specific game is executed more than the normal game state. and the frequency at which the movable member is operated by the movable lottery executing means is adjusted to the normal game state and the specific game state so that the frequency with which the first lottery can be executed increases. characterized by being raised higher than

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to solve the above problems and provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the loss of interest in games.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the body frame. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. 1 is a plan view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is an exploded perspective view of an outer frame, a body frame, a game board, and a door frame, which constitute a pachinko machine, viewed from behind; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame, a body frame, a game board, and a door frame that constitute a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a back perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right side view of an outer frame. FIG. 4 is a perspective view for explaining a detachable structure between an upper shaft support metal fitting of a body frame and an upper support metal fitting of an outer frame; (A) is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of (A) viewed from below. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a lock member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect|action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is exploded and viewed from the front; It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame base unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of a door-frame base board cover and a wiring holding member in the door-frame base unit; It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit exploded and viewed from the front; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit exploded and viewed from behind; (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit when it is exploded and viewed from the front; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit, which is disassembled and viewed from the rear; It is a cross-sectional view of the left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission state of a left side decoration unit with a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit being exploded and viewed from the front; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit disassembled and viewed from behind; It is a front perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate unit and was seen from behind. It is a cross-sectional view cut at the portion of the ball rental unit of the plate unit in the door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit when it is exploded and viewed from the front right upper side; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit when it is exploded and viewed from the lower right front side; It is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a pressing operation portion of the operation unit is pressed; (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame, and (B) is an exploded rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 4 is a front view showing a state in which the front cover of the foul cover unit is removed; It is a front view of an antistatic mechanism. It is a perspective view at the time of seeing a door frame from the back which shows a state provided with an antistatic mechanism. It is a principal part rear view of a door frame which shows the state provided with the static electricity prevention mechanism. FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 56; (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. It is a rear view of a ball feeding unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case removed. (A) is a plan view of the anti-tampering member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the anti-tampering member, (C) is a perspective view of the anti-tampering member seen from the front, and (D) is a perspective view of the anti-tampering member. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the action of the fraud prevention member; FIG. It is sectional drawing which cut|disconnects and shows a door frame in the up-down direction approximate center. It is a front view which shows arrangement|positioning of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system|strain of the LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of a main body frame. It is a left view of a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the main body frame, and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the main-body frame, and was seen from the back. 4 is a front perspective view of a body frame base in the body frame; FIG. Fig. 4 is a rear perspective view of a body frame base in the body frame; It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. It is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled a prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled a prize ball unit, and was seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit exploded from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball device in the prize ball unit, and was seen from the back. It is a rear view showing the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotator in the prize ball device. It is a cross-sectional view showing a ball rolling passage in the prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the body frame. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening and closing unit in the body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. It is a front perspective view of the board unit in the body frame. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the body frame; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit when it is exploded and viewed from the front; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit when it is exploded and viewed from behind; FIG. 10 is a perspective view for explaining the action of the standing wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit; (A) is a cross-sectional view of a terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded front perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit. (A) is a front view of a launch power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover of the body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover of the body frame. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of a fastening mechanism in the back cover; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism of the rear cover, viewed from the rear side; (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the body frame, and (B) is a front perspective view of the lock device in the body frame. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding rod for the glass door and a sliding rod for the body frame which are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. FIG. 4C is a front perspective view of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the lock device and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation|movement of the sliding rod for glass doors in a lock device, and the sliding rod for main body frames. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the fraud prevention member in a lock device. It is a front view showing a game board attached to the body frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and looked at from behind. (A) is a front view showing an enlarged function display unit on a game board as attached to a pachinko machine, and (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 104 and the like, seen from the front. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from behind FIG. 107; FIG. FIG. 108 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the game panel of the game board of FIG. 107; FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a front structural member of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 107 and the like, as seen from the front. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from behind FIG. 110; FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view showing the crime prevention structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view seen from the rear side in a state in which the game board is accommodated in the body frame. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. It is a front view when the special winning opening of the game board in the pachinko machine is opened. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is the perspective view which disassembled every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally behind. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. 3 is a block diagram of a door frame base board, a peripheral side relay terminal board, an abnormal audio signal blocking board, and a lower speaker; FIG. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of an abnormal audio signal blocking board; It is a flow chart which shows an example of the main processing of this embodiment performed by main control MPU. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when power failure occurs according to the present embodiment; 6 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing according to the embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows an example of special control processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening prize-winning processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st special design control processing of this embodiment. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of first fluctuation start processing according to the present embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st variation pattern setting processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during the 1st change of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st jackpot game start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st jackpot game processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of time saving function setting processing of this embodiment. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of first interlock setting processing according to the embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd special design control processing of this embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing second fluctuation start processing of the present embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd fluctuation pattern setting processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the process during the 2nd change of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd jackpot game start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd jackpot game processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd small hit game start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd small hit game processing of this embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of second interlock setting processing according to the embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about an example of normal control processing of this embodiment performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of gate passage processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal design normal processing of the present embodiment. It is an example of various tables showing the game specs of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of the game state (game mode) of this embodiment. It is an example of a timing chart explaining simultaneous variation control of this embodiment. It is an example of a timing chart showing an ideal game mode transition in this embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of an example of sub-main processing of the present embodiment executed by a peripheral control MPU; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of 16 ms steady-state processing that is executed every 16 ms in sub-main processing; FIG. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment. (A) is a simplified structural diagram of the attacker device, (B) is a front view showing an enlarged function display unit, and (C) is a front view showing an enlarged 7-segment display. It is an example of various tables showing the game specs of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of the game state (game mode) of 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an outline of a control pattern of the simultaneous variation control structure of the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a first fluctuation start process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st jackpot game process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of first interlock setting processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a second fluctuation start process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd big-hit game process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second small winning game processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of second interlock setting processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the right hitting penalty setting process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. 9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of liquid crystal display processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the right hitting penalty alert|reporting process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st fluctuation start processing in the priority control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of first priority determination processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the processing during the 1st change in the priority control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of first interlock setting processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd fluctuation start processing in the priority control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of second priority determination processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during a 2nd fluctuation|variation in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of second interlock setting processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment; FIG. (A) is a flow chart showing the procedure of forced losing effect addition processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment, (B) is a special symbol variation when additional losing notification effect is set in forced losing effect addition processing 4 is a timing chart of effect display in the liquid crystal display device 1900. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st special design control process in the interruption control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd special design control process in the interruption control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a procedure of restart effect change processing in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment; FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of the production|presentation after the restart in restart production|change process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking setting processing in the modification of the interruption control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlocking setting processing in the modification of the interruption control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the process during the 1st change in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of first interlock setting processing in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the process during the 2nd change in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of second interlock setting processing in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining resetting settings in the resetting control pattern of the second embodiment; FIG.

[Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. First, the overall pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment, and a door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame, which constitute the pachinko machine, viewed from behind, and FIG. 7 shows the outer frame, main body frame, and game board, which constitute the pachinko machine. , is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front.

1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes an outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and an outer frame 2 pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable, and the front side is open. A box frame-shaped main body frame 3, a game board 4 having a game area 1100 attached and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and into which game balls as game media are driven, and the front face of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 are played by a player. A door frame 5 pivotally supported to be openable and closable with respect to the body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side is provided. The door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game window 101 formed so that a game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a game window 101 arranged below the game window 101 to store game balls. It has a plate-like upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to hit the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4.例文帳に追加

As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, and a door frame 5 each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. , and the vertical width of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is slightly shorter than that of the outer frame 2 . A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged such that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatably pivoted at a position on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2. The right ends of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are moved forward with respect to the outer frame 2 to open them.

When viewed from the front, the pachinko machine 1 has a substantially circular game window 101 in which a game area 1100 into which game balls are hit can be seen, and the game window 101 projects forward below the game window 101. Two upper trays 301 and lower trays 302 are arranged vertically. A handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5 . When a rotating operation is performed, the game ball in the upper tray 301 is hit into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, so that a game can be played.

Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and although the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, the player cannot see inside the game area 1100. It is not possible to insert a hand or the like into the game area 1100 to touch the game balls, obstacle nails, various winning openings, accessories, and the like. Various control boards are provided on the rear side of the body frame 3, and a cover body 1250 that closes the game board 4 so as to cover the rear side thereof is provided.

[Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Furthermore, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment/detachment structure between the upper shaft support metal fitting of the main body frame and the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame. FIG. 14(A) is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of FIG. 14(A) viewed from below. . FIG. 15 is a back view of the upper support fitting portion for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. Furthermore, FIG. 16 is a back view of the upper support bracket portion for explaining the action of the locking member.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes upper and lower upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and left and right side plates extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. Frame plates 12, 13 and four connecting members 14 connecting ends of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 are provided. By connecting them together, they are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present example are formed of solid wood (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) with a predetermined thickness, and are placed at approximately the center in the front-rear direction of both left and right ends. An engagement notch 15 is provided which penetrates through the body and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. Mounting stepped portions 10a recessed from other general surfaces are formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and upper support metal fittings 20, which will be described later, are mounted on the mounting stepped portions 10a. It's like

On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal material (for example, an aluminum alloy) with a constant cross section, and the outer side surfaces are substantially flat surfaces, and the inner side surfaces protrude inward at the rear ends. It has a protruding portion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction) to increase strength and rigidity (see FIGS. 9 and 112). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer and inner side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island equipment of the game hall, the operator can The pachinko machine 1 can be easily held as a finger rest, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For the sake of convenience, there are drawings in which the plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of the present example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate of a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 and fixed to the left-right direction. a plate-like horizontal piece 17 extending from the outer edge of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13; and a plate-like engaging piece 19 that extends in the direction and can be inserted into and engaged with the engaging notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 . In this example, the connecting member 14 connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are left-right asymmetrical. , and a vertical piece 18 is formed so as to be divided into front and rear portions. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12, and the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape. It is

The upper and lower surfaces of the horizontal piece 17 abut against the lower and upper surfaces of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 , and the engaging piece 19 of the connecting member 14 engages the upper and lower frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 . In the state of being inserted into and engaged with the portion 15, a predetermined screw is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19, whereby the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame It is adapted to be fixed to the plate 11 . The connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is screwed through the side frame plates 12 and 13 with the vertical piece 18 in contact with the inner side surface of the upper end of the side frame plates 12 and 13. is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the projecting portion 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It's like Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 is screwed through the side frame plates 12 and 13 with the vertical piece 18 in contact with the inner side surface of the lower end of the side frame plates 12 and 13 and screwed with a predetermined screw. is screwed into the vertical piece 18 to connect the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13. Four connecting members 14 connect the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 , and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled into a frame shape.

The outer frame 2 of this example includes an upper support metal fitting 20 fixed to the top surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10, and is arranged to face the upper support metal fitting 20 and fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower part of the left side frame plate 12. a lower supporting metal fitting 21 attached to the lower supporting metal fitting 21; a reinforcing metal fitting 22 arranged so as to support the lower surface of the lower supporting metal fitting 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13; and a decorative cover 23. The upper support metal fitting 20 and the lower support metal fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so that they can be opened and closed.

First, the upper support metal fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixing piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a supporting projecting piece 20b projecting forward from the front end of the fixing piece 20a beyond the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a supporting projection. A supporting hook hole 20c formed by notching from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b so as to bend toward the center of the tip, and a left side frame that hangs downward from the left ends of the fixed piece 20a and the supporting protruding piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixed piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that is continuous with the hanging fixed piece 20d and hangs down along the outer edge of the support projecting piece 20b (see FIG. 14A). 14) and a stop droop 20f (see FIG. 15) which is continuous with the depending wall 20e and slopes inwardly at the entrance end of the support barb 20c. A pivot pin 633 (see FIG. 67) of an upper pivot bracket 630 of the body frame 3, which will be described later, is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c of the upper support bracket 20. As shown in FIG. Also, the upper support fitting 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by means of a fixing piece 20a and a hanging fixing piece 20d.

The strength of the support projecting piece 20b is increased by the hanging wall 20e that hangs down from the outer edge of the support projecting piece 20b. The lock member 27 arranged on the rear surface of the player can be hidden so as not to be visually recognized from the player side, and the external appearance can be improved. Further, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support protruding piece 20b is bent in a V-shape so as to be inclined toward the center of the tip from the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed. , and the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20 c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633 .

On the other hand, the lower support metal fitting 21 comprises a horizontal fixing piece 21a placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixed piece 21a beyond the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin-like projecting upward from near the front end of the support projecting piece 21c. and a support projection 21d. A body frame shaft support formed on a body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 70, etc.) of the body frame 3, which will be described later, is inserted into the support projection 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. After inserting the support protrusion 21d of the support metal fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame pivot metal fitting 644 of the main body frame 3, the pivot pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is engaged with the support hook hole 20c. As a result, the body frame 3 can be easily pivotally supported so that it can be freely opened and closed.

As shown in the drawing, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 arranged vertically apart from each other by a predetermined distance inside the right side frame plate 13 and fixed. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L-shape in plan view, and the closing plate 25 arranged on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (Fig. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are attached along the open sides of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2. Although the details will be described later, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and turned to one side, the engagement between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 is released. The body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by pressing.

Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22 . This guide plate 26 is for smoothly guiding the body frame 3 when closing the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2, and is attached and fixed so as to be replaceable.

14, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support metal fitting 20, and is secured to the support projecting piece 20b by a rivet 28. It is rotatably supported with respect to. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from the position where it is supported by the rivet 28, and a portion that is shorter than the stopper portion 27a to the right from the position where it is supported by the rivet 28. A projecting operation portion 27b, an elastic piece 27c projecting from the side opposite to the position where the operation portion 27b is pivotally supported by the rivet 28, and an elastic piece 27c formed at the tip of the stopper portion 27a so as to bulge forward. and an arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operating portion 27b. The elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a width narrower than that of the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed to extend forward as it moves leftward from the stopper portion 27a.

As shown in FIGS. 14(B) and 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support protruding piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the end abutting portion of the elastic piece 27c is the hanging wall. 20e, the stopper portion 27a closes the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a contacts the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. is not closed, and a space is formed in the leading space of the support hook hole 20c so that the pivot pin 633 of the upper pivot bracket 630 of the body frame 3 can be inserted. .

In the support mechanism of the pivot pin 633 using the upper support metal fitting 20 and the lock member 27 of this embodiment, the pivot pin 633 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the stopper portion 27a is locked. A state in which the tip side faces the stop drooping portion 20f of the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f, and they are in contact with each other). (not shown), the axial support pin 633 located in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c formed by bending and the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a They face each other with their centers shifted in an oblique direction. In this normal pivoting state, the pivot pin 633 that pivotally supports the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip of the support hook hole 20c. Since almost no load is applied to the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is in a state where no load is applied. In addition, since the stopper portion 27a has an arcuate tip surface 27d at the tip thereof, when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27, the lock member 27 can be rotated smoothly. It's becoming Also, in the illustration, the center of the arc of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27).

Therefore, when the axial support pin 633 contacts the arcuate end surface 27d with an acting force F acting in a direction in which the axial support pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, the acting force F is applied to the axial support pin 633. A force component F1 acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arc-shaped tip end surface 27d (the normal direction of the arc of the tip end surface 27d), and one side of the inclined hole portion of the support pin 633 and the support hook hole 20c When the direction of the component force F1 is directed toward the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27), the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is stopped. No moment acts to rotate the tip portion in the direction (clockwise in the figure) to separate from the support projecting piece 20b, and the pivot pin 633 is positioned between the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. It maintains the state of being sandwiched between the inner surface of one side. Therefore, even in a normal axially supported state or in a state in which the force of the axially supporting pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always subjected to a load, and the elastic member 27c integrally formed of synthetic resin is secured. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c and to prevent the pivot pin 633 from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if the tip of the stopper portion 27a of the locking member 27 is rotated in the direction (clockwise direction in the drawing) in which the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a of the locking member 27 is disengaged from the support projecting piece 20b by applying an excessive force, the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a will not move to one side. abuts on the stop drooping portion 20f and does not rotate further in the direction of detachment, so that the locking member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b.

Even if the shape of the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arcuate, the tip portion of the locking member 27 may be placed in a position where the force component F1 does not generate a rotational moment, or the tip portion of the locking member 27 may be positioned toward the outside of the support projecting piece 20b. By locating the center of rotation of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times. Even if the member 27 rotates, the one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a only abuts the stop drooping portion 20f. Confirmed.

The action of the locking member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. On the premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, a lower support metal fitting is inserted into a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in a main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 67) of the main body frame 3 . It is necessary that the support projections 21d of 21 are inserted. On such a premise, as shown in FIG. As shown in 16(B), the locking member 27 rotates the elastic piece 27c counterclockwise while deforming it, so that the pivot pin 633 can be inserted into the supporting hook hole 20c. Then, when the pivot pin 633 reaches the top space of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. Therefore, the lock member 27 is biased by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c and rotates clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to its normal state to close the entrance portion of the support hook hole 20c. The tip portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the pivot pin 633 so that the pivot pin 633 does not drop out of the support hook hole 20c.

This state is maintained even when the body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening/closing operation of the body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 16(D). Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support hook hole 20c. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. After that, the body frame 3 is lifted up to release the engagement between the body frame shaft support holes formed in the body frame shaft support metal fittings 644 and the support projections 21d of the lower support metal fittings 21, thereby moving the body frame 3 to the outer frame 2. can be removed from the

As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 that constitute the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the conventional case, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, aluminum alloy) is used as an extruded material, so when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facilities arranged in a line in the game hall, it is necessary to fix it at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such work is performed by driving nails into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nails can be easily driven, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily installed in the existing island equipment. It can be installed. In addition, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are extruded materials of light weight metal (for example, aluminum alloy), it is possible to form a thin wall thickness while maintaining the strength compared to the conventional wooden outer frame. The lateral width of the peripheral wall 605 (see FIG. 67, etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12, 13 can be widened when viewed from the front, and the game board 4 with a large lateral dimension. can be attached to the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

The upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13, which constitute the outline of the outer frame 2, are connected by a connecting member 14. The connecting member 14 connects the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since the outer frame 2 is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and is fixed while the connecting member 14 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased, and the outer frame 2 is sturdy. It is designed to be able to be a square-shaped framework. After the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support bracket 20 is attached at a predetermined position, each Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be installed in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine).

[Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided openable and closable on the front side of the body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. FIG. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the right rear. Further, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back.

The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a game window 101 having a vertically long rectangular outer shape and a slightly vertically long circular (elliptical) inner peripheral shape, as shown in the figure. A base unit 100, a right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 in front of the door frame base unit 100, and a right side decoration unit 200 facing the right side decoration unit 200 and to the left of the game window 101 in front of the door frame base unit 100. A left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer circumference and an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer circumference of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 are provided.

The door frame 5 includes a plate unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, an operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the plate unit 300, and a door penetrating the plate unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 disposed behind the plate unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. A foul cover unit 540 attached to the foul cover unit 540, a ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. and a glass unit 590 that is

[Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. FIG. FIG. 24(A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24(B) is a back perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame base unit as viewed from the rear. Furthermore, FIG. 27 is a rear perspective view of the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows.

As illustrated, the door frame base unit 100 of this example has a vertically long rectangular outer shape and a game window 101 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a vertically long inner periphery formed in a substantially elliptical shape. A frame base body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 arranged in front of the door frame base body 110 on both left and right sides of the lower end of the game window 101, and speakers for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base body 110. A bracket 132 and a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500 attached to the front face of the door frame base body 110 at the lower right corner in the front view are provided.

The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decorative unit 200 and the like on the outside of the right side speaker 130 when viewed from the front. A cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer circumference of the speaker mounting portion 111, and can hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or removed. It has become.

In addition, the door frame base unit 100 includes a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and a rear surface of the door frame base body 110 so as to cover the lower part of the game window 101. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer circumference of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and a left side (open side) from the center in the left and right direction in rear view. ) and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotation position of the handle device 500 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 under the firing cover 191 A handle device relay board 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 4100, a handle device relay board cover 193 that covers the rear side of the handle device relay board 192, and a launch cover 191 sandwiching the center in the left-right direction. A door frame base substrate 194 arranged on the opposite side (on the right side (rotary support side) of the center in the left-right direction in rear view) from the handle device relay substrate 192 and the like and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base A door frame base board cover 195 that covers the rear side of the board 194, and wiring 196 that is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the door frame base board cover 195 and connects the door frame 5 side and the body frame 3 side (FIG. 28). ), and a wiring holding member 197 that holds a part of the wiring.

The door frame base unit 100 of this example has a reinforcing unit 150 assembled from metal sheets with rivets or the like and fixed to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin, thereby increasing the rigidity of the whole. In addition, it has sufficient strength to support each of the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the plate unit 300, and the like.

The door frame base board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speaker 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decorative units 200 and 240, and is connected to a peripheral control section provided on the game board 4 to be described later. 4140 and has an amplifier circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs it to each speaker 130 . In this example, each decoration unit 200, 240, 280, each decoration board 430, 432 provided in the plate unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 provided in the operation unit 400, sensors 432a, 432b, 432c, the wiring 196 connecting the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the plate unit 300, etc., and the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control section 4140, etc. side), and, although details will be described later, are held by the wire holding member 197 and extend rearward, and the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the main body frame 3 are arranged. (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the present embodiment is formed of synthetic resin in the shape of a vertically long picture frame. A substantially elliptical game window 101 is formed in such a manner that it is entirely offset upward. As shown in the drawing, the game window 101 is formed such that the left, right, and upper inner peripheral edges are formed in continuous smooth curved lines, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. In addition, a rectangular notch 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted is provided on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110 on the pivot side (left side in front view). is formed. The width of the upper side formed by the game window 101 and the left and right side sides of the door frame base body 110 are equal to the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151, the pivot side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150, which will be described later. , and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body 110 in front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a wider game area 1100 than that of the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It's like

In addition to the game window 101, the door frame base body 110 has a speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130 which is arranged on both left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101, and a ball feeding unit 580. A ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) for feeding game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 through a predetermined position of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 in the front-rear direction to the ball feeding unit 580 A ball feeding opening 113 for supplying a ball, and a handle attachment for attaching a handle bracket 140 with the right (open side) end of the front surface, which is located in the lower right corner in a front view and bulges forward, is inclined so as to recede. a wire passage opening 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion 114 and through which the wiring from the handle device 500 can pass; and a lock hole 116 formed through which a cylinder lock 1010, which will be described later, can be inserted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base body 110 has a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and the door frame base body as viewed from the rear. From the substrate mounting portion 118 arranged on the lower right side (rotary support side) for mounting the door frame base substrate 194, and the arrangement closer to the center than the speaker mounting portion 111 on the rear view left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101 The security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 projecting backward and the door frame base main body 110 are recessed forward along the inner periphery of the game window 101 on the rear side and the glass unit 590. A glass unit supporting stepped portion 110a with which the outer peripheral edge of the front surface of the game window 101 can abut, and two locking members that protrude backward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 and support the glass unit locking member 190 in a rotatable manner. and a portion 110b.

Further, on the rear side of the door-frame base body 110, there is provided a door-frame projecting piece 110c projecting backward from the lower side of the door-frame base body 110 by a predetermined amount. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked to the main body frame 3, and an illegal tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the lower sides of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even so, the door frame projecting piece 110c engaged with the engaging groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a positioning projection 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 in a rear view and fits into the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d into the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e protruding forward for fixing the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, etc. on the front surface thereof. In addition, a large number of mounting holes for mounting the handlebar bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base body 110 has mounting bosses 110g for mounting speaker brackets 132 for mounting side speakers 130, and mounting holes 110h for mounting side speaker covers 338 (see FIG. 18, etc.) at appropriate positions. are formed respectively.

Further, in the door frame base body 110, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the board mounting portion 118, a lower plate ball supply port 310g in the plate unit base 310 of the plate unit 300 and a foul cover unit 540, which will be described later, are provided. A rectangular ball passage opening 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

Further, the door frame base main body 110 is formed above the left and right speaker mounting portions 111 on the front side thereof, and has shallow dish-shaped anti-crime recesses 120 recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A shallow box-shaped security member 121 is inserted into the security recess 120 from the front side. The security member 121 is formed into a shallow box shape with an open front side by bending a metal plate. As a result, in order to carry out an illegal act on the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, a thin drill or the like is used to make a hole from the joining portion between the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the plate unit 300. It can be blocked by the security member 121, and it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act.

In addition, the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 are not shown in detail, but the point of intersection of their central axes is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1 m) forward from the center of the game area 1100 when viewed from the front. 5 m), so that the sound reaches the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 most efficiently. The side speaker 130 mainly outputs mid-to-high range sound, and is arranged at a position separated from the pachinko machine 1 in the horizontal direction as much as possible. By outputting related and different sounds from the side speakers 130, it is possible to output sound with a high sense of stereo.

The outer periphery of these side speakers 130 is sandwiched between a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 arranged on the front side and the speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 arranged on the rear side, so that the door frame It is adapted to be attached to the base body 110 . The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment boss portion 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side with a predetermined screw.

25 to 27, the door-frame base board cover 195 in the door-frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box-like shape with an open front side, and a vertical A stepped portion 195a recessed forward is provided at a position slightly lower than the center. A wire holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base board cover 195. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the wire holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate-like shape elongated in the horizontal direction and has an I-shaped cross section. , which is made of a relatively hard synthetic resin. The wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three each in the upper and lower direction in this example) along the longitudinal direction at predetermined intervals at both upper and lower ends, as shown in the figure. The wire holding member 197 has an end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the assembled state of the door frame 5, and is vertically attached to the stepped portion 195a on the rear surface of the door frame base board cover 195. The wire holding member 197 is rotatably supported around the extended shaft, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the wire holding member 197 is rotated toward the door frame base board cover 195 by rotating the free end side of the wire holding member 197 toward the door frame base board cover 195 side. It can be accommodated in the step portion 195 a of the door frame base board cover 195 .

The wire holding member 197 has a wire 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along its rear surface side, and a predetermined binding band is attached to the pair of upper and lower holding holes 197a. The wire 196 can be held by inserting the wire 198 and tightening the wire 196 together with the wire holding member 197 with the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is the portion extending from the free end side of the wiring 196 to the main body frame 3. is pushed forward and rotated in a direction approaching the door frame base board cover 195 side. As a result, as the door frame 5 closes, the free end side of the wire holding member 197 approaches the door frame base board cover 195, and the wire 196 extending from the free end of the wire holding member 197 toward the body frame 3 side becomes free end. The bend becomes large (sharp) in the vicinity. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wire 196 is folded in half at the free end of the wire holding member 197 in the horizontal direction.

On the other hand, when opening the door frame 5 that is closed with respect to the body frame 3, the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 move relatively away from each other, so the wiring is held by the wiring 196 connected to the body frame 3 side. The free end side of the member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wire holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves away from the door frame base board cover 195 (toward the body frame 3). As a result, the wiring 196 folded at the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 unfolds so as to extend straight, so that the door frame 5 can be opened without being hindered by the wiring 196 .

Thus, according to this example, the end portion of the wire holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported is attached to the door frame base board cover 195 so that the free end side moves toward the body frame 3 side. A part of the wiring 196 electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction. On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring 196 can be laterally folded or unfolded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 can be caught or pinched when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles (breakage of the wiring 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.).

In addition, according to this example, since the wire holding member 197 is made of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even if a force acts through the wire 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, it will not move vertically. It is possible to make it difficult to move in the direction, and it is possible to reliably fold the wiring 196 in the horizontal direction to prevent the occurrence of problems.

Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 creates a state as if a bridge is hung between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the wiring 196 is removed. Since a part of the wire holding member 197 is bridged, it is possible to prevent the wire 196 from sagging even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. The main control board 4100, the peripheral control unit 4140, the payout control board 4110, etc. as the main body side electrical equipment, and the door side can be prevented from occurring. Defect in the wiring 196 connecting the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, the speakers 130, 222, 262, the ball rental unit 360, the handle device 500, etc. as electric devices. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the occurrence of .

A part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197, so that even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened, the wiring holding member 197 will not rotate. Since the force can be released by , it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and it is possible to prevent problems such as disconnection of the wiring 196 and disconnection of the connector due to the pulling of the wiring 196 . can. In addition, since a portion of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 only partially bends as the wiring holding member 197 rotates, conventional methods (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2009-213675) can be used. ), it is possible to prevent troubles such as electric leakage and disconnection due to rubbing of the wiring 196 .

Furthermore, in the wiring holding member 197, a binding band 198 is inserted through a plurality of penetrating holding holes 197a arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. The held binding band 198 can be prevented from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and the wiring 196 is reliably prevented from falling off from the wiring holding member 197 together with the binding band 198. can do.

Even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is arranged away from the side edge on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197 as described above. Since it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the wire 196 from hanging down when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding, the body frame 3 is improved in strength and rigidity on the pivotally supported side of the door frame 5.例文帳に追加and a door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 having high security against fraud.

Furthermore, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with projections projecting from both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction at least to the side along which the wiring 196 runs, the pair of projections and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197 can hold the wiring together. 196 can be surrounded on three sides, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197 . In addition, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the ridge, the bending rigidity of the plate-like wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the bending of the wiring holding member 197 is prevented when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in good condition.

In addition, the length from the base end to the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is set to be substantially the same length as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the axis of the base end, and the wiring 196 extends from the body frame 3. The predetermined position is a position closer to the axis of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axis of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member are aligned. Since a pantograph-like link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wire holding member 197, and the position where the wire 196 extends in the body frame 3, the wire when opening and closing the door frame 5 is formed. The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be made smooth, the opening/closing operation can be facilitated, and the application of excessive force to the wiring 196, etc., can be reduced to cause problems such as disconnection. can be prevented. Also, a pantograph-like link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, the portion of the wiring 196 extending from the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back at the tip side so as to be along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and compacted, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

Further, the door frame base board cover 195 of the door frame 5 pivotally supporting the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, A step portion 195a capable of accommodating the wire holding member 197 is provided, and when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wire holding member 197 is positioned on the step provided on the door frame base board cover 195. Since the wire holding member 197 is housed in the portion 195a, it is possible to almost eliminate the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the side of the door frame 5 to the side of the body frame 3, making it easier to close the door frame 5, The wiring 196 can be gathered compactly, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being caught on other members and thereby preventing the occurrence of troubles.

Furthermore, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 . When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close to the door frame 5 side (door frame base substrate cover 195 side) as possible, so that wiring from the door frame 5 is also prevented. The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced as much as possible.

In addition, since the wire holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wire holding member 197 can be easily rotated by the inertial force or impact force that causes the door frame 5 to open and close. It is possible to reliably achieve the effects of the above. In addition, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame 5, there is no need to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 on the main body frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 can hold a game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 by increasing the size of the game board 4 and can strongly attract the player's interest with the large game board 4.例文帳に追加can.

25 and 26, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft extending from the rear end of the tubular portion 141 to the axis of the tubular portion 141. An annular flange portion 142 extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the opposite direction, and a plurality of (three in this example) protrusions projecting into the cylindrical portion 141 and arranged at uneven intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. 143 , and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141 . The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 with a predetermined screw while the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110. Although not shown, the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 is substantially aligned with the wire passage opening 115 when attached to the handle attachment portion 114 .

The handle bracket 140 is provided with two projections 143 on the upper side and two on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141 . They are arranged and formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three ridges 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three grooves 502a of the handle device 500 are aligned. there is Accordingly, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported so as not to rotate relative to the handle bracket 140 .

The handle bracket 140 is attached to the obliquely inclined handle attachment portion 114 so that the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 extends to the right (open side) as it goes forward in a front view. The shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state is similarly tilted.

25 and 26, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door-frame base unit 100 consists of an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the rear surface of the upper side of the door-frame base body 110, and a door-frame base body. A support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the back surface of the pivot-side side portion of the door-frame base body 110 , an opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the back surface of the open-side side portion of the door-frame base body 110 , and the door-frame base body 110 . A lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 attached along the back surface of the lower side of the game window 101 is provided, and they are fastened to each other with screws, rivets, or the like to form a rectangular shape.

As shown in FIG. 25, this reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided on the upper surface thereof at the upper and lower ends of a supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and a lower surface thereof. and a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper and lower shaft support fittings 630 and 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3 on the shaft support side, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. It is pivotally supported so that it can be freely opened and closed.

Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially equal to the width dimension of the door frame base body 110. A lower bent projecting piece 159 bent forward (see FIG. 25), and an upper bent projecting piece 160 bent forward on the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge in front view. and a vertically bent projecting piece 161 which is bent backward at the central portion of the upper long side edge and extends vertically. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by a lower bending projecting piece 159, an upper bending projecting piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to be engaged and locked with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, which will be described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the vertically bent projecting piece 161 is engaged with the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 is horizontally and vertically bent. It is designed to be able to restrict backward movement. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed with a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101 a of the door frame base body 110 .

In addition, the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes open-side outward bending projecting pieces 163 bent rearward on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, As shown in the figure, the opening-side inward bending projection 164 is formed to extend longer rearward than the opening-side outward bending projection 163 . ing. A hook cover 165 is provided on the lower rear side of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 so as to abut on a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000, which will be described later. Further, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a support-side U-shaped protruding piece 166 extending rearward from the outer end of the long side thereof and opening outward on the support side (Fig. 112). In addition, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bending projecting pieces 167 bent rearward on both sides of its long sides.

The support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcement unit 150 is attached to and supported by the body frame 3 only at two points above and below the upper support portion 156 and the lower support portion 158. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes larger, resulting in an illegal operation. Although there is a risk that the action may become easier, the support-side reinforcement sheet metal 152 of this example includes the support-side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so that the strength of the support-side reinforcement sheet metal 152 is further increased. , the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. Further, the support-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is designed such that a front end piece 952b of a side crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3, which will be described later, is inserted into the U-shape (Fig. 112), it is possible to prevent the insertion of a tool, and it is possible to prevent only the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 from bending, so that the security function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG. The crime prevention cover 180 covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 and has a crime prevention function to prevent unauthorized devices from entering the game board 4. The glass unit 590 is arranged between the reinforcing sheet metals 152 and 153 of the game board 4. The glass unit 590 is formed in a flat plate shape to cover the lower part thereof. A contact recess 181 is formed, and a security rear projecting piece 182 protrudes rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181 . Further, security rear end projecting pieces 183 are provided at both left and right ends of the security cover 180 so as to protrude rearward along the edge shape thereof. In addition, the crime prevention rear end projection 183 on the right side (rotary support side) in the rear view extends longer rearward than the crime prevention rear end projection 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the security cover 180, a crime prevention front projecting piece 184 projecting along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and left and right security projection pieces 184 on the outside of the crime prevention front projection piece 184. A U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 protruding forward is provided at the lower end of the .

In this security cover 180, the attachment elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in a front view is attached to the security cover attachment portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the attachment elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (rotary support side) is attached to the plate. By attaching it to the crime prevention cover attachment part 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. - 特許庁When the crime prevention cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, although detailed illustration is omitted, the crime prevention front projecting piece 184 is fitted to the outer periphery of the lower portion of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590. The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 abuts on the vertically bent projecting piece 161 . In addition, when the door frame 5 is closed, the anti-crime rear projecting piece 182 protruding backward is inserted into the lower surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 at the half on the pivot side, and the half on the open side is forward. It is inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112 of the component 1110 . As a result, even if an unauthorized tool tries to enter the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the entry can be prevented by the security rear projecting piece 182 inserted under the inner rail 1112.例文帳に追加.

The back surface of the security cover 180 can cover the front lower part of the ball-hitting guidance path formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 when the door frame 5 is closed. , the collision of the hit ball flying or sending back through the guide passage portion to the glass plate 594 can be prevented.

As a result, in this example, since the crime prevention cover 180 covers the rear lower periphery of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5, the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 are separated from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if a highly flexible tool is inserted between the holes to commit fraud in the pachinko machine 1 (inside the game area 1100), the crime prevention cover 180 prevents the tool from entering, thereby preventing fraudulent activity. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to have higher safety against such as.

Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with fitting portions 190a that are rotatably fitted to the locking member mounting portions 110b projecting rearward from the door frame base body 110. , and a locking piece 190b that extends in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locks the locking projecting piece 451f of the glass unit 590. As shown in FIG. The glass unit locking member 190 has a locking screw attached to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state in which the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 passes through the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is rotatably pivotally supported with respect to the locking member mounting portion 110b.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a ridge projecting rearward to the rear side. It serves as a finger grip for operation.

Also, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 . Also, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed to predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, respectively. In addition, when the launch cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame base unit 100, their rear surfaces are substantially flush with each other. The front surface of the ball shooting device 650 attached to the body frame 3 can be covered.

[Right side decorative unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG. FIG. 29(A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. Also, FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit exploded and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit exploded and viewed from behind.

The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in this embodiment, as illustrated, decorates the right half of the front outer periphery of the game window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, and the inside is the game window 101. The outer side is formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100 . The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, a side inner lens 212 that is arranged behind the side lens 210, A right side upper decorative substrate 214 arranged above from the approximate center in the vertical direction on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 and having a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LED) and 214b (white LED) mounted on the surface, and a side inner on the lower side. A right side lower decoration substrate 216 arranged below the lens 212 from the center in the vertical direction and having a plurality of LEDs 216a (full-color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface, and a right side upper decoration substrate 214 on the rear side. and a right side upper decorative board cover 218 attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to cover the right side upper decorative board 214 and cover the rear side of the right side lower decorative board 216 so as to hold the right side lower decorative board 216 therebetween. and a right side lower decorative board cover 220 attached to the lens 210 and the side outer cover 202 .

In addition, the right side decoration unit 200 includes a side outer cover 202 attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210, and a side outer cover 202 which is arranged in front of the side lens 210 and in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 at predetermined intervals. A plurality of side flashing lenses 204 radially extending from the center, a side upper inner lens 206 arranged between the upper left part of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and the side upper inner lens 206 as the side inner lens. 212 and an upper right speaker 222 attached to the side upper inner lens 206 .

In this right side decoration unit 200, the side outer cover 202, the side flashing lens 204, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are formed of translucent members. , the side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flashing lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surfaces of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, LEDs 214a, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b respectively 216a, 216b, etc. cannot be clearly seen by the player. In addition, the front surfaces of the upper right side decoration board 214 and the lower right side decoration board 216 are white, and the right side decoration unit 200 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the light from the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b. In addition, when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b are off, the decorative substrates 214, 216 are inconspicuous. The right side upper decoration board 214 and the right side lower decoration board 216 are connected to the peripheral controller 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c and 216a are controlled by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral controller 4140. , 216b to emit light, and the right side decoration unit 200 can be decorated with light.

As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example has the right end and the upper end linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base main body 110 when viewed from the front, and the left end is the game window 101. is formed in a curved shape along the outer periphery of the right side. The side lens 210 includes a peripheral lens portion 210a composed of a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a plurality of peripheral lens portions 210a which are divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and extend substantially concentrically with the game window 101. and a radiation lens portion 210b consisting of a prism surface of . A plurality of radiation lens portions 210b in the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend radially from the center lower portion of the game window 101 in a front view, as shown in the figure, and from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. is recessed rearward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

In addition, the side lens 210 has a side diffusion lens portion 210c extending in the front-rear direction and arranged in rows in the vertical direction on the right side surface. The side diffusing lens portion 210c can widely diffuse the light from the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 in the right direction and the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of through holes are formed in a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker, so that the sound from the upper right speaker can be transmitted to the player side. It is designed so that it can be transmitted.

The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent and is inserted into the side lens 210 from the rear side. In addition, a portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed to have a flat surface. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the side inner lens 212 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the crests protruding forward in the wrinkled portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210 a of the side lens 210 . The side inner lens 212 can irregularly refract and irregularly reflect light by means of a wrinkled portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses. At the same time, it is possible to show a mysterious feeling in which the sense of perspective is unclear.

A plurality of high-intensity color LEDs are mounted on the surfaces of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 of the right side decoration unit 200, and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a of the side lenses 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60° to 180°), and the LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at a position corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 have a relatively wide irradiation angle. Narrower angles (eg, 15° to 60°) are used. In this example, the LEDs 214c of the upper right decorative board 214 are red and green LEDs.

The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decorative unit 200 outputs sounds in the mid-to-high range similarly to the side speaker 130, and is mounted at a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by means of the side upper inner lens 206. ing. The side upper inner lens 206 that supports the upper right speaker 222 has a cylindrical horn portion that extends obliquely forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side when viewed from the front.

The upper right speaker 222 of this example emits sound from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below by means of the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, thereby making noise in relation to other pachinko machines. It is becoming difficult to As with the side inner lens 212, the side upper inner lens 206 also has a wrinkled front surface, and a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the forward protruding ridges of the wrinkled portion. The wrinkled portion and the plurality of small-diameter lenses can refract and reflect light irregularly.

The side flashing lens 204 of the right side decorative unit 200 is arranged to be inserted in front of the radiation lens portion 210b recessed to the rear of the side lens 210, and simulates a rugged rocky area with a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces. The side lens 210 can be accented. In addition, the side flashing lens 204 can perform radial light emission effects by the light emission of the LEDs 214b and 216a of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged on the rear side, and the peripheral lens portion 210a. are divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 so that each can be emphasized.

[Left side decoration unit]
Next, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36. FIG. FIG. 32(A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. Also, FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the left-side decoration unit exploded and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit exploded and viewed from behind. FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the left side decoration unit, and FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing a photograph of the light emission mode of the left side decoration unit.

The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in this embodiment, as illustrated, decorates the left half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, and the game window 101 on the right side. The left side and the upper side are formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and are formed asymmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. - 特許庁The left side decoration unit 240 includes a plurality of large window frames 242a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with substantially the same width as the right side decoration unit 200, and elliptical windows arranged between the large window frames 242a. A frame-like lower side decorative frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, two large window frames 244a continuous to the upper side of the side lower decorative frame 242 and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and arranged in a row, and a large A frame-shaped upper side decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b arranged between the window frames 244a is provided.

In addition, the left side decoration unit 240 includes a side flash lens 246 fitted from the rear side into the small window frames 242b and 244b of the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and the side flash lens 246 on the rear side. a transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a which are supported from the rear side and are fitted from the rear side into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244; An inner decorative member 251 provided with a plurality of slits 251a arranged behind the peripheral lens portion 250a and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and provided with a plated layer having metallic luster on the surface, and the rear side of the inner decorative member 251. and a side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by a plurality of belt-shaped lenses arranged radially around the lower left and right central portions of the game window 101. As shown in FIG.

Also, the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the approximate center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and has a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface. a substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged below from the approximate center in the vertical direction of the side inner lens 252 and having a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface thereof; A left side upper decorative board cover 258 which covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative board 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative board 254, and a left side cover which covers the rear side of the left side lower decorative board 256. and a left side lower decorative substrate cover 260 attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decorative substrate 256. - 特許庁

Further, the left side decorative unit 240 includes an upper left speaker 262 arranged in front of the side inner lens 252 and in the upper right part when viewed from the front, and a transparent speaker 262 which supports the upper left speaker 262 and is attached to the front upper right part of the side inner lens 252 . A diffuser formed by an upper speaker bracket 264 and a plurality of belt-shaped lenses that are attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264 and are inserted into the inner decorative member 251 on the upper right in front view from the rear side and extend radially around the lower left and right center. a right upper inner lens 266 having 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich a protective plate 268 made of a metal plate through which sound can pass.

In this left side decoration unit 240, the side lower decoration frame 242, the side upper decoration frame 244, the left side upper decoration board cover 258, and the left side lower decoration board cover 260 are formed of opaque members. A plated layer of a predetermined color (in this example, silver) is provided on the surface of the decorative member 251 . In addition, the side flash lens 246 is made of translucent synthetic resin and is entirely made of a milky-white synthetic resin. Also, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are made of substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

In this example, both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 (small windows in the radial axial direction centered on the lower left and right center of the game window 101) On both sides of the frames 242b and 244b), opening frames 242c and 244c are formed that penetrate the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 in a notched state. The opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by side flash lenses 246 from the rear side. Therefore, the rear side of the small window frames 242b, 244b and the opening frames 242c, 244c of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 cannot be visually recognized by the player due to the milky-white side flashing lens 246. .

On the other hand, the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 are closed by inserting the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 from the rear side. The inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side through 250a can be visually recognized from the player side. A diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is positioned on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251. Light is irregularly refracted by the diffusion portion 252a and passes through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 to the rear side of the side inner lens 252. A clear view of the sides is no longer possible. In other words, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. etc., cannot be clearly seen from the player's side.

In addition, the front surfaces of the left side upper decoration board 254 and the left side lower decoration board 256 are white, and the left side decoration unit 240 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the light from the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b. In addition, when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are off, the decorative substrates 254, 256 are inconspicuous. The left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 are connected to the peripheral control section 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a and 256b are controlled by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control section 4140. can be appropriately illuminated to decorate the left side decoration unit 240 with light emission.

The side lower decorative frame 242 in the left side decorative unit 240 of this example extends vertically along the left outer periphery of the game window 101 and has a U-shaped cross section with an open rear side. The side lower decorative frame 242 includes a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small window frame 242a arranged between the large window frames 242a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. A window frame 242b and an opening frame 242c arranged on both sides of the small window frame 242b (on the side of the game window 101 and outside the pachinko machine 1) and penetrating in the front-rear direction and notched to the side are provided, and are made of synthetic resin. formed.

The side lower decorative frame 242 has a peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and a side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. is fitted from the rear side. That is, the side lower decorative frame 242 can form the outer peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side flashing lens 246, which correspond to each other.

The upper side decorative frame 244 in the left side decorative unit 240 is continuous with the upper end of the lower side decorative frame 242 and extends from the upper left outer periphery of the game window 101 to the upper outer periphery. It has a U-shaped cross section with an open side. The side upper decorative frame 244 includes two large window frames 244a that extend along the game window 101 and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small window frame that is arranged between the large window frames 244a and penetrates in the front-rear direction. 244b, and an opening frame 244c that is arranged on both sides of the small window frame 244b (the side of the game window 101 and the outside of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is notched to the side, and is formed of synthetic resin. ing.

The side upper decorative frame 244 has a peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 fitted in the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and a side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is fitted from the rear side. In other words, the upper side decorative frame 244 can form the outer peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side flashing lens 246, which correspond to each other. The upper side decorative frame 244 forms a continuous design with the lower side decorative frame 242 when assembled as the left side decorative unit 240 .

In this example, the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 are colored black, and the side lenses viewed from the large window frames 242a, 244a, the small window frames 242b, 244b, and the opening frames 242c, 244c 250 and the side flash lens 246 are emphasized.

In addition, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size obtained by combining the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and is sized to cover the left side and the upper side of the game window 101 from the center. there is The side lens 250 has a peripheral lens portion 250a that is fitted from the rear side into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and a shape recessed rearward between the peripheral lens portions 250a. and a radiation lens portion 250b having a side flash lens 246 disposed on the front side thereof. In the side lens 250, the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed of a single smoothly curved surface, and the radiation lens portion 250b is formed of a substantially flat surface. Also, the side lenses 250 are made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

Further, the inner decorative member 251 in the left side decorative unit 240 is arranged behind each peripheral lens portion 250a in the side lens 250 and has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. ing. As shown in the figure, the inner decorative member 251 has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and also in the width direction so as to form concentric circles around the center of the game window 101. Multiple are provided. Further, the inner decorative member 251 has a front surface in which a plurality of slits 251 a are formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250 . The inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plated layer with silver metallic luster on the surface, and can be visually recognized from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. .

The side inner lens 252 in the left side decorative unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251, has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is made of substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. there is The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffused portion 252a that bulges forward so that the portion corresponding to the inner decorative member 251 is inserted into each inner decorative member 251 from the rear side. The diffusing portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 has a plurality of band-shaped lenses extending radially around the center lower portion in the left-right direction of the game window 101 on the front surface. It intersects (substantially perpendicularly) with the extending direction of the slit 251 a of the decorative member 251 .

The side inner lens 252 has a diffusing portion 252a that can be seen from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. However, light is irregularly refracted by a plurality of belt-like lenses formed in the diffusing portion 252a, so that the light is diffused. The rear side is not clearly visible through the portion 252a. In addition, as shown in the figure, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion portions 252a, so that the light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side is diffused. can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

The left side upper decoration board 254 and the left side lower decoration board 256 of the left side decoration unit 240 are mounted with a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs on their surfaces. The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60° to 180°). LEDs 254b arranged at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b, 244b and opening frames 242c, 244c of the lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 (the radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flashing lens 246), 256b has a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15° to 60°).

The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decorative unit 240 outputs sounds in the mid-to-high range similarly to the side speaker 130, and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by an upper speaker bracket 264. there is The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 has a cylindrical horn portion (not shown) projecting obliquely forward and downward at the left-right center of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the back side of the upper end of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via a protective plate 268 so that the upper left speaker 262 is not visible from the player side when viewed from the front. It has become. In addition, the protective plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent the upper left speaker 262 from being mischievous, and the cone of the upper left speaker 262 to be broken to insert an illegal tool into the pachinko machine 1. It's becoming The upper left speaker 262 of this example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below, so that it is difficult to make noise with respect to other pachinko machines.

Next, a characteristic light emission effect in the left side decorative unit 240 of this example will be described. The left side decorative unit 240 includes, as described above, the side lens 250 that forms the outer surface of the left side decorative unit 240 and has a curved transparent peripheral lens portion 250a, and the peripheral lens portion 250a that is disposed behind the peripheral lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a plated layer with metallic luster and having a plurality of slits 251a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction crossing the direction in which the slits 251a extend. A side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a made up of a plurality of band-shaped lenses, and a left side upper decoration substrate 254 and a left side lower decoration substrate 256 arranged behind the side inner lens 252 and having a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a mounted thereon. and (see FIG. 35, etc.). Thus, in the left side decorative unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are caused to emit light, the light emitted forward is diffused by the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252, passes through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251, Light is emitted from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 toward the player side, and the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be decorated with light emission.

By the way, the light emitted forward (toward the side lens 250) through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is partially transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250, which is partially transparent, and is emitted to the player side. At the same time, the rest of the light is reflected on the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250 a and illuminates the front surface of the inner decorative member 251 . Since the surface of the inner decorative member 251 is provided with a plated layer having a silvery metallic luster, the light reflected toward the inner decorative member 251 from the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a reaches the surface of the inner decorative member 251. The (front surface) reflects toward the peripheral lens portion 250a side, and part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decorative member 251 passes through the peripheral lens portion 250a and is irradiated to the player side.

At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the peripheral lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decorative member 251, and the diffuser portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are each smoothly curved. The light reflected on the rear surface side) converges, and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front side) is diffused. The indirect light reflected by the lens portion 250a and the front surface of the inner decorative member 251 are irradiated to positions that are shifted from each other. Further, the light passing through the slits 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused in stripes in the extending direction of the slits 251a by the diffusing portions 252a formed by a plurality of band-shaped lenses in the side inner lens 252, and crosses the slits 251a. (substantially orthogonal). Therefore, the circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of striped light beams having different densities and extending in a direction that is longer than the width of the slit 251a and intersecting with the extending direction of the slit 251a. As a result, a fantastic luminous decoration with perspective can be achieved (see FIG. 36).

[Upper decorative unit]
Next, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in the door frame. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit as seen from the rear.

The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of this embodiment is, as shown in FIG. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 includes an annular center frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extension frame 281b extending slenderly from the top of the center frame 281a to the left and right and tapering toward the tip, and A front decorative member 281 provided with a frame-shaped lower extension frame 281c extending left and right from the lower portion of the central frame 281a and tapering toward the tip, and an upper extension frame 281b and a lower portion disposed on the rear side of the front decorative member 281. A translucent upper lens 282 that closes the extension frame 281c and has a through hole 282a smaller in diameter than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a; A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 that is inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulges forward, and a plate-like diffusing lens 285 that is arranged behind the upper central lens 284 and has a plurality of fine prisms formed on its surface. , an annular lens support member 286 that holds the outer periphery of the diffuser lens 285 and is supported behind the upper lens 282, and a cylinder that is disposed behind the lens support member 286 and has approximately the same diameter as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286. A light shielding member 287 having a portion 287a, a plurality of LEDs 288a arranged on the rear side of the light shielding member 287 and at positions corresponding to the inner side of the cylindrical portion 287a of the light shielding member 287, and positions corresponding to the outer side of the cylindrical portion 287a. a top center decorative substrate 288 having a plurality of LEDs 288b arranged in the front mounted thereon.

The upper decorative unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decorative member 281, the upper lens 282, the light shielding member 287, and the upper central decorative substrate 288 from the rear side, and a plurality of units arranged on the rear side of the unit base 289 on the front side. , a board cover 291 covering the rear surface of the upper side decoration board 290 and attached to the rear side of the unit base 289, and a board cover 291 attached to the lower rear surface of the board cover 291 and extending rearward. a mounting bracket 292; an upper and lower cover 293 mounted on the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extending rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281; and a contoured upper and lower decorative cover 294 .

Further, the upper decorative unit 280 is attached to the board cover 291 and extends rearward from the upper rear end of the front decorative member 281 in a plate-like shape, and has a notch 295a at the center in the left-right direction, the rear end side of which is open. It includes a cover 295, a plate-like lid member 296 that closes the notch 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decorative member 297 attached to the right side of the unit base 289 in front view and shaped into a predetermined shape. .

In the upper decoration unit 280 of this example, a plated layer having a silvery metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decoration member 281, so that the front decoration member 281 glitters with external light. The upper lens 282 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. and an extension frame lens portion 282c facing inside the frames of the frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c. The upper lens 282 has a plurality of band-like lenses extending radially on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b and arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. A plurality of prisms extending concentrically are formed. As a result, light can be irregularly refracted by the plurality of prisms and belt-shaped lenses of the upper lens 282, so that the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be seen clearly.

Also, the upper center lens 284 of the upper decorative unit 280 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper center lens 284 has a smooth spindle shape on the front side, and a plurality of concentric lenses on the rear side. is invisible to

In addition, the upper central decorative substrate 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface, each of which is a full-color LED. The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 can be separately decorated with light. Furthermore, the upper side decoration substrate 290 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface thereof, each of which is a full-color LED. are arranged at positions corresponding to the respective frames. The upper side decorative substrate 290 can light-embellish the upper extending frame 281b and the lower extending frame 281c of the front decorative member 281 by properly emitting light from the LEDs 290a.

[Dish unit]
Next, the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the tray unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the tray unit in the door frame. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view cut at the portion of the ball rental unit of the plate unit in the door frame.

The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls paid out from a prize ball device 740 described later. A ball can be supplied to a hitting ball launching device 650 to be described later via a ball feeding unit 580 . As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of this example includes a substantially plate-shaped dish unit base 310 fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped upper plate body 312 that is fixed to the approximate center of the front surface, is open at the top and rear, and bulges forward greatly on the left side (rotary support side) when viewed from the front. A top plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the horizontal direction projects forward when viewed, a top plate front decoration member 316 attached to the upper front edge of the top plate top panel 314, and a top plate front part. A top plate upper inner decorative member 318 disposed between the decorative member 316 and the top plate top panel 314 continues to the right portion of the top plate front decorative member 316 and covers the top right portion of the top plate top panel 314. An upper plate upper right decorative member 319 is provided.

In addition, the plate unit 300 is mounted on the lower surface of the upper plate 314 on the right side from the center in the left and right direction. and an upper dish decoration substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on its upper surface. A part of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper right upper plate decorative member 319 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately causing the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 to emit light.

Further, the plate unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the plate unit base 310 on the lower side of the upper plate main body 312, and is open at the upper and rear sides. A dish-shaped lower plate body 324 is formed so as to become lower as it goes, and is fixed to the upper portion of the lower plate body 324. When viewed from the front, the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in substantially the same way as the lower plate body 324, and the front end extends in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped lower tray top plate 326 curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of a lock device 1000 described later on a portion covering the front end of the lower side of the lower tray main body 324 and extending to the right in front view. A lower tray cover 328 having a facing lock hole 328a, and an upper opening 330a and an upper opening 330a which decorate the right side of the lower end of the lower tray cover 328 from a left-right center position and are coaxial with the lock hole 328a of the lower tray cover 328. and a lower tray side cover 330 having a lower opening 330b that opens downward and into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front.

The plate unit 300 also includes a lower plate upper left side cover 332 extending obliquely to cover the left front end of the lower plate main body 324 and the left front end of the lower plate top plate 326, and the lower plate upper left side cover 332 arranged at the lower end of the lower plate upper left side cover 332 and extending forward and backward. A lower pan left lower side cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in a direction, a protective cover 336 made of a metal plate that closes the opening 334a of the lower pan left lower side cover 334 from the rear side and allows sound to pass through, and a protection and a frame-like holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower pan. The right front end of the lower tray top plate 326 is covered with the upper tray front decoration member 316 .

The plate unit 300 is attached to the upper left and right ends of the plate unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower plate side cover 330 and the upper left side cover 332 of the lower plate are designed. and a side speaker cover 338 having an opening 338a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338. A cover body 339 having a gently curved disc shape and having a plurality of holes is provided so as to close the portion 338a from the rear side and bulge forward.

In this example, since the cover body 339 is made of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to deform even if it is pushed or hit from the front side. as long as it can be protected. Also, the side speaker cover 338 has a plated layer with a silvery metallic luster formed on its surface. The cover body 339 is colored black.

Further, the plate unit 300 includes an upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 attached to the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate main body 312 for removing game balls stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, and a lower plate main body 324. A lower tray ball extracting mechanism 350 attached to the lower surface for extracting game balls stored in the lower tray 302 downward, and a lower tray ball extracting mechanism 350 attached to the upper left side of the tray unit base 310 in front view and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball lending unit 360 that operates a ball lending machine (also called CR unit 6, not shown) is provided.

The plate unit 300 of this example comprises a plate unit base 310 part, a plate main body 312, a plate top panel 314, and the like to form a plate 301 capable of storing game balls. Also, the plate unit 300 constitutes a lower plate 302 capable of storing game balls by a portion of the plate unit base 310, a lower plate main body 324, a lower plate top plate 326, a lower plate cover 328, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 43, the plate unit base 310 of the plate unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate-like shape extending in the left-right direction. are provided. A ball rental unit mounting portion 310b for mounting a ball rental unit 360 is formed through the left end of the decorative portion 310a in the longitudinal direction. The plate unit base 310 is arranged below the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner when viewed from the front) and has an oblong rectangular upper plate ball supply port 310c penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an upper plate ball supply port 310c. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending vertically below the right end of the decorative portion 310a below the opening 310c (approximately in the middle of the plate unit base 310 in the height direction), and an upper plate. A pair of lower plate support portions 310e are arranged directly below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper plate ball supply port 310c, protrude forward, and have the same upper surface height. In addition, the upper tray ball discharge port 310d is formed continuously up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the upper surface of the lower tray support portion 310e arranged directly below.

The tray unit 300 is disposed between a pair of lower tray support portions 310e and is fitted with the lower tray main body 324 and the rear end of the lower tray top plate 326 to form a horizontally long rectangular annular lower tray support when viewed from the front. It is provided with a groove 310f and a rectangular lower tray ball supply port 310g that is arranged in the lower portion of the part surrounded by the lower tray support groove 310f and is located on the right side of the center and penetrates in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h that extends cylindrically rearward so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. A notch portion 310i formed on the side surface and having a size through which a game ball can pass is provided.

The upper tray ball supply port 310c of the tray unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 via the cutouts 101a and 162 of the door frame base body 110 and the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the first bulb outlet 544 a of the unit 540 . The front end of the upper bowl ball supply port 310c is provided with a guide recess 310j that extends long to the right in front view and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is slanted so that the right end side in the front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is slanted so that the front end side is lower in the front-rear direction. As a result, the difference in height between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate main body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guide recess 310j. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper tray ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper tray 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 through the foul cover unit 540 are Since it is impossible to come out straight from the upper tray ball supply port 310c into the front upper tray 301, the put out game ball comes into contact with the game ball that closes the front side of the upper tray ball supply port 310c and rolls. The direction is changed, the ball is guided to roll in the right direction in the front view inside the guide recess 310j, and is released from near the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper tray 301. Become. As a result, since the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower two stages in the upper tray 301, when the game balls block the front of the upper tray ball supply port 310c, the player does not move the game balls by hand. It is possible to continue to supply (release) the game balls that have been paid out into the upper tray 301 even if the game balls are stored in the upper tray 301, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling annoyed by the storage of the game balls in the upper tray 301. To prevent a player from losing interest in a game by devoting himself to the operation of hitting the game ball or playing the game with the hit game ball, and to increase the amount of game balls stored in the upper tray 301.例文帳に追加is now possible.

The upper tray ball discharge opening 310d of the tray unit base 310 includes the opening 344a of the upper tray ball removal base 344 of the upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the entry port 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 through the hole. Further, the lower tray ball supply port 310g has a lower tray ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward from the rear side thereof, which penetrates the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends rearward. Above, it is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the notch 310i of the lower tray ball supply gutter 310h is connected to the upper tray ball extraction mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removal channel 344c of the upper dish ball removal base 344. As shown in FIG.

In this example, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower tray ball supply port 310g is provided with a widening portion 310k that widens leftward in a front view. The front end of 310g is in a state of spreading in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress early occurrence of ball clogging in the lower tray ball supply port 310g due to the game balls in the lower tray 302 accumulated in front of the lower tray ball supply port 310g, so that more games can be played. Balls can be supplied into the lower plate 302 .

The upper plate main body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (rotary support side) bulges forward from the center when viewed from the front, and the bottom surface is generally lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. there is The bottom surface of the upper tray main body 312 has a rear end near the bottom of the upper tray ball supply opening 310c in the tray unit base 310 on the pivot side, and a rear end on the open side near the upper tray ball discharge opening 310d in the tray unit base 310. They are formed so as to be located near the middle positions in the vertical direction, respectively, and game balls supplied from the upper tray ball supply port 310c to the upper tray main body 312 (upper tray 301) are guided to the upper tray ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

The upper plate main body 312 has a metal upper plate rail 313 attached to the open side from the center in the left-right direction at the rear end of the bottom surface and capable of coming into contact with the game balls. Although illustration is omitted, the upper tray rail 313 is electrically grounded (earthed) so that the static electricity charged to the game ball can be removed.

The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate main body 312 so that the center of the door frame 5 in the left-right direction projects forward, and is outside the open side of the upper plate main body 312. is formed with a mounting hole 314a penetrating in the vertical direction and into which an upper tray ball extracting button 341 of an upper tray ball extracting mechanism 340, which will be described later, is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 has a front end formed in a stepped shape that is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312, and has a decoration mounting portion 314b for mounting the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318. and an operation unit mounting portion 314c formed in a stepped shape further lower than the decoration mounting portion 314b at a position in front of the upper plate main body 312 at the center in the left-right direction and for mounting an operation unit 400 to be described later. there is

The upper plate front decorative member 316 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin and is formed into a curved shape extending in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314 . The upper plate front decorative member 316 has a smooth shape on the left side from the right side of the center in the left-right direction, while the right side is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape. It is formed in a rugged shape like this. In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate front decorative member 316 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the right rear surface formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and can refract light irregularly. The rear side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 is arranged behind the smoothly formed portion on the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316, and is provided with a plated layer having silver metallic luster on its surface. ing. As a result, when the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 is assembled, the portion that can be seen through the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 can be clearly seen from the player side, whereas the portion that can be seen through the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 is clearly visible from the right side of the upper plate front decorative member 316. The part that can be seen through is made so that it looks unclear from the player's side and the sense of distance is uncertain.

In addition, the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The surface of the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape like the right portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 . It is formed integrally with the right portion, and the upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of an upper bowl ball extracting button 341 of an upper bowl ball extracting mechanism 340 described later. In addition, the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the rear surface (lower surface), which can refract light irregularly and prevent the player from clearly seeing the lower side. there is A top plate decoration board 322 is arranged on the rear side of the right portion of the top plate front decorative member 316 and on the bottom side of the top plate upper right decorative member 319, and LEDs 322a of the top plate decoration board 322 are arranged. By appropriately emitting light, the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be appropriately caused to emit light.

The lower plate main body 324 of the plate unit 300 includes a bottom plate 324a that spreads forward in a fan shape in a plan view, the rear end of which is formed in a straight line in the left-right direction, and the bottom plate 324a that is formed so that the approximate center of the upper surface is the lowest, and the center of the bottom plate 324a. and side plates 324c rising upward from the front and side ends of the bottom plate 324a except for the rear end. The side plate 324c of the lower tray main body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is lowest at the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side. The upper end that rises upward from the side end is formed in a linear shape, and both the left and right ends of the lower tray top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear portion of the upper end.

The bottom plate 324a and the rear ends of the side plates 324c of the lower plate main body 324 are inserted and supported in the lower plate support grooves 310f formed in the front surface of the plate unit base 310. As shown in FIG. The lower tray ball removal hole 324b of the lower tray main body 324 is closed by an open/close shutter 352 of a lower tray ball removal mechanism 350 arranged on the back side of the bottom plate 324a.

The lower tray cover 328 is made of black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower tray side cover 330 is made of a predetermined synthetic resin, and has a plated layer with a silver metallic feel (not a mirror surface but a matt state as if sandblasted) on the surface. The lower tray side cover 330 has a plate-like portion that extends rearward from the lower end and forms a part of the bottom surface of the tray unit 300 . The lock hole 328a of the lower tray cover 328 and the upper opening 330a of the lower tray side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 attached to the body frame 3. On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

The lower plate upper left side cover 332 is made of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a plated layer with a silvery metallic luster on its surface. The lower tray lower left side cover 334 is made of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a plated layer with a red metallic luster on its surface. It has a plate-like part forming a part. The opening 334a of the lower tray left side cover 334 is formed at a position corresponding to the front surface of a lower speaker 821 (low-frequency speaker) provided in the body frame 3, which will be described later. It is designed to be permeable to the side. A protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower tray is made of a punching metal plate with a plurality of holes drilled therein to prevent unauthorized tools from being inserted therein. .

The tray unit 300 of this example is closed by a lower tray side cover 330 and a lower left lower side cover 334 on the bottom surface except for the center in the left-right direction. 334 is closed by a lower tray ball removing mechanism 350, which will be described later.

The upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 in the tray unit 300 includes an upper tray ball removal button 341 that is attached to the mounting hole 314a of the upper tray upper panel 314 so as to be able to advance and retreat in the vertical direction, and the upper tray ball removal button 341. and an operating piece 342 supported on the front side of the plate unit base 310 which moves up and down more than the upper plate ball removal button 341, and which supports the operating piece 342 so as to be operable (rotatable) and the plate unit base 310. and a contact piece that slides vertically by the vertical movement of the mounting base 346 attached to the front surface of the mounting base 346 and the operating piece 342 that is supported by the mounting base 346, and contacts the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feed unit 580, which will be described later. An upper tray ball extracting slider 343 provided on the rear side of the tray unit base 310 provided with 343a, and an upper tray ball attached to the rear side of the tray unit base 310 by supporting the upper tray ball removing slider 343 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. a punch base 344;

Although not shown in detail, the upper tray ball removing mechanism 340 has an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper tray ball removing button 341 so that the upper tray ball removing button 341 is positioned at the upper movement end. It is biased upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper bowl ball extraction slider 343 is biased upward by a coil spring provided between it and the upper bowl ball extraction base 344 .

The upper tray ball removal base 344 of the upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper tray ball discharge port 310d of the tray unit base 310, and at the same time, communicates with the upper tray ball discharge port 310d to open forward. 43), and a ball guide passage 344b (FIGS. 42 and 43) that communicates with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper tray ball extraction base 344 and guides the game ball that has passed through the opening 344a downward and then backward. 44), and after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guide channel 344b, extend substantially along the lower side of the upper tray ball extraction base 344 toward the end on the right side (rotary support side) in rear view. A ball extraction channel 344c in which a game ball can roll is provided.

The upper tray ball extraction base 344 has an opening 344a that communicates with the upper tray ball discharge port 310d, and a lower end of a ball guide passage 344b that communicates with the opening 344a. It communicates with an inlet 581a of a ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 via the feeding opening 113, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 301 are transferred to the ball feeding unit 580. can be supplied to

The upper end of the ball extraction channel 344c of the upper tray ball extraction base 344, which is adjacent to the ball guide channel 344b, communicates with the ball extraction port 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 through the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110. In addition, the lower end extending to the shaft support side communicates with the notch portion 310i of the lower tray ball supply gutter 310h in the tray unit base 310, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 is discharged. It can be guided to the lower tray 302 . The lower rear end of the ball removal channel 344c is closed by an upper plate ball removal channel cover 345. As shown in FIG.

In this upper bowl ball extracting mechanism 340, when the upper bowl ball extracting button 341 is pressed downward against the urging force of the coil spring, the upper bowl ball extracting slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward also moves. Move down. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580, which contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a, rotates the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction as the contact piece 343a moves downward. As a result, the partition between the inlet 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the inlet 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper tray 301 are transferred from the upper tray ball discharge port 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 via the opening 344a of the upper tray ball extraction base 344 and the ball guide passage 344b. After entering the ball outlet 581b, the ball is discharged from the ball outlet 581b into the ball outlet channel 344c of the upper tray ball outlet base 344, and through the lower tray ball supply trough 310h of the tray unit base 310, from the lower tray ball supply opening 310g to the lower tray 302. can be discharged to

The ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a of the upper tray ball removing slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by the coil spring. Even if a game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 583a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that biases the upper tray ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c. It is possible to prevent damage, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing off the partition portion 583a.

The lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 in the tray unit 300 is disposed between the lower tray side cover 330 and the lower left lower side cover 334 on the lower side of the lower tray main body 324 and forms the central portion of the bottom surface of the tray unit 300. a ball extractor base 351; a plate-shaped opening/closing shutter 352 which is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower pan ball extracting base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower pan ball extracting hole 324b of the lower pan main body 324; A lower pan ball extractor slide 353 which is movable and supported on the upper surface of a lower pan ball extractor base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower pan ball extractor button 354 attached to the front end of the lower pan ball extractor slide 353. ing.

The lower tray ball removal base 351 has a base ball removal hole 351a penetrating vertically at a position facing the lower tray ball removal hole 324b of the lower tray main body 324. As shown in FIG. The open/close shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower tray ball removal hole 324b, and a shutter ball removal hole disposed in front of the closing portion 352a and penetrating in the vertical direction and substantially coinciding with the lower tray ball removal hole 324b. The closing portion 352a is urged by a coil spring 356 between the lower tray ball removal base 351 and the closing portion 352a to a position to close the lower tray ball removal hole 324b and the base ball removal hole 351a. .

Although not shown in detail, the open/close shutter 352 has a contact pin that can come into contact with the lower tray ball removal slide 353. When this contact pin contacts the lower tray ball removal slide 353, the opening and closing shutter 352 , the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 352b are rotated backward by the lower plate ball removal slide 353, and the lower plate ball removal slide 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring 356. It is possible to do so.

In addition, the lower tray ball removal mechanism 350 is configured so that the shutter ball removal hole 352b of the open/close shutter 352 is substantially coincident with the lower tray ball removal hole 324b of the lower tray main body 324 and the base ball removal hole 351a of the lower tray ball removal base 351. A retaining mechanism 355 is also provided for retaining the lower pan ball extractor slide 353 in place to retain it in the active position.

When the surface shape of the lower tray ball removal button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower tray cover 328 and the like, the lower tray ball removal mechanism 350 is closed when the lower tray ball removal button 354 is moved to the front end. The closing portion 352a of the open/close shutter 352 closes the lower tray ball extraction hole 324b of the lower tray main body 324. As shown in FIG. In this state, game balls can be stored in the lower tray main body 324 (lower tray 302). When the lower tray ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pushed rearward, the lower tray ball removal button 354 and the lower tray ball removal slide 353 slide rearward, and the lower tray ball removal slide 353 slides rearward. The opening/closing shutter 352 rotates against the urging force of the coil spring 356 so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball extraction hole 352b move rearward.

As the open/close shutter 352 rotates backward, the shutter ball removal hole 352b overlaps with the lower tray ball removal hole 324b and the base ball removal hole 351a. 324b, and the game balls stored in the lower tray 302 can be discharged downward from the tray unit 300 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 324b. When the lower tray ball removal slide 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removal hole 352b and the lower tray ball removal hole 324b are substantially aligned, the lower tray ball removal slide 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. By locking (holding) the slide of the lower pan ball extracting slide 353, the lower pan ball extracting button 354 remains in an open state in which it retreats rearward, and the shutter ball extracting hole 352b is opened. The game balls stored in the lower tray 302 can be ejected downward even if the lower tray ball extraction button 354 is not kept pressed.

On the other hand, when closing the lower tray ball removal hole 324b, pressing the retracted open lower tray ball removal button 354 further rearward releases the lower tray ball removal slide 353 from being held by the holding mechanism 355. The ball removal slide 353 is slidable, and the open/close shutter 352 is biased by the coil spring in the direction in which the closing portion 352a closes the lower plate ball removal hole 324b. It rotates in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball extraction hole 324b. As the open/close shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower tray ball removal slide 353 slides forward, the lower tray ball removal hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower tray ball removal button 354 is lowered. It returns to the closed state position substantially coinciding with the front surface of the plate cover 328 and the like, and the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 302.例文帳に追加

Note that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above function, and the detailed explanation of the mechanism is omitted.

A ball rental unit 360 in the plate unit 300 has a ball rental button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pushed backward, and a rental balance display portion 363 between the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 . This ball lending unit 360 puts cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and presses a ball lending button 361 to deposit a predetermined number of game balls into the tray unit 300. In addition to being able to lend (pay out) to the upper tray 301, when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the lent cash and the prepaid card are returned after subtracting the balance of the amount borrowed. there is In addition, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed in the remaining lending display section 363 .

The ball rental unit 360 is attached to the ball rental unit attachment portion 310b formed in the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the plate unit base 310 from the rear side. In addition, the ball rental unit 360 is provided with a crime prevention cover mounting portion 364 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the pivot side (left side in front view) of the crime prevention cover 180 .

More specifically, the ball rental unit 360 includes a transparent ball rental unit front cover 365 that covers the front side of the rental balance display part 363, and a rental balance display part 363 that is arranged behind the ball rental unit front cover 365 and is attached. A ball rental unit base plate 366 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch that operates by operating the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 is attached, and the ball rental unit base 310 that covers the rear side of the ball rental unit base plate 366. and a rear cover 367 attached to the rear side of the attachment portion 310b. The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 367 .

The ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 to which the ball rental unit 360 is mounted has a circular button opening 310m facing the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362, and a rental button opening formed between the button openings 310m. It has a rectangular display opening 310n closed by the ball unit front cover 365, and projections 310o formed on the outer peripheries of the two button openings 310m and protruding forward. A remaining rental display portion 363 arranged on the rear side through the front cover 365 of the rental ball unit can be seen from the player side. Also, as shown in FIG. 45, the projecting portion 310o of the plate unit base 310 has a rounded front end.

In the ball rental unit 360 of this example, as shown in the figure, the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 is arranged above the upper plate 301 and directly above the upper plate ball supply port 310c. are placed facing the Further, in the ball rental unit 360, the return button 362 is arranged at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the ball rental button 361 is. In this example, the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 are colored in a different color from the plate unit base 310 (ball rental unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the ball rental button 361 and return button 362 .

In addition, the ball rental unit 360 is provided with a projecting portion 310o projecting forward (toward the player) from the outer periphery of the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362. Since the hand touches the protruding portion 310o before touching the ball rental button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the ball rental button 361 or the return button 362, and the ball rental button 361, the return button 362, etc. can be prevented from being erroneously operated.

The plate unit 300 of this example is provided with an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and can be made into a pachinko machine 1 having the same feeling as the conventional pachinko machine provided with two storage plates. To make the pachinko machine 1 reminiscent of a pachinko machine and to reduce the feeling of uneasiness or the like given to a player even with a new pachinko machine 1 (a new model of pachinko machine) so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine for playing. It's becoming

[Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50. FIG. FIG. 46(A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit viewed from the upper front right side, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit viewed from the lower front right side. Furthermore, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operating unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing the pressing operation portion of the operating unit in a pressed state.

The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of this embodiment is arranged on the front surface of the upper tray 301 at the approximate center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. It is equipped with an operation unit 405, which can accept the player's operation according to the game state, can move the dial operation unit 401, and can perform not only the game ball hitting operation but also the game ball hitting operation for the player. , to be able to participate in the production during the game.

The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation portion 401 , a cylindrical pressing operation portion 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation portion 401 , and an annular driven portion 405 connected to the lower end of the dial operation portion 401 . A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 to which the drive gear 412 is fixed to a rotating shaft, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation portion holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b that supports the pressing operation portion 405 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction; A base member having an opening 420a through which a spring 418 biasing upward and a gear rail 416a and a button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 can pass, and to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface. 420, an upper cover 422 covering the upper surface of the base member 420 and having an opening 422a through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operating portion 401 can pass; A lower cover 424 that covers the lower surface of the member 420 and the dial drive motor 414 is mainly provided.

The operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and extends outward from an opening 426a through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the plate unit 300, and a cover body 426 disposed above the cover body 426 and formed in a predetermined shape and plated with silver metallic luster on the surface. It has a layered inner cover 427 and a transparent surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the inner cover 427 . The inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylindrical portion 401c of the dial operating portion 401 can pass.

Furthermore, the operation unit 400 is attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 430a through which the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 and the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass. A dial decoration board 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the ring of , and a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a fixed to the lower side of the operation unit holding member 416 for detecting rotation of the dial operation unit 401, 432b, a press detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405, and a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface directly below the press operation unit 405. The button decoration substrate 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation portion holding member 416 by the substrate holding claws 416g of the operation portion holding member 416. As shown in FIG.

The dial operation portion 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a translucent material, and includes a cylindrical inner cylinder portion 401a extending in the vertical direction and an inner cylinder portion 401a extending outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder portion 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extended surface, an outer cylinder portion 401c extending cylindrically downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b and shorter than the inner cylinder portion 401a, and an outer cylinder and a flange portion 401d annularly extending outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the collar portion 401 d of the dial operating portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a of the upper cover 422 . In addition, the dial operation portion 401 has a connection locking portion (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylindrical portion 401a, and by locking the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410, the dial operation portion 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

Further, the dial operating portion 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes toward the center from the inner wall of the inner cylinder portion 401a at a position lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. A projecting portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner circumference of the inner cylindrical portion 401a. Although the details will be described later, this projecting portion 401f can come into contact with the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operation portion 401. By coming into contact with the portion 401f, the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) can be prevented from further retracting into the inner cylindrical portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

As shown in the figure, the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 and the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405 are arranged such that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. slanted surfaces, so that the contact area becomes large when they come into contact with each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be more dispersed (relieved) to the dial operation portion 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation portion 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation portion 405 side. It has become.

Further, the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a closed upper end, and includes a cylindrical button body 406 with a bottom, a button cap 407 closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. 407 and is sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407 . The button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a truncated cone shape that tapers downward as the lower surface of the bottom portion goes downward, and the upper end of a coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the truncated cone shape. In addition, a through-hole 406a is provided in the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape and extends vertically through the through-hole 406a. It's like

Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406b extending downward from the lower part of the outer periphery and having lower ends protruding outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. By engaging with a locking projection 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is restrained so that the button main body 406 does not slip out of the button support cylinder 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 is provided with an abutting portion that prevents the engaging claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button main body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) is prevented from rotating within the button support tube 416b. A gap of a predetermined amount is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the abutting portion in the button support cylinder 416b. It is designed to be able to rotate within a range.

Further, the button body 406 is provided with a press detection piece 406c that extends downward from a different position on the outer periphery lower portion of the button body 406b and that can be detected by the press detection sensor 432c of the button decoration substrate 432 . When the button main body 406 (press operation portion 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418, the press detection piece 406c is detected by the press detection sensor 432c.

Furthermore, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a smaller outer diameter on the lower side than the approximate center in the vertical direction, and a stepped portion 407a between the upper and lower sides. is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 below the stepped portion 407a, and has a dial operation portion above the stepped portion 407a. 401 has a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 401a and a larger diameter than the inner diameter of the projecting portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner cylindrical portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operation portion 401, the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401. , the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) cannot be retracted further into the inner cylindrical portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

Furthermore, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation portion 405 are made of a material having a translucent ring. A character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408 , and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407 .

The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 has a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the driving gear 412 on its annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b of the operating portion holding member 416, and has an annular slide on the lower surface thereof that contacts the gear rail 416a of the operating portion holding member 416. It has a moving surface 410a. By inserting the driven gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the driven gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It has become.

In addition, the driven gear 410 has a pair of connecting locking claws 410b that extend upward from opposite positions on the upper end and protrude inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operating portion 401 are connected to each other so as to be rotatable together by being engaged with the connection engaging portion 401e of the inner cylindrical portion 401a.

The driven gear 410 also has a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that protrude downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432. Although details will be described later, the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b. With the slit 410d formed therebetween, the rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operating portion 401 can be detected by the detection patterns of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c. In this example, the circumferential lengths of the rotation detecting piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

Further, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410 as shown in the figure, and is fixed so as to be rotatable integrally with the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414 . The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor that can arbitrarily control the direction of rotation, the speed of rotation, and the angle of rotation. , the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410 . Further, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeatedly rotating the driving gear 412 (rotating shaft) forward and reverse in small increments by the dial driving motor 414 . Further, by stopping the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 for a short period of time at each predetermined rotation angle based on the detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is suppressed by clicking. It is designed to be able to give a feeling.

Furthermore, the operation unit holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a cylindrical button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 that protrudes upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. and a locking projection 416f ( 49 and 50), and a through hole 416c that penetrates through the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and transmits light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 into the button support cylinder 416b (press operation unit 405). An opening 416d through which the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432 can pass vertically through the bottom outside the button support cylinder 416b, and an opening 416d through which the bottom inside the button support cylinder 416b can pass. and a pair of board holding claws 416g extending downward from the bottom surface for engaging and holding the button decoration board 432. I have it.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the operation portion holding member 416 is disposed inside the button support cylinder 416b, forms a predetermined amount of gap in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406, and locks the locking claw 406b. It further includes a plurality of abutting portions that can abut against the claws 406b. This abutting portion allows the button body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angular range, and prevents it from rotating in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, the operation unit holding member 416 has screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decoration substrate 432, etc., which are appropriately positioned. provided for.

The driven gear 410 is inserted through the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b, and placed on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so as to be dynamically rotatable. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support tube 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coiled spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the bottom surface of the button main body 406 in the shape of a truncated cone. 405) is biased upward.

The base member 420 of the operation unit 400 is made of metal such as an aluminum alloy, so that the operation unit 400 is less likely to break even if the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is strongly struck. The base member 420 includes a lower concave portion 420b recessed upward into which the outer periphery of the operating portion holding member 416 can be fitted, and a bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower concave portion 420b. an opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass; an upper recess 420c recessed downward and capable of accommodating at least the driven gear 410, disposed on the opposite side of the opening 420a from the lower recess 420b; It has As shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 has a motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414, which opens downward outside the lower recess 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d which opens downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. It has a plurality of (four in this example) legs 420e that protrude by a predetermined amount, and positioning holes 420f that open downward at the lower ends of the legs 420e.

In addition, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 arranged upwardly outside the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portions 420g are arranged upward from different positions outside the upper concave portion 420c. A plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the protruding dial decoration board 430 are provided. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 has positioning bosses for positioning each member, mounting holes, etc., at appropriate positions on its upper and lower surfaces.

This base member 420 has an opening 420a in the center, and the operation portion holding member 416 is fitted and inserted into the lower recessed portion 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from below. is screwed into the operating section holding member 416 from above through the ceiling of the lower recessed portion 420b, so that the operating section holding member 416 can be supported. Although detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, when the operating portion holding member 416 is supported, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling portion of the lower recessed portion 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper recessed portion 420c. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate within the upper recess 420c without any problem.

A positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end of the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 is fitted with a positioning projection 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of a lower cover 424, which will be described later. 420 and lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions relative to each other. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 housed in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is attached to the driven gear 420h. It is kept out of contact with the gear 410 .

Further, the dial drive motor 414 is attached to the motor attachment portion 420d of the base member 420, so that the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 and the surface of the base member 420 are in contact with each other. , and the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420 . As a result, overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, thereby preventing malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and has an inner diameter opening 422a through which the outer cylindrical portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass but the collar portion 401d cannot pass. ing. The top cover 422 is long in the direction connecting the axial center of the pressing operation portion 405 (driven gear 410) and the axial center of the dial driving motor 414 (driving gear 412) (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) in plan view. It is formed to extend, and has engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled together.

The upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer circumference of one side (the front side of the pachinko machine 1) in the short axis direction (the front and back direction of the pachinko machine 1), and has a claw-shaped locking piece 422c with the lower end protruding outward. It has This locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper plate front decorative member 316 of the plate unit 300. By locking the locking piece 422c to the upper plate front decorative member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from slipping upward from the operation unit mounting portion 314c.

The upper cover 422 is a base member 420 to which the operation section holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration board 430, the dial operation section 401, etc. are attached, and the dial operation section 401 is mounted on the opening 422a from below. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so that the dial operation part 401 can pass through, the opening 422a can prevent the dial operation part 401 from coming off upward.

On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box-like shape with an open top, and has an outer peripheral shape that substantially matches the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning projection 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420e is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that can be engaged with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at the upper portions of both ends in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

As shown, the cover body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a through which the upper cover 422 can pass, and an opening 426a extending outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided.

The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the plate unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426, and although detailed illustration is omitted, it is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the plate unit 300. In this state, the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) can be attached in a state where the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is slightly above the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm). When the is pressed or hit, the cover main body 426 is elastically deformed to reduce the impact.

With the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 removed, the operation unit 400 attaches the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426 to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the plate unit 300 with predetermined screws. The structure is such that an inner cover 427 and a surface cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover main body 426 .

In the operation unit 400 of this embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation part 401 has a circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and a circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The length in the direction is assumed to be the same length. The pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432 have a circumferential interval corresponding to the dial operation portion 401 that is 2.5 times the circumferential length of the rotation detection piece 410c. It is said that As a result, although the details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs between detection and non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation is detected. From the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b, it is possible to detect in which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotating.

Further, although details will be described later, the operation unit 400 of this example can rotate the dial operation section 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial driving motor 414. . In addition, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation section 401 step by step by the driving force of a dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, and rotates the dial operation section 401 when the player rotates the dial operation section 401. It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from rotating on purpose, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Furthermore, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation section 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial driving motor 414 forward and backward in small steps.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of the present example, as shown in FIG. 50, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts against the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, thereby 407 (pressing operation portion 405) cannot be further retracted into the inner cylindrical portion 401a, so that the load applied to the pressing operation portion 405 is transferred to the dial via the stepped portion 407a and the projecting portion 401f. It can be distributed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is hard to break.

Further, the operation unit 400 of the present example presses the pressing operation portion 405 to bring the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 into contact with each other, and the dial drive motor 414 is rotated in small increments. By repeating rotation and reversal, it is possible to vibrate not only the dial operation unit 401 but also the pressing operation unit 405, and the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 surprises the player and makes the player enjoy the game and performance. It has become.

According to the operation unit 400 of this embodiment, the dial operation part 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation part 405 that can be pressed by the player are supported by the base member 420 made of metal. Since the strength can be increased, even if a player hits the operation units 401 and 405 strongly, the operation unit 400 can be prevented from being damaged, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely operated by the player. In addition, the operability of the operation units 401 and 405 can be improved, and the effect using the operation units 401 and 405 can be enjoyed to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. can.

Further, the pressing operation part 405 is arranged at the center of the ring-shaped dial operation part 401, and if the pressing operation part 405 is to be hit strongly, the dial operation part 401 is also likely to be hit, and the operation part The force of striking 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation part 401 and the pressing operation part 405, and the concentration of the striking impact is suppressed to prevent the operation unit 400 and the plate unit 300 from being damaged. Therefore, the operating sections 401 and 405 of the operating unit 400 can be made to withstand strong blows, and the player can freely operate the operating sections 401 and 405. The operability of the player 405 can be improved, and the performance using the operation units 401 and 405 can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

The base member 420 of the operation unit 400 and the like are accommodated in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. When the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the plate unit 300 as shown in FIG. Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the shock and load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover body 426, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 contacts the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, the bottom portion of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (dish unit 300) can receive impact and load, so the impact and the like from the operation portions 401 and 405 are dispersed to avoid concentration of the impact and the like. The impact resistance and load resistance of the operation unit 400 and the plate unit 300 can be enhanced.

Further, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of leg portions 420e protruding downward at positions away from the positions supporting the operation portions 401 and 405, and the leg portions 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the plate unit 300. Even if the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 is applied to the base member 420 by coming into contact with the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the operation portions 401 and 405 of the base member 420 are not placed directly under the impact. is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed) to absorb the impact from the operation parts 401 and 405 to some extent. By reducing the impact, it is possible to prevent the plate unit 300 from being damaged.

In addition, the dial operation portion 401 is held by the operation portion holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below so that a portion of the dial operation portion 401 overlaps the base member 420 in a plan view. Even if the operation portion holding member 416 that holds the dial operation portion 401 is disengaged from the base member 420 and moves downward when the operation portion 401 is struck from above, the dial operation portion 401 is in contact with the upper surface of the base member 420 . The downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 can be restricted by the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 can be prevented from falling down.

Furthermore, since the dial operation unit 401 with the pressing operation unit 405 arranged in the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the game state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates (rotational drive including vibration) without permission. As a result, the player can be surprised and focused on the performance by the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can be entertained. 401 (pressing operation unit 405) can be made more diverse to make it difficult to get bored, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, the dial operating portion 401 is rotated by the dial driving motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the driving gear 412, and it is likely that the position of the rotating shaft of the dial driving motor 414 is set to the position of the dial operating portion 401 (driven gear). 410), so that even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, the impact is transmitted through the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to avoid direct contact with the dial drive motor 414 and prevent damage to the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400).

Furthermore, the opening 420a of the base member 420 has a diameter smaller than that of the dial operating portion 401, and the dial operating portion 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operating portion holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (operating portion holding member 416) moves downward due to the impact or load from 401, the dial operating portion 401 can contact the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operating portion 401 can contact the base member. It is possible to reliably prevent depression beyond 420 . In addition, since the dial operating portion 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operating portion 401 and the operating portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased. It is possible to disperse the impact and load from the operation section holding member 416 and prevent the breakage of the operation section holding member 416 .

Further, since the dial driving motor 414 for rotating the dial operating section 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operating section 401 is frequently rotated by the dial driving motor 414, and the dial driving motor 414 rotates. Even if the amount of heat generated increases due to excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 due to the player forcibly stopping the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 in spite of being driven to rotate by The heat generated from the dial driving motor 414 can be well dissipated and radiated through the base member 420, and the dial driving motor 414 can be prevented from malfunctioning due to overheating. A pachinko machine 1 capable of withstanding a high load, sufficiently embodying the effects of the dial operation unit 401 using the dial driving motor 414 as described above, and entertaining the players. can do.

Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting rotation of the dial operation section 401 and a pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting pressure of the pressure operation section 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the controller, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the player's operation based on the detection signal. It is possible to provide a performance with bodily sensation, amuse the player, and suppress the decline in interest in the game. In addition, a dial decoration substrate 430 and a button decoration substrate 432 for decorating the operation units 401 and 405 with light emission are provided. By doing so, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can be made to operate the operation units 401 and 405 easily.

Further, when the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation portion 405 and the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are brought into contact with each other. is pressed, the dial driving motor 414 vibrates the dial operating portion 401 by repeating forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined angle range, so that the stepped portion 407a in contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401 The pressing operation part 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, even if a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405 is not separately provided, the player can be given an operational feeling for the pressing operation unit 405, and the performance using the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game. In addition, since the pressing operation part 405 vibrates when the pressing operation part 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation part 405, which was thought not to move by itself. It is possible to make the player think that something is going to happen, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be moved without permission, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the performance using the operation unit 400. At the same time, the player can actively operate the operation unit 400, and enjoy the operation of the dial operation part 401 and the pressing operation part 405 of the operation unit 400, thereby reducing interest in the game. can be suppressed.

Further, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed, the pressing operation portion 405 and the dial operation portion 401 are brought into contact with each other, so that the force from the pressing operation portion 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation portion 401 side. Even if the pressing operation part 405 is hit hard, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation part 405 can be dispersed to the dial operation part 401 side, and the load resistance and impact resistance of the pressing operation part 405 can be improved. can increase Therefore, even if the pressing operation part 405 is hit hard, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation part 405 from being damaged, thereby avoiding the interruption of the game due to the damage of the pressing operation part 405 (operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game due to interruption of the game.

Further, the pressing operation portion 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range about an axis extending in the vertical direction. Even if the dial operation unit 401 is rotationally driven by the motor 414, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401. Therefore, the dial operation on the operation unit 400 can be prevented by the player. The respective roles of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be reliably recognized, the player can easily enjoy the performance using the operation unit 400, and the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405 can be guided. The characters of ``PUSH'' which are displayed are not rotated or tilted greatly, and can be easily read from the player side, and the player can surely recognize that the pressing operation part 405 is to be pressed. be able to.

In addition, the dial operation portion 401 is provided with a projecting portion 401f projecting from the inner circumference of the inner cylindrical portion 401a toward the axial center side, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 has a smaller diameter below a predetermined position in the vertical direction. At the upper end of the operation unit 400, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible. The gap between the dial operation portion 401 and the pressing operation portion 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dirt and dust to enter, and to prevent the occurrence of problems such as difficulty in rotating the dial operation part 401 or difficulty in pressing the pressing operation part 405 due to the intrusion of foreign matter. be able to.

Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation portion 405 and the dial operation portion 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape. Since the contact can be made even at any position, even if the pressing operation part 405 is pressed with a feeling of being tilted (pressing a position biased toward the outer periphery of the pressing operation part 405 from the center), the dial operation part 401 is reliably brought into contact with it. Thus, the rotation drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation portion 405 via the dial operation portion 401 . Further, since the dial operation portion 401 and the pressing operation portion 405 are in annular contact with each other, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be widely distributed to the dial operation portion 401 side, and the load resistance of the pressing operation portion 405 and the pressure operation portion 405 can be reduced. Impact resistance can be further enhanced.

Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation portion 405 and the dial operation portion 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the rotation axis of the dial operation portion 401, it is not inclined. In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial driving motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation portion 405 via the dial operation portion 401 . In addition, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be radially dispersed in the outer direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, preventing concentration of the load and increasing the durability of the operation unit 400 . The load capacity and impact resistance can be surely increased, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased, and the occurrence of troubles during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor that can rotate forward and backward, the dial operation unit 401 is not only rotated, but also easily stopped at a predetermined position and rotated forward and reverse. The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that can be easily vibrated by repetition and has the above effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the plate unit 300 having the upper plate 301 for storing game balls, the strength and rigidity of the plate unit 300 are probably high in order to store a large number of game balls. Thus, the operation unit 400 (pressing operation portion 405) can be sufficiently dealt with by a strong blow, and the performance using the operation unit 400 can be easily enjoyed.

[Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51(A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 51(B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device as seen from the rear. As illustrated, the handle device 500 of this embodiment is attached to the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the lower opening 330b of the lower tray side cover 330 of the tray unit 300. A handle base 502 that is fixed and has a cylindrical shape with its front end protruding roundly in the direction perpendicular to the axis; and a front end cover 506 positioned and fixed to the handle base 502 to cooperate with the handle base 502 to rotatably support the handle body 504 .

Also, the handle device 500 is rotatably supported at its rear and front ends by an inner base 508 attached to the front surface of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle body 504, the inner base 508 and the front end cover 506, and the handle body. A shaft member 510 which is rotatable integrally with 504 and has a drive gear portion 510a on its outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 which meshes with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a which is integrally rotatable with the transmission gear 511. and a rotational position detection sensor 512 sandwiched between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502 .

Further, the handle device 500 has one end attached to the inner base 508 and the other end attached to the transmission gear 511. Through the transmission gear 511, the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is rotated clockwise in a front view. a biasing auxiliary spring 514; a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508; A single-shot button 520 that is rotatably supported to operate a firing stop switch 518, and one end of which is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end of which is attached to the handle main body 504 to rotate the handle main body 504 to an initial rotational position (counterclockwise when viewed from the front). and a handle return spring 522 that biases the handle to return to the rotation end in the direction of .

As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of this embodiment has a front end that is open on the front side and bulges out roundly to the rear, and a rear end that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape. Three grooves 502a extending in the axial direction are formed in the outer circumference of the cylindrical shape. The three grooves 502a of the handlebar base 502 correspond to the three ridges 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handlebar bracket 140, one on the upper side and two on the lower side, at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. are placed. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by inserting it into the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502 a fits with the ridge 143 .

The handle device 500 has a handle main body 504 formed with arc-shaped slits 504a arranged concentrically with its rotation axis, and a front end cover 506 formed with three mounting bosses 506a projecting rearward. These mounting bosses 506a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504a of the handle body 504. As shown in FIG. As a result, the circumferential ends of the slits 504a in the handle body 504 come into contact with the mounting bosses 506a of the front end cover 506, thereby restricting the rotation range of the handle body 504. As shown in FIG.

In the handle device 500, the handle main body 504 is formed with a locking protrusion 504b that protrudes rearward. By being locked, the handle body 504 is urged to rotate counterclockwise in a front view by a handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 at one end.

The handle device 500 of this example is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 via the handle bracket 140 . The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 has a mounting surface slanted so as to face the outside (opening side) in plan view from above, so that the handle mounted via the handle bracket 140 can be mounted. The device 500 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1), and the door frame 5 is attached and fixed. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, and the rotation operation can be easily performed without any sense of incompatibility.

In addition, the handle device 500 has a rotational position detection sensor 512 that is a variable resistor. The detection shaft portion 512a rotates. The internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball shooting device 650, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500. - 特許庁Therefore, when the handle main body 504 is turned so that the firing intensity is equal to or higher than a predetermined value, the game ball fired toward the game area 1100 reaches the right area on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and reaches the right area. flow down. On the other hand, when the handle body 504 is rotated so that the shooting intensity becomes smaller than the predetermined value, the game ball shot toward the game area 1100 flows down the left area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. - 特許庁In this way, it is possible for the game ball to be hit separately in the right side area and the left side area by the operation of the player. The ball speed of the game ball flowing down the right area on the right side of the center role 2500 is relatively faster than the ball speed of the game ball flowing down the left side area on the left side of the center role 2500 . A game ball flowing down the right area at a relatively fast ball speed can enter a second starting port 2102, which will be described later, and a game ball flowing down the left side area at a relatively slow ball speed can be won, which will be described later. Winning to the first starting port 2101 becomes possible.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle body 504 and the front end cover 506 are plated with conductive material, and when the player touches the handle body 504 or the like, the touch sensor 516 detects the contact. When the handle body 504 rotates while the touch sensor 516 is detecting the contact of the player, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength corresponding to the rotation, and the game ball is hit. can be done. In other words, even if the player attempts to hit the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the shooting solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be hit. The load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced by preventing the player from playing a game different from the original one.

Also, when the player presses the single-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single-shot button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 (see FIG. 118) turns on the firing solenoid 654. The rotary drive is stopped. As a result, it is possible to temporarily stop the shooting of the game ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and by canceling the pressing operation of the single-shot button 520, The game ball can be shot with the driving strength.

In the handle device 500 of this example, the rotation operation of the handle body 504 is electrically detected by the rotation position detection sensor 512, and based on the detection of the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512, the firing control unit 4120 Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided on the door frame 5 and the batted ball firing device 650 provided on the body frame 3 are connected to the door like a conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, a joint unit) mechanism for linking with each other when the frame 5 is closed and releasing the link when the door frame 5 is opened, so that the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of troubles in the joint unit, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player due to the trouble of hitting the game ball.

In addition, in the hitting ball launching device 650 (shooting solenoid 654) according to the present embodiment, when the handle device 500 is operated (maintained), 100 game balls are successively launched at regular intervals per minute. It is driven so as to achieve a launch speed (pace). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the handle device 500 is operated (maintained), game balls are hit one after another in the game area 1100 at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

[Fool cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. FIG. 52(A) is an exploded front perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame, and (B) is an exploded rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 53 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the front cover removed.

The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 below the game window 101, and is used for game balls dispensed from a prize ball unit 700 described later and shot by a batted ball launcher 650. A game ball (foul ball) that has not reached the game area 1100 in spite of this is guided to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 . A foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 having an open front side and having flow paths for a plurality of game balls inside, and a front cover 544 closing the front end of the cover base 542 .

As shown in FIG. 52(B), the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 has a first ball inlet 542a arranged in the upper right corner in a rear view and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and communicating with the first ball inlet 542a. A first ball passage 542b that widens to the right in the front view toward the front end of the cover base 542, and a second ball inlet that is arranged outside the first ball inlet 542a (to the right in the rear view) and is larger than the first ball inlet 542a. 542c, and a second ball passage 542d that extends downward inside the cover base 542 and communicates with the second ball inlet 542c and that is inclined downward toward the lower right corner in a front view. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the figure, the second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 has a portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end, which is about three times as high as the outer diameter of the game ball. , an accommodation space 546 capable of accommodating a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

In addition, the cover base 542 has a foul ball inlet 542e that is arranged in the upper part of the center in the left-right direction and that opens upward, and communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e so that the game ball can be guided to the upper part near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. and a foul ball passage 542f. The cover base 542 also has an opening/closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening/closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 on the rear surface of the lower side of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3, the opening/closing operation piece 542g comes into contact with the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening/closing crank 793. The opening/closing shutter 792 can be opened.

A front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate-like shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 542. The front cover 544 is arranged in the upper left corner when viewed from the front and communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. and a second ball outlet 544b arranged at the lower right corner in front view and communicating with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper tray ball supply port 310 c of the tray unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100 . The second ball outlet 544b is connected to the rear end of the lower tray ball supply gutter 310h in the tray unit 300 through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110. As shown in FIG.

The foul cover unit 540 of this example passes the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b to the first ball outlet. Balls can be supplied from 544 a to the upper tray 301 through the upper tray ball supply port 310 c of the tray unit 300 . In addition, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full tank ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d to the second ball outlet. The lower tray 302 can be supplied from 544b through the lower tray ball supply gutter 310h and the lower tray ball supply port 310g of the tray unit 300. As shown in FIG.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 is such that when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is positioned below the foul space 626 of the body frame 3, although the details will be described later. If a game ball shot by the batted ball shooting device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and falls down the foul space 626 as a foul ball, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges (supplies) the game ball received by the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d. ).

In addition, the foul cover unit 540 of this example forms the upstream side (left side in front view) of the storage space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and the cover base 542 is swingable by the game balls stored in the storage space 546. a full-tank detection sensor 550 for detecting the rocking motion of the rocking member 548; 552 and . As shown in FIG. 53, the swinging member 548 has its lower end rotatably supported on the cover base 542 and its upper end rotating to the left when viewed from the front. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Also, the swing member 548 is biased by a spring 552 to a substantially vertical position. Further, the rocking member 548 has a detection piece 548a projecting outward from the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. there is

Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes a ground rail 554 disposed at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and plate-shaped ground metal fittings 556 covering the right and left ends of the cover base 542 when viewed from the rear. , so that static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to rolling of the game ball can be removed.

In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540, Even if the inside of the upper tray 301 is full, if the game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, they will stay in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and furthermore, the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770 will remain. When the upstream normal passage 773 is also full, the game balls roll toward the full tank passage 775 through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 83), and the full tank branch unit 770 From the full ball outlet 776 of the foul cover unit 540 , the second ball inlet 542 c , the second ball passage 542 d and the second ball outlet 544 b are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 .

When the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 is filled with game balls, the game balls cannot exit from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 and stay in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. Game balls are stored. Furthermore, as the game balls are dispensed from the prize ball unit 700 and more game balls are stored in the storage space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swing member 548 and resists the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 will move leftward. Then, when the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 118) stops the payout of game balls from the prize ball unit 700, and the game is played. A notification prompting the player to discharge the game balls in the plate unit 300 to the outside is sent.

In addition, when the game ball in the housing space 546 (lower tray 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the detection of the detection piece 548a by the full tank detection sensor 550 is detected. It becomes non-detection, and the payout of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[Antistatic Measures for Door Frame Base Board 194]
As described above, the foul cover unit 540 (transparent polycarbonate molding) (see FIGS. 52A, 52B, and 53) includes the second ball passage 542d for guiding the game ball to the lower tray and the game ball A storage space 546 is formed in which the game ball (metal) stays in contact with the passage wall surface and passes at a high speed. Cheap.

For this reason, a metal ground rail 554 is provided at the bottom of the second ball passage 542d to remove the static electricity of the game ball generated by the rolling resistance caused by the rolling of the game ball and discharge it to the lower tray. there is Further, the foul cover unit 540 is provided with a plate-like ground metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542, and the left end ground metal fitting 556 can conduct electricity to the ground rail 554 on the bottom surface of the foul cover unit 540. (see FIGS. 52(A), (B) and 53). This ground metal fitting 556 is screwed to the metallic lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (FIGS. 18, 23 and 26) of the door frame 5 so as to release static electricity.

The second ball passage 542d of the foul cover unit 540 can remove static electricity from the game ball by the ground rail 554 as described above, but static electricity is accumulated in the polycarbonate of this part, and it can reach 10-odd kV. (3-4 kV at most, even if the discharge of the accumulated electrostatic charge is painful). In addition, even if the electric charge accumulated in the resin is grounded, it can be discharged only in the vicinity thereof, and most of it remains. Then, there is a possibility that the digital amplifier circuit of the adjacent door frame base substrate 194 may malfunction due to electrostatic induction due to this charge.

In the game machine, a ground wire for releasing static electricity is attached to, for example, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 . However, there is a possibility that the ground wire may be disconnected or the connection terminal portion of the ground wire may be disconnected due to an unexpected accident.

The embodiments described below have been made in view of this situation, and are designed to prevent static induction due to charges accumulated in the foul cover unit 540 even if the ground is not connected. 2, the door frame base board 194 is shielded by a metal plate (shield plate 562, which will be described later), and the static electricity released by the metal plate for shielding is prevented from jumping to surrounding conductors. is.

FIG. 54 is a front view of the antistatic mechanism. FIG. 55 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back, showing the state in which the antistatic mechanism is provided. FIG. 56 is a rear view of the main part of the door frame showing the state in which the anti-static mechanism is provided. 57 is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 56. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 54, the antistatic mechanism 560 in the embodiment is a metal (in this example, tinplate) thin plate that shields the door frame base substrate 194 so that the charge accumulated in the foul cover unit 540 does not cause electrostatic induction. and a thin plate of polyethylene terephthalate (PET) which is formed in an outer peripheral shape larger than the shield plate 562 and insulates so that electric charges transferred to the shield plate 562 are not transferred to surrounding conductors. and an insulating sheet 570 .

The shield plate 562 has a flat plate-like conductive portion 563 which is in conductive contact with the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the door frame 5 and a stepped portion 568 formed by bending in the horizontal direction. A substantially plate-shaped shield part 564 located below and behind the conductive part 563 with the boundary of the plate-like shield part 564 disposed over substantially the entire rear surface side of the door frame base board cover 195 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame 5 and

A mounting portion 565 extending in a substantially semicircular shape is formed in the middle of the upper side of the conductive portion 563 , an insertion hole 566 is formed in the mounting portion 565 , and a mounting hole 567 is formed in the left corner of the conductive portion 563 near the upper side. is perforated.

The insulating sheet 570 has a shape larger than the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562 and functions to electrically insulate the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 from surrounding conductors. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, an insulating sheet 570 is attached to the upper side of the rear surface of the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562 by adhesion.

55 to 57, the rear side of the door frame base board 194 is covered with the door frame base board cover 195 (FIGS. 23 and 24). The insulating sheet 570 of the antistatic mechanism 560 is arranged over substantially the entire rear surface of the door frame base board cover 195 . At this time, the shield plate 562 is arranged on the back surface of the insulating sheet 570 so that the insulating sheet 570 surrounds the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 . That is, the shield plate 562 is sandwiched between the door frame base board cover 195 and the shield plate 562 . At this time, the outer peripheral portion of the insulating sheet 570 is located radially outside the outer peripheral portion of the shield plate 562 . The conductive portion 563 of the shield plate 562 contacts the rear surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (see FIG. 23) of the door frame 5 to make conductive contact and release static electricity.

Mounting bosses 110g, 110h, 110i, and 110j for the foul cover unit 540 protrude from appropriate locations on the right side of the lower back surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base body 110). Screw insertion holes 154a and 154b are provided at appropriate locations of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 for screwing the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 with respect to the shield plate 562 and the ground fitting 556 so as to release static electricity. , 154c are provided (see FIG. 56).

The shield plate 562 is positioned by inserting the mounting boss portion 110g through the insertion hole 566. A screw is inserted through the mounting hole 567 and the screw insertion hole 154a of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, and screwed into the door frame. It is screwed to the base body 110 .

The foul cover unit 540 is arranged such that the front cover 544 is in surface contact with the rear surface of the shield plate 562, and screws are inserted through the mounting portions thereof, and the screws are screwed into the mounting boss portions 110g to 110j. It is screwed to the back surface of the door frame base body 110 . Also, screws are inserted through the mounting portion of the ground metal fitting 556, and screws are inserted through the screw insertion holes 154b and 154c of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. By screwing the screws, static electricity is applied to the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 made of metal. It is screwed to the door frame base body 110 so as to escape.

The shield plate 562 and the foul cover unit 540 are fastened together to the mounting boss portion 110g with screws. A ground wire (not shown) is attached to the screw insertion hole 154c of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 by screwing together with the ground metal fitting 556. As shown in FIG.

[Action of antistatic mechanism 560]
The static electricity accumulated in the foul cover unit 540 escapes to the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 through the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562 that is in surface contact and the conductive portion 563 that is in surface contact with the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. The thin plate-shaped shield plate 562 can shield the door frame base substrate 194 so that the charge accumulated in the foul cover unit 540 does not cause electrostatic induction.

In addition, since the shield plate 562 is arranged so that the outer periphery of the shield portion 564 is surrounded by the insulating sheet 570, the electric charge that jumps to the shield plate 562 is transferred from the corners and end surfaces of the shield portion 564 to the surrounding conductor (metal). (things and harnesses) can be prevented from jumping.

[Ball feeding unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61. FIG. FIG. 58(A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. Also, FIG. 59 is a rear view of the ball feeding unit. Also, FIG. 60(A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 60(B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the rear with the rear case removed. Further, FIG. 61(A) is a plan view of the anti-tampering member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the anti-tampering member, and (C) is a perspective view of the anti-tampering member seen from the front. , (D) are explanatory diagrams showing the action of the fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper tray 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the hitting ball launching device 650, and also feed the game balls stored in the upper tray 301. , can be pulled out to the lower tray 302 by operating an upper tray ball extracting button 341 of an upper tray ball extracting mechanism 340 .

In this ball feeding unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110, and forward and backward. A box-shaped front cover 581 having a penetrating inlet 581a and a ball outlet 581b opening below the inlet 581a and having an open rear, and a front open while closing the rear end of the front cover 581. A rear cover 582 having a box-like shape and having a batted ball supply port 582a for supplying game balls entering from an entrance port 581a of the front cover 581 to the batted ball launcher 650, the rear cover 582 and the front cover. A ball extracting member 583 having a partition portion 583a which is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and which partitions between the entrance port 581a and the ball extracting port 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581; , the game balls on the partition part 583a of the ball removing member 583 are fed one by one to the hit ball supply port 582a of the rear cover, and are rotatably supported between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. and a ball-feeding solenoid 585 for rotating the ball-feeding member 584 . In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entry port 581a when viewed from the front. are placed.

The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 has an arcuate slit 581c formed concentrically with respect to the center of rotation of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball removing opening 581b in front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583, which will be described later, extends forward from 581c. Further, the front cover 581 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entry port 581a. is formed to close the

In addition, the ball removing member 583 has a partition portion 583a which partitions between the entrance port 581a and the ball removal port 581b on the lower side of the entrance port 581a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 584, and a partition portion 583a. It extends downward from the end on the side opposite to the ball feeding member 584 and bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle of the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball outlet 581b. A rotating rod portion 583b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod portion 583c. and a weight portion 583d protruding in the opposite direction to the partition portion 583a. The actuating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 58). Through 113, the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300 is brought into contact.

Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a fan-shaped cut-off portion 584a centered on a rotational axis extending vertically in the direction of the entrance port 581a and the partition portion 583a of the ball extraction member 583, and a cut-off portion 584a. It has a ball holding portion 584b recessed in an arc shape from the rear end toward the center of the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod portion 584c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are each formed within an angular range of about 90° around the rotation axis. Also, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feed member 584 rotates around the rotation axis by driving the ball feed solenoid 585 to move the rod portion 584c, which is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotation axis, in the left-right direction. ing.

The ball feeding member 584 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a and the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a at the same time, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It rotates between holding positions. When the ball feeding member 584 is at the supply position, the game ball held in the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the batted ball supply port 582a to the batted ball launching device 650 and enters the partition portion 583a from the entrance port 581a. The ball is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) by the blocking portion 584a, and remains on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the rod portion 584c side closes the hit ball supply port 582a. , Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

In addition, the ball feed unit 580 includes a ball feed operating rod 586 whose tip swings vertically when a ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (energized), and the movement of the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 that swings up and down moves forward and backward. and a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 around an axis that extends in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 has an engaging portion 587a extending in the left-right direction that can be engaged with the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 that moves up and down, and a side of the engaging portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operating rod 586. is arranged on the opposite side and is supported between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction; and a transmitting portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 60) protruding downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feeding unit 580 of this example uses a ball feeding operating rod 586 and a ball feeding crank 587 to transmit the movement of the ball feeding operating rod 586 which swings by driving a ball feeding solenoid 585 which advances and retreats in the vertical direction, thereby transmitting the movement of the ball feeding member. 584 can be rotated. When the ball-feeding solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the ball-feeding actuation rod 586 moves away from the lower end of the ball-feeding solenoid 585, and the tip of the ball-feeding solenoid 586 swings downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 584 is positioned at the supply position. When the ball-feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball-feeding operating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball-feeding solenoid 585, and the swinging tip is positioned upward, so that the ball-feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball-feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball-feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball-feeding solenoid 585 is deactivated (OFF state), the ball-feeding member 584 receives the game ball. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the shot ball launching device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control section 4120 in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 654 .

Further, the rotatably pivoted ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 of this example is applied with a moment by the weight portion 583d so as to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The forwardly projecting actuating rod 583c abuts on the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper tray ball extracting slider 343 in the upper tray ball extracting mechanism 340 of the tray unit 300, thereby restricting its rotation. Normally, the partition portion 583a of the ball extraction member 583 separates the entry port 581a and the ball extraction port 581b so that game balls do not enter the ball extraction port 581b side. Then, when the player presses downward the upper tray ball removing button 341 of the upper tray ball removing mechanism 340 in the tray unit 300, the upper tray ball removing slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a and contacts. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

In this way, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper tray ball removing mechanism 340, the ball removing member 583 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in front view, and the partition portion 583a opens the entrance of the partition portion 583a. The partition between 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball entering from the inlet 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet channel 344c of the upper tray ball outlet base 344 of the plate unit 300. , is discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 302 .

Since the contact piece 343a of the upper tray ball removal slider 343 with which the actuating rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 contacts is biased upward by the coil spring, game balls are vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 583a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that biases the upper tray ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, preventing the ball removal member 583 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball The partition portion 583a can prevent the ball from rebounding.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 580 of this example is formed with a rectangular attachment recess 582b (see FIG. 60(B), etc.) recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from the back of the hit ball supply port 582a in the rear cover 582. In addition, a fraud prevention member 588 is attached in the attachment recess 582b. The tamper-proof member 588 of the ball feeding unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 59 and the like, the tamper-proof member 588 is formed to have a horizontally long rectangular outer diameter when viewed from the rear. An upper piece portion 588b and a lower piece portion 588c, which are divided vertically by a dividing line 588a extending a predetermined length toward the base end side (right side) of the V is formed between the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588b in a direction (rearward) perpendicular to the general surface of the anti-tampering member 588 so as to move away from each other. It has a letter-shaped cutting portion 588d and an inclined portion 588e formed at the ends of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and inclined toward the cutting portion 588d.

As shown in the figure, the tamper-proof member 588 is such that the distal end of the upper piece 588b (the left end in a rear view) is bent so that the base end of the upper piece 588b is bent so that the cut portion 588d is It is formed in a V shape in plan view, and a wire rod Iw attached to an illegal game ball I is inserted into the inside of the V shape. In the cutting portion 588d of the tamper-proof member 588, the lower side of the upper piece portion 588b and the upper side of the lower piece portion 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in plan view, and the gap narrows toward the base end side. is formed as

The slanted portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cut portion 588d, and the slanted portion 588e guides and guides the wire Iw attached to the illicit game ball I into the cut portion 588d. It's like In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, as shown in the figure, the anti-tampering member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 from the rear side, and the cutting portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 is installed. A portion corresponding to the portion where is formed penetrates in the longitudinal direction and at the same time communicates with the batted ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in such a shape that the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

According to this fraud prevention member 588, the illegal game ball I attached with the wire Iw is supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the batted ball launcher 650, and the illegal game ball I is delivered to the game area of the game board 4 by the batted ball launcher 650. 1100, the illegal game ball I shot by the shot ball launching device 650 moves diagonally to the upper left in a front view along the shooting rail 660, and passes between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. It tries to intrude into the game area 1100 through it. At this time, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I will be pulled by the momentum of the hit game ball I, and the wire Iw will be different from the movement trajectory of the illegal game ball I. It will move along the route that connects the shortest distance within. Therefore, the wire rod Iw extending from the plate unit 300 through the ball supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 toward the ball launching device 650 moves the game ball I in the upper left direction when viewed from the front (upper right when viewed from the back). Then, it is pulled toward the upper right corner of the batted ball feed port 582a in the rear view to move to the shortest route, and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed in the upper right corner of the batted ball feed port 582a in the rear view. Then, the wire rod Iw that has moved to the portion (inside the mounting recess 582b) extending to the right in the rear view of the batted ball supply port 582a is cut by the pair of inclined portions 588e of the tamper-proof member 588 arranged at that position. After being guided into 588d, the force of the illegal game ball I further pulls it to the right in the rear view.

As a result, the wire Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I is pulled by the force of the fraudulent game ball I in the direction in which the gap is narrowed (to the left in the front view) by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588. Friction and shearing force are applied by the cutting portion 588d to cut the wire Iw (see FIG. 61(D)). At this time, the illicit game ball I attached to the wire Iw is attenuated by friction or the like acting on the wire Iw. will be discharged through

Therefore, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, so that fraudulent acts can be carried out with the illegal game ball I attached to the wire Iw in the game area 1100. It is designed to be able to prevent being caught. Even if an illegal game ball I enters the game area 1100, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the anti-tamper member 588 as described above, so that illegal acts cannot be performed. Further, even if the wire rod Iw cannot be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw bites into the V-shaped cut portion 588d to attenuate the force of the illegal game ball I, thereby reducing the game area 1100. Since it is possible to prevent intrusion into the inside, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed.

As described above, according to this example, game balls are stored in the upper tray 301 and supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, and then the player moves the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5. When operated, the game ball is sent to the ball shooting device 650 by driving the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball sending unit 580, and the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 by the ball shooting device 650, thereby opening the game window 101 of the door frame 5. The game is played in the game area 1100 that is visible through the door frame base unit 100, and the feed mechanism (ball feed member 584, ball feed solenoid 585, etc.) etc.) and a discharge mechanism (a ball extracting member 583), so not only the ball feeding member 584 and the ball extracting member 583 but also the ball feeding member 584 and the shot ball launching device 650 can be arranged. When the game balls in the upper tray 301 are ejected by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 341, the number of game balls remaining on the ball feeding member 584 side can be reduced as much as possible. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost and reduce his or her interest.

Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 having the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game ball can be driven. It is possible to suppress the early running out of game balls in the upper tray 301 by the operation or the early filling of the upper tray 301 with the game balls, thereby preventing the game balls in the upper tray 301 from being filled up early. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by reducing the player's feeling of annoyance, and the size of the plate unit 300 can be reduced while the capacity of the upper plate 301 is maintained. By enlarging (widening) the area 1100, the pachinko machine 1 can strongly attract the player's interest.

In addition, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with the ball removing member 583, the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 are separated from each other. 584 and the ball removing member 583 can be attached, the time and effort required for assembly can be simplified, and the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, so that trouble occurs in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583. However, the problem can be easily solved by exchanging the ball feeding unit 580.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, since the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side, the upper tray ball The transmission mechanism (upper tray ball extracting mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the extracting button 341 to the ball extracting member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 does not need to be configured to straddle the door frame 5 that can be opened and closed and the main body frame 3. The configuration of the transmission mechanism can be simplified. In addition, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism ( By shutting off the upper tray ball extracting mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism will wear out early and malfunction or be damaged, and the reliability of the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feed unit 580, etc. and durability can be improved.

Further, since the upper tray ball extracting button 341 is operated downward, the game ball can be ejected from the upper tray 301 to the lower tray 302 or the upper tray 301 can be ejected simply by pressing the upper tray ball extracting button 341 downward. It is possible to stop the discharge of the game ball from the tray, and the player can easily operate the ball removal operation in the upper tray 301 by the upper tray ball removal button 341. - 特許庁

In addition, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 which slides in the vertical direction in accordance with the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. At the same time, the partitioning portion 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper tray ball removing slider 343 and the partitioning portion 583a can be made as small as possible. The size of the unit 580 can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

Further, the upper bowl ball extraction slider 343 is urged upward, and when the upper bowl ball extraction slider 343 is at the raised position, the partition portion 583a of the ball extraction member 583 communicates the entry port 581a and the hit ball supply port 582a. Therefore, even if a game ball from the upper tray 301 vigorously contacts the partition 583a, the impact can be mitigated by the urging force acting on the upper tray ball removal slider 343, and the partition 583a (ball removal member 583) can be enhanced. In addition, since the urging force acting on the upper tray ball removing slider 343 can alleviate the impact on the partitioning portion 583a, even if the game ball collides with the partitioning portion 583a, it can be made difficult to rebound, and the game ball can be rebounded. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing a problem.

In addition, since the partitioning portion 583a is rotated, compared with the case where the partitioning portion 583a is slid, the movement of the partitioning portion 583a when the load of the game ball is applied to the partitioning portion 583a is reduced. Friction loss can be reduced, the operation of the upper tray ball removal button 341 can be lightened and operability can be improved, and the moving range of the partition part 583a can be reduced in plane projection, similar to the above. It is possible to achieve the effects of

In addition, since the partition 583a is rotated by its own weight in the direction in which the entrance port 581a and the ball extraction port 581b are communicated with each other, if a problem occurs in the partition 583a or the upper tray ball extraction mechanism 340, the partition 583a rotates due to its own weight, the entry port and the discharge port are in communication, and the game media in the storage tray is sent to the feed mechanism (insertion device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since the ball is discharged to the player side without being discharged, the player can be made to recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a problem, and the player can be moved to the pachinko machine 1 without the problem and enjoy the game. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

Furthermore, in the ball removing member 583, the partition portion 583a is rotated via the bent rotating rod portion 583b, so when the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a, the impact is transferred to the bent rotating rod portion. It is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotating shaft by dispersing it with the 583b or absorbing it by the bending of the rotating rod portion 583b. can be enhanced.

In addition, since the ball ejection port 581b is arranged directly below the entry port 581a communicating with the upper tray 301 side, when the game ball in the upper tray 301 is discharged, the game ball can be moved left and right in the ball feeding unit 580. Movement in the direction can be minimized, and the passage of the game balls in the ball feeding unit 580 can be improved to discharge the game balls satisfactorily. In addition, since the ball discharge port 581b is arranged directly below the entrance port 581a, the discharge path of the game balls in the ball feeding unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feeding unit 580 functions as a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 from becoming unnecessarily large.

Further, the anti-tampering member 588 is attached to the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the anti-tampering member 588 (cutting portion 588d) is arranged at a position as close as possible to the ball shooting device 650. Therefore, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I in the fastest (momentum) state immediately after being shot by the ball shooting device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d By pulling the wire Iw quickly (strongly) against the ball, the wire Iw can be reliably cut, and the impetus of the illegal game ball I is attenuated to prevent it from entering the game area 1100. It is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts by illegal game balls I.

Further, since the anti-tampering member 588 having the cut portion 588d is mounted in the mounting recess 582b recessed forward from the rear surface of the rear cover 582, the V-shaped cut portion 588d is formed. The rearwardly bent upper piece 588b does not project rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the operator is prevented from being injured by the upper piece 588b of the tamper-proof member 588 during assembly or the like. You can prevent it from getting lost.

In addition, in the fraud prevention member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I, the upper upper piece 588b is bent backward across the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate. Thus, since the V-shaped cut portion 588d is formed, the cut portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. increase can be suppressed.

[Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. FIG. This glass unit 590 consists of an annular and vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 molded of synthetic resin and having an opening of approximately the same size as the game window 101, and two pieces that respectively close the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592. and a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 112). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 includes two plate-like stopper pieces 592a arranged at the upper portions of both left and right sides and extending outward in a plate-like shape, and a plate-like engaging plate extending in the left-right direction along the lower end and extending downward. and a stop piece 592b.

This glass unit 590 has a locking piece 592b at the lower end that is locked so as to be engaged with the vertical bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. After that, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit supporting stepped portion 110a of the door frame base body 110, and the glass unit locking member 190 locks the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592, whereby the door frame is closed. It is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 21, etc.).

[Sculptural decoration on the door frame]
Next, the molding decoration on the door frame 5, that is, the shape decoration will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20 and 62. FIG. FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view showing the door frame cut at substantially the center in the vertical direction. As shown in the figure, the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an upper tray 301 and a lower tray 302 for storing game balls arranged vertically under a vertically long elliptical game window 101. , on the right side of the lower tray 302 in front view, a game ball stored in the upper tray 301 is placed behind the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. A handle device 500 is arranged. In addition, the door frame 5 has a right side decoration unit 200, a left side decoration unit 240, and an upper decoration unit 280 arranged so as to surround the left, right, and upper sides of the game window 101, and also surrounds the lower side of the game window 101. The plate unit 300 is arranged as follows.

The door frame 5 has a largely different appearance on both sides of the game window 101, and the right side has an appearance like a rugged natural rock due to the side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the left side can be seen from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240. The lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 give a metallic sharp and artificial appearance. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62, the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 of the door frame 5 have different amounts of forward projection, and the right side decorative unit 200 is larger than the left side decorative unit. It protrudes forward more than 240. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that sharpens forward, while the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a gently curved flat shape.

As a result, when the door frame 5 of this example is viewed from the front right, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 appear to have the same volume (see FIG. 19), whereas the front left When viewed from above, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240, and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is almost invisible, so that different impressions can be given depending on the player's standing position with respect to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加It's like In other words, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 looks different depending on the position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1, giving the illusion of a pachinko machine of a different model. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of strongly attracting the interest of the players.

In addition, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is left-right asymmetrical, for example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are arranged in the left-right direction in an island facility of a game hall, the appearance of the entire island facility looks flat and solid. By alternately arranging the right side decoration units 200 and the left side decoration units 240 of different forms, a rhythmical impression is given to provide an appearance (atmosphere) that excites the player. It is possible to increase the appeal to the player and strongly attract the player's interest.

In addition, the door frame 5 emits light from the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, etc. provided in the respective units 200, 220, 280, 300. can be decorated with an arbitrary luminescent color so as to surround the . Among the LEDs mounted on the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, LEDs 214b, 216b arranged behind the side flash lenses 204, 246 , 254b, and 256 are turned on or off, the mode of the luminous decoration surrounding the game window 101 can be changed.

[Luminous decoration on the door frame]
Next, the lighting decoration on the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. FIG. 63 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs for light emission decoration on the door frame. Also, FIG. 64 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for lighting decoration in the door frame. The door frame 5 of this embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by means of the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300. It is formed so as to surround the Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is provided with decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 on which LEDs are mounted. The outer periphery of the can be decorated with light emission.

The right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer circumference of the game window 101 except for the lower side, as described above. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 are arranged so as to extend along radial axes around the lower part of the center of the game window 101 in the horizontal direction. are arranged between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decorative unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decorative unit 240 , the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by one smooth, gently curved surface. Further, the door frame 5 is provided with side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light behind the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 . In addition, in the left side decorative unit 240 , an inner decorative member 251 having a plurality of slits 251 a is arranged between the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252 .

In addition, the door frame 5 includes a right side upper decoration substrate 214 , a right side lower decoration substrate 216 , and a left side upper decoration substrate 254 behind the side inner lenses 212 and 252 of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 . , and left side lower decoration board 256 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each of the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256. ing.

The right side upper decoration substrate 214, the right side lower decoration substrate 216, the left side upper decoration substrate 254, and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 arranged behind the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are provided with the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b are arranged at positions corresponding to radiation lens portions 210b, 250b (side flashing lenses 204, 246). . In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b have relatively high brightness. LEDs are used. The two LEDs 214c arranged at the upper right end of the right side upper decorative board 214 are a green LED and a red LED.

In this example, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are coated with white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing). ), white paint, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 reflect the light from the player when the LEDs 214a, 216a, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and deteriorating their appearance, and by reflecting the light from the emitting LEDs 214a and 216a to the player side by the substrate, the side lenses 210 and 250 can be The lenses 210 and 250 can be decorated with brighter light emission.

As described above, the upper decorative unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects the ends of the upper parts of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 facing toward the center of the door frame 5 in the left-right direction. It is formed and decorates the upper center of the game window 101 . The upper decoration unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 arranged in the center in the left-right direction, an annular central ring lens portion 282b arranged on the outer circumference of the upper central lens 284, and an outer ring outside the central ring lens portion 282b. and four extension frame lens portions 282c extending to the outside. The front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side when viewed from the front is covered with an upper and lower decorative cover 294. As shown in FIG.

The upper decoration unit 280 includes an upper central decoration substrate 288 arranged behind the central ring lens portion 282b of the upper central lens 284 and the upper lens 282, and the upper lens 282 extending laterally beyond the upper central decoration substrate 288. and an upper side decoration substrate 290 arranged behind the extension frame lens portion 282 c and the upper central decoration substrate 288 . A plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the central ring lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface of the upper central decorative substrate 288. and can be decorated with light emission separately. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portions 282c are mounted on the front surface of the upper side decoration substrate 290, so that each extension frame lens portion 282c can be decorated with light. . The LEDs 288a, 288b, and 290a of the upper central decorative substrate 288 and upper side decorative substrate 290 are full-color LEDs.

Next, in the plate unit 300 , the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and has an appearance that is continuous with the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200 . In this plate unit 300, a top plate decoration board 322 is arranged behind the top plate front decorative member 316, and a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the top plate decoration board 322 light up the top plate front decorative member 316. The right portion and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 that decorates the front side outer periphery of the upper plate ball removing button 341 can be decorated with light emission. In this example, the LEDs 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 are full-color LEDs.

Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 300 includes a translucent ring-shaped dial operation portion 401 and a translucent cylindrical pressing operation portion disposed inside the dial operation portion 401 . 405, and a dial decoration substrate 430 and a button decoration substrate 432 are arranged below the dial operation portion 401 and the pressing operation portion 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 is provided with a plurality (four in this example) of LEDs 430 b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation portion 401 . Also, the button decoration board 432 is provided with one LED 432 d corresponding to the pressing operation portion 405 . In this example, the LEDs 430b of the dial decoration board 430 are high-brightness white LEDs, and the LEDs 432d of the button decoration board 432 are full-color LEDs. The surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effect as described above can be achieved.

By the way, in the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 covering the outer periphery above the lower side of the game window 101 correspond to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are the first annular group 102 near the game window 101 (within the range of hatches in FIGS. 63 and 64) and the second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102 (Within the range of the cross hatch in FIGS. 63 and 64), and by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, substantially concentric circles so as to surround the game window 101 A plurality of (in this example, two) light-emitting decorations can be applied to each. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the first annular group 102 are made to emit light, the range of hatches near the game window 101 is decorated with annular light emission, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the second annular group 103 are illuminated. When all of them are illuminated, the range of the crosshatch away from the game window 101 is annularly decorated with illumination.

In the door frame 5, LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250) in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 are provided. , Radial groups 104 (in FIGS. 63 and 64 within the shaded area). By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of this radial group 104, the outer side of the game window 101 can be radially decorated with light emission. The luminous decoration can be divided in the circumferential direction.

In addition, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c of the right side upper decoration board 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is included in the notification group 105. Various kinds of information can be notified to the pachinko player, the employee of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the like.

In addition, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 288a and 288b corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and the center ring lens portion 282b in the upper decoration unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the game window 101 are arranged in the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. An upper center group 106 is provided for luminous decoration at the upper center of the frame. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 288a and 288b of the upper center group 106, the center of the upper part of the game window 101 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, the reference of the ring light emission decoration by the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 It is designed so that it can be decorated with light emitting like dots. Also, the LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portions 282c in the upper decorative unit 280 form the upper central side group 107 that decorates the left and right sides of the upper central group 106 with light. By appropriately lighting the LEDs 290a of the upper central side group 107, the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be decorated with light.

Furthermore, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 322a corresponding to the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 of the plate unit 300 arranged on the lower side of the game window 101 light-embellish the upper plate 301. A plate group 108 is provided. In addition, in the door frame 5, LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operation portion 401 and the pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged in the center of the lower side of the game window 101 and in the center of the upper portion of the plate unit 300 activate the operation unit 400. An operation group 109 for lighting decoration is provided. By appropriately lighting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing, operation direction, etc. of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be played. It is designed so that people can be notified.

More specifically, the luminous decoration on the door frame 5 in this embodiment will be described in more detail. 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b and 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system within groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108 and 109 to which they belong respectively. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are arranged on the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250, respectively. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 103a to 103j for each peripheral lens portion 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. It is

The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems 104a to 104h for each of the side flash lenses 204, 246 (the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250). ing. Also, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems of an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Furthermore, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems of central portion 106a, right portion 106b, and left portion 106c. Also, the seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems of the right side 107a and the left side 107b.

Furthermore, the eleven LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d in the front, rear, left and right directions. The five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 are arranged diagonally with the pressing operation portion 405 interposed between the four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation portion 401. , and one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 is divided into three systems. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d are divided into 42 systems. ing.

By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs. The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further provided with three independent RGB systems for full-color light emission. In the light emission control, the number is tripled to 84 systems. In addition, the LEDs 288a and 430b are white LEDs with high brightness, and the four systems 107a, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high brightness. 1 system is connected, and in actual light emission control, the number is doubled to 8 systems.

The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs with normal brightness, and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. Also, the LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED and belongs to two systems 105a and 105b. Since the ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b by these LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled by each system, the same number of ten systems are used in actual light emission control.

Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting, blinking, etc. are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . As a result, it is possible to perform an expressive lighting effect.

As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 are sequentially lighted (sequentially lighted in the same color or similar color) so that the game window 101 spreads outward. Light emission effect, or conversely, light emission effect that converges from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light from the second ring group 103 to the first ring group 102 (sequential light emission in the same color or similar color), Alternatively, by causing the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light at the same time, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect or the like in which the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 is illuminated widely.

In addition, by cooperating with the LEDs (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the game board 4, the LEDs of the game board 4, the LEDs of the first ring group 102 near the game window 101, and the LEDs of the first ring group 102 With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged outside, it is possible to perform a more expressive light emission effect, strongly attracting the player's interest, and amusing and entertaining the player. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, each system 102a ~ 102j, 103a ~ 103j by appropriately emitting light, along the outer periphery of the game window 101 upper decoration unit 280 It is possible to perform a lighting effect such that light moves toward the center lens 284 or light moves from the upper center lens 284 along the outer circumference of the game window 101 . In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided (10 divisions) into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. , 8 divisions (about 8 divisions), it is possible to satisfactorily perform a light emitting effect in which light circulates around the outer periphery of the game window 101. - 特許庁

Furthermore, by causing only the radial group 104 to emit light, a light emitting effect is produced in which light is emitted radially around the game window 101, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 emit light at the same time as the radial group 104. By making the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 emit light substantially uniformly, or by causing the radial group 104 to emit light (lighting/blinking) while the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 emit light, the ring It is possible to perform a light-emitting production that gives an accent to the light-emitting decoration of the above. In addition, by causing each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, it is possible to produce a light emission effect in which the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiation lens portions 210b and 250b) rotate.

In addition, by emitting light from the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 105, the arrival of a chance and a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state, a probability variable game state, a time reduction game state, a probability variable time reduction game state , etc.) can be performed.

Further, by appropriately lighting the respective systems 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, the light emitting effect of decorating the upper plate 301 is performed, or by lighting in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation are performed. It is possible to perform a lighting effect for prompting the user to operate the unit 405 . In addition, by appropriately lighting the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109, the operation of the dial operation unit 401 is prompted, and the light emission effect of guiding the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is performed. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a lighting effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation portion 405. FIG.

The system 109c of the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 are full-color LEDs. 109 and each of the systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c can perform light emission production with different gradations such as light emission color and brightness, and various expressions. It is possible to perform a rich light emission effect.

[Overall configuration of main body frame]
Next, the body frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 71. FIG. 65 is a front view of the body frame, and FIG. 66 is a rear view of the body frame. 67 is a front perspective view of the body frame, and FIG. 68 is a rear perspective view of the body frame. Furthermore, FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front, FIG. 69 is a left side view of the body frame, and FIG. 71 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the rear. It is a diagram. The body frame 3 of this embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side of the outer frame 2 in a front view, and is supported in a door-like manner so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5 . , the front side of which can be opened and closed by a door frame 5. - 特許庁The main body frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5 .

The main body frame 3 of this example includes a main body frame base 600 that forms the skeleton of the main body frame 3 and has a rectangular game board holding opening 601 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 4 . Upper and lower shaft support fittings 630 and 640, which are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end portion of 600 in front view and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and the body frame base 600. A hitting ball launching device 650 attached to the lower front surface of the game board 4 for hitting game balls into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and a ball shooting device 650 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 for dispensing game balls to the upper tray 301 of the tray unit 300. and a prize ball unit 700 attached to the front surface of the body frame base 600 for blocking the flow of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the body frame 3. A ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 is provided.

In addition, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards and a power supply board 851 for controlling the electrical parts provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except for the game board 4 are provided. , a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding opening 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. and a locking device 1000 attached to the right end of the main body frame base in front view for opening and closing and locking the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and opening and closing and locking the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 .

[Body frame base]
Next, the body frame base 600 of the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of the body frame base in the body frame. Also, FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the body frame base in the body frame. The main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally molded of synthetic resin, and has a vertically long rectangular shape in front view along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is substantially elongated in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a constant depth D (see Figure 69). As a result, when mounting the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, etc. on the rear side of the body frame base 600, the work is performed with the body frame base 600 facing down. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is in a substantially flat state at the height of the depth D in the main body frame base 600, so that the prize ball unit 700 etc. can be easily placed, and the workability related to the assembly of the main body frame 3 can be improved.

As shown in the figure, the body frame base 600 has a game board holding opening that penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within a range of about 3/4 of the whole from the top to the bottom and can fit and hold the outer circumference of the game board 4. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming the outer periphery of the front end of the main body frame base 600 excluding the left side in front view, and a door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5 that is recessed rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602. The door frame protrusion 110c protruding rearward from the lower end, the upper curved protrusion 167 protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outer side protruding rearward of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 and an engaging groove 603 into which the bent projecting piece 163 is inserted and engaged.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding opening 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, is recessed rearward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602, and spreads in the left-right direction into a plate-like lower rear wall portion. 604 and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and forms the inner peripheral wall of the game board holding opening 601 . The peripheral wall 605 connects the free ends (upper and lower left ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame 602, so that the body frame base 600 has a frame shape. It's like

In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding opening 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall part 604, and the game board placing part 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and the game board placing part 606. A positioning projection 607 projecting upward from approximately the center in the left-right direction and engaging with an out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 of the game board 4, and a game board 4 formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the front. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 65) to which a stopper 1120 is secured, and a plate-like plate that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 are arranged. The positioning projections 607 of the main body frame base 600 are engaged with the out-ball discharge grooves 1156 of the game board 4 so that the lower end of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving in the left-right direction and the rearward direction. ing. In addition, the game board locking part 608 can regulate the front-view right side of the game board 4 from moving forward and backward by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4 . there is The front-view left side of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward and backward by the positioning member 956 of the side crime prevention plate 950, although the details will be described later.

Further, the main body frame base 600 has metal fittings for mounting an upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and a lower shaft support metal fitting 640 on the rear surface of the free end portion of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 (upper and lower left end portions in front view). A portion 610 is provided (see FIG. 73). As shown in FIG. 72, etc., the metal fitting mounting portion 610 is reinforced at its front side by a plurality of ribs extending vertically and horizontally, so that the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 can be attached with sufficient strength. can be done. The body frame base 600 also has a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front, and a door frame 5 that is formed at the lower left of the cylinder lock through hole 611 when viewed from the front. A U-shaped fitting groove 612 fitted with the positioning projection 110d projecting rearward from the door frame base body 110 in the above, and a firing solenoid 654 of the ball shooting device 650 formed at the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in the front view. A solenoid housing recess 613 is provided.

As described above, the body frame base 600 of this example has the lower rear wall portion 604 which is recessed one step rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the right side of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view. The ball shooting device 650 is mounted on the front side so that the shooting solenoid 654 of the ball shooting device 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess 613 . When the ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIGS. A downward widening foul space 626 is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. A game ball is received by a foul ball inlet 542 e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 .

The main body frame base 600 has an opening 614 that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the left of the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604 in a front view, and a plurality of openings 614 are formed above the opening 614 and on both the left and right sides in a front view. and a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal board cover 692 (see FIG. 70, etc.). The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface of the substrate face forward. Also, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the board unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600 . The through-holes 615 arranged on both left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having partition walls on the front side.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 has a fixture support section that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper end of the front surface of the lower rear wall section 604 above the opening 614 . 616, and a stopper 617 that protrudes forward from the lower right side of the fixture support portion 616 in front view and regulates the rotational position of the game board fixture 690. As shown in FIG.

Here, as shown in FIG. 65 and the like, the game board fixture 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around the axis supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a and an operating piece 690b that extends outward from one end in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise in a front view). The game board fixing member 690 is pivotally supported by the fixing member supporting portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixing member 690 clockwise in a front view. Then, the fixed piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board placing portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed concave portion 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placing portion 606. can be prevented from moving forward. The game board fixture 690 has an operating piece 690b that abuts against the stopper 617. By abutting the stopper 617, the end of rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is restricted. It's becoming

Furthermore, the body frame base 600 has a door frame open switch 618 for detecting opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 attached to the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611 . When the door frame 5 is opened (released), the pressure is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. In addition, the body frame base 600 has a body frame open switch 619 for detecting opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 attached to the lower rear surface than the position where the door frame open switch 618 is attached ( 73), when the body frame 3 is opened (released) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressure is released and the opening of the body frame 3 can be detected.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 has three longitudinally penetrating portions extending in the front-rear direction inside (rotary support side) of the engaging groove 603 on the right side (open side) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 when viewed from the front. A door hook hole 620 and two lock engaging holes 621 lined up in the left-right direction are provided below the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and penetrating in the front-rear direction. These three door hook holes 620 are formed near the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and approximately in the center in the vertical direction. Locking protrusions 1004 provided at both upper and lower ends of the lock device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and center door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes 621 . The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 protrude forward from the three door hook holes 620, and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000 is projected forward. 1010 protrudes forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 67).

Further, the body frame base 600 is located on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and is gently and obliquely lowered from the right upper end toward the approximate center in the left-right direction in a rear view. A body frame base ball extraction passage 622 is provided which hangs from the middle in the vertical direction to a slightly upper position and allows the game ball to roll. The rear side of the body frame base ball extraction passage 622 is closed by the board unit base 810 in the board unit 800. Although details will be described later, the game ball that rolls in the ball extraction passage 741d in the prize ball device 740 is designed to roll.

In addition, the body frame base 600 has a plurality of back cover shaft support portions 623 arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the rear, and rotatably supporting the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900 . A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 on the front view obliquely upper left of the opening 614 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the lock device 1000 is mounted on the right side (opening side) of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the front. and a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

Although detailed description is omitted, the body frame base 600 has, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc., for mounting the hit ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, etc., at appropriate positions. is formed in

[Upper shaft bracket and lower shaft bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 of the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 of the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 3 by using predetermined screws, respectively, to the metal fitting mounting portions 610 on the upper and lower rear surfaces of the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported so that it can be opened and closed, and the body frame 3 can be pivotally supported to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 includes a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 extending forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. A forward extending portion 632, a pivot pin 633 projecting upward from near the front end of the forward extending portion 632, and a pivot pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the pivot pin 633 in front view. is inserted vertically through the door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 67, etc.), and the forward extending portion 632 hangs downward from the left end of the front view to rotate the door frame 5 to the open side. and a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 69 and 113) that restricts the end. In this upper shaft support metal fitting 630, a mounting portion 631, a forward extending portion 632, and a stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

On the other hand, the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is arranged below the door frame support metal fitting 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and the door frame support metal fitting 642 to support the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 . and a body frame pivot bracket 644 for The door frame pivot bracket 642 of the lower pivot bracket 640 has a plate-shaped mounting portion 642a that is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions. A plate-shaped forward extension portion 642b, a door frame shaft support hole 634 penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the forward extension portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and the forward extension portion. A stopper 642d is provided to stand upward from the left end portion of the door frame 642b in a front view and to restrict the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. In the door frame pivot bracket 642, a mounting portion 642a, a forward extending portion 642b, and a stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

The body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 has a plate-like mounting portion 644a that is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions. It has a front extension portion 644b that extends forward, and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating vertically near the front end of the front extension portion 644b. The body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 is also integrally formed by bending a single metal plate so that the mounting portion 644a and the forward extending portion 644b are formed.

In the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 of the present example, the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 are superimposed (contacted) in the front-rear direction. The forward extending portion 642b of the shaft support fitting 642 and the forward extending portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support fitting 644 are attached to the lower metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined vertical separation. It's like

The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600 and are connected to the main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 . are coaxially positioned, and the body frame shaft support hole of the body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is fitted and inserted into the support projection 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21 of the outer frame 2. , the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame pivot bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, and then the pivot pin 633 of the upper pivot bracket 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting it into the support hook hole 20c of the upper support metal fitting 20, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed.

The upper and lower shaft support metal fittings 630 and 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600 so that the door frame support hole 634 of the upper and lower shaft support metal fittings 630 and the door frame support hole of the lower and lower shaft support metal fittings 640 are connected to each other. The door frame shaft support hole 634 of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted. After placing the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 on the forward extending portion 642 b of the door frame support metal fitting 642 , the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 . By inserting it, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the body frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction. Once slid downward so that the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the forward extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 overlap vertically, the shaft pin 155 is slid upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634 .

[Battered ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. FIG. 74 is a front perspective view of the batted ball launcher in the body frame. Also, FIG. 75 is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame. The hitting ball launching device 650 can hit the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. be.

The ball shooting device 650 of this embodiment includes a metal plate shooting base 652 attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a rotary drive shaft 654a protruding forward from the lower rear surface of the shooting base 652. A shooting solenoid 654 attached so as to do so, a ball-hitting mallet 656 fixed to a drive shaft 654a of the shooting solenoid 654 so as to be able to rotate integrally, a tip 658 fixed to the tip of the ball-hitting mallet 656, and a movement trajectory of the mallet tip 658. A shooting rail 660 extending obliquely to the upper left in front view and attached to the front surface of the shooting base 652 with a predetermined position on the top as the base end, and the shooting rail 660 above the base end of the shooting rail 660. A ball stopping piece 662 that forms a gap through which the game ball cannot pass and holds the game ball at the proximal end of the firing rail 660 at the same time that the ball 658 is allowed to pass through, and is held at the proximal end of the firing rail 660 by the ball stopping piece 662. and a stopper 664 for restricting the rotation of the ball hitting mallet 656 (hammer tip 658) toward the launch rail 660 from the ball hitting position where the game ball can be hit.

The shooting solenoid 654 in the hitting ball shooting device 650 has a drive shaft 654a that reciprocates at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500, although detailed illustration is omitted. The ball hitting mallet 656 of the ball shooting device 650 has a fixing portion 656a fixed to the driving shaft 654a of the shooting solenoid 654, and a tip extending in a gentle arc shape from the fixing portion 656a. A rod portion 656b to which a mallet tip 658 is fixed at the tip facing the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c that extends to the opposite side of the rod portion 656b across the fixing portion 656a and is capable of coming into contact with the stopper 664. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the ball hitting mallet 656 comes into contact with the stopper 664, the tip 658 of the mallet tip 658 rotates toward the launch rail 660 from the ball hitting position (rotating end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). It is supposed to be regulated.

In addition, the shooting rail 660 of the hitting ball shooting device 650 has a gentle circular arc shape with a downward depression so as to substantially follow the extension line of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 102). On the other hand, the center has a V-shaped depression so that the game ball hit by the ball hitting mallet 656 can be smoothly guided along the launch rail 660 to the game board 4 side. The launch rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

In addition, the ball shooting device 650 includes a stopper cover 666 covering the front surface of a stopper 664 capable of regulating the rotation end of the ball hitting mallet 656 toward the ball hitting position, and a rotation position of the ball hitting mallet 656 away from the ball hitting position. and a stopper 668 that regulates the end (rotating end in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front). In the ball shooting device 650 of this example, the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 are covered with rubber, so that it is possible to absorb the impact when the ball hitting mallet 656 hits, and to suppress the noise generated by the contact. It is possible to do so.

As shown in FIGS. 67 and 102, the ball shooting device 650 of this example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and the upper end of the shooting rail 660 is substantially in the center in the left-right direction. The upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding opening 601) is positioned below, and the outside of the game board 4 held by the game board holding opening 601 is positioned. A foul space 626 is formed between the lower end of the rail 1111 and spreads downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example launches the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the launch rail 660 in the front view, thereby hitting the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. can be done. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 A game ball that has become a foul ball without being hit inside falls through the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower tray 302. - 特許庁

Also, in the ball shooting device 650, the shooting solenoid 654 is driven by the shooting control unit 4120 with driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball sending unit 580 is driven so as to synchronize with the driving of Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the batted ball launcher 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball, and from that state the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven. is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball sending member 584 is sent to the shot ball shooting device 650 side, so the shooting solenoid 654 is driven substantially simultaneously with the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball sending unit 580. By (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the rear end of the shooting rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably shot by the rotation of the ball hitting mallet 656. ing.

[Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 83. FIG. 76 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the body frame, and FIG. 77 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the body frame. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the rear. Furthermore, FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit exploded from the rear. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 82 is a rear view showing the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotator in the prize ball device. Moreover, FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view showing a ball rolling passage in the prize ball unit.

The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores the game balls supplied from the island facility side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then gives a predetermined payout instruction. is paid out to the upper tray 301 of the pachinko machine 1 based on the above. This prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 for receiving and storing game balls supplied from the island facility side. and a tank rail unit 730 arranged under the prize ball tank 720 to align the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and send them to the downstream side, and a predetermined payout of the game balls aligned by the tank rail unit 730. A prize ball device 740 that pays out based on an instruction, the game balls paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the game balls are paid out when the upper plate 301 is filled with the game balls. It is mainly provided with a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding game balls to the lower tray 302 side.

In addition, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage lid 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a ground metal fitting for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 covering the rear side of the external terminal plate 784. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 has a back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 on the rear surface, and a rear cover engagement groove 780a on the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a for fastening and fixing the back cover 900. A back cover fastening hole 780b is formed (see FIGS. 77 and 79, etc.).

In this prize ball unit 700, a prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper and left sides of the body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and a prize ball tank 720 and a tank rail unit 730 are formed on the upper side. Along with being arranged, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. In addition, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720 above the tank rail unit 730 directly above the prize ball device 740 .

Next, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front so as to substantially correspond to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding opening 601 when viewed from the front. It is integrally molded from transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 is arranged substantially flush with a peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward along the outer periphery of the inverted L shape and extending inwardly from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a with a predetermined width. and a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 79, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. As shown in FIG. The rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base 710 is located at a position recessed from the front end, and when attached to the body frame base 600, a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

In addition, the prize ball base 710 has a tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, and an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate arranged beside the tank mounting portion 711 (right side in rear view). An external terminal board mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the lower end of the upper side of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear side of the vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b. A prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740 to the prize ball device mounting portion 714, a prize ball passage 715 for guiding downward the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714, and a rear wall A mounting locking portion 716 for mounting a full-tank branch unit 770 is provided at the lower end of the portion 710b.

Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 penetrates in the front-rear direction at the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and projects forward from the prize ball device 740. and a back cover engagement groove 718 for securing the cover 900 . In addition, although detailed description is omitted, the prize ball base 710 has mounting holes, mounting bosses, etc. for mounting the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, etc., and mounting them to the main body frame base 600 at appropriate positions. is formed in

Next, as shown in FIG. 80, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box with an open top, and the bottom wall portion has a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 which rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 in a rectangular shape only at the right rear portion (rear portion on the open side) in a plan view, and an outer peripheral wall portion. A discharge port 723 formed by a portion protruding rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 of the right rear portion of 722 and opening downward, and a plate shape from the left side of the discharge port 723 in plan view (shaft support side) to the left end of the prize ball tank 720 a rod-shaped shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower left end of the eaves portion 724 in plan view; and a mounting portion 726 for mounting the tank 720 to the ball tank mounting portion 711 of the ball base 710 .

The prize ball tank 720 has a bottom wall portion 721 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall portion 722 so that a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721 . In addition, the prize ball tank 720 is inclined such that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the game balls on the bottom wall portion 721 roll toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

The prize ball tank 720 also includes two ball leveling members 727 rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725 . As shown in the figure, this sphere leveling member 727 has one end supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside so that the other end hangs down due to its own weight. . The ball leveling member 727 is suspended in a tank rail unit 730 to be described later, and can level and align game balls rolling in the tank rail unit 730 . In addition, the canopy portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, and it is possible to prevent game balls from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730. Intrusion of dust or the like into the rail unit 730 can be prevented.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lowered toward the right side in plan view, The right side (the side closer to the discharge port 723 ) in plan view is formed so as to incline toward the rear discharge port 723 . As a result, the flow of game balls can be made smooth, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and elongated in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter shape with an open top and a predetermined depth, and has a width (depth) that allows game balls to be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is slanted so that the The tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 83) that opens downward at the left (rotary support side) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at substantially the center in the front-rear direction, and a lower surface at the front end. It is provided with a plurality of locking projecting pieces 731c (see FIG. 78) that protrude downward and are locked to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 from above.

The tank rail 731 has a right (open side) end in a front view located directly under the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 is discharged. After receiving it, it can be rolled to the left and delivered to the prize ball device 740 side from the discharge port 731a. In addition, by locking the locking projecting piece 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the prize ball base 710. ing.

In addition, the tank rail unit 730 is continuous with an alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper part of the discharge port 731a of the tank rail 731, a gear cover 733 covering the top of the alignment gear 732, and a right end of the gear cover 733 in front view. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper part of the tank rail 731, and a ball stop piece that can move forward and backward in the tank rail 731 and stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a side. 735, and a ground plate 736 arranged in the tank rail 731 and capable of coming into contact with the game ball in the tank rail 731. - 特許庁As shown in the figure, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths for the game balls partitioned into two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731 . Also, the ball retainer plate 734 has an attachment portion 734a to which the ball stopper 735 is attached, and two slits 734b that penetrate vertically and into which the projecting pieces 735a of the ball stopper 735 can be inserted.

In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above into the upstream side (open side) of the ball holding plate 734. The game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 are leveled by the ball leveling member 727, and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b. It is possible. In addition, the ball pressing plate 734 is for forcibly making a game ball that has not reached a single level by the ball leveling member 727, and the gap between the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. It is attached to the tank rail 731 as shown in FIG.

As illustrated, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer circumference, and is pivotally supported such that the tooth pitches of the pair of alignment gears 732 are shifted by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper portion of the game ball flowing down the tank rail 731 meshes with the teeth of the aligning gear 732 and flows down to the discharge port 723 on the downstream side, the game balls aligned in two rows are alternately awarded one by one. It is intended to be sent to device 740 .

In addition, a narrow groove penetrating vertically is formed in the bottom of the tank rail 731 so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls in the tank rail 731 together with the game ball falls down from the narrow groove. It's becoming Further, the grounding plate 736 arranged on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is grounded to the outside through the grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via the grounding metal fitting 782, although detailed illustration is omitted. When the game ball comes into contact with the ground plate 736 within the tank rail 731, the static electricity can be removed.

In addition, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 that is rotatably attached to the mounting portion 734a of the ball retainer plate 734 so that the projecting piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 passes through the slit 734b into the tank rail 731. By inserting the protruding piece 735a into the tank rail 731, the two rows of flow paths can be closed, and the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 can be stopped. there is

Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the state of the game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 discharges the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. This prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 attached to a prize ball device mounting portion 714 of a prize ball base 710, as shown in FIGS. As shown, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 has a supply passage on the rear surface side, which opens at the upper end and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b having a space of a predetermined size that communicates with the lower end of the supply passage 741a, and a lower end of the distribution space 741b on the left side (open side) in rear view and bent in a substantially V shape in rear view. It has a winning ball passage 741c that opens on the left side, and a ball extraction passage 741d that communicates with the lower end of the distribution space 741b on the right side (rotary support side) in rear view and extends downward to open on the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball extraction passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a rearwardly open state.

The prize ball device 740 of this example includes a back cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and having a shorter length in the vertical direction than the unit base 741, and a plate-shaped motor support arranged under the back cover 742. A board 743, a payout motor 744 arranged in front of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotary shaft 744a projects backward beyond the motor support plate 743, and the payout motor 744 is integrated with the rotary shaft 744a. A first gear 745 that is rotatably fixed and arranged on the rear side of the motor support plate 743 , a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 741 , and meshes with the second gear 746 . A third gear 747 pivotally supported by the unit base 741, a payout rotator 748 that rotates integrally with the third gear 747 and is arranged in the sorting space 741b of the unit base 741, and the payout rotator 748 is the third gear. A rotation detection plate 749 having a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction is provided on the opposite side of the plate 747 with the rotation detection plate 749 therebetween.

In addition, the prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of game balls in the supply passage 741a. A counting sensor 751 for counting a number, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting a detection slit 749a of a rotation detection plate 749 that rotates integrally with a dispensing rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 are held and attached to the back surface of the back cover 742. a sensor board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball cutoff switch 750, a counting sensor 751, a rotation angle sensor 752, and a prize ball relay board 754 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 by relaying the connection between the payout control board 4110 and It has

Furthermore, the prize ball device 740 includes a board cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay board 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, a third gear 747 (rotation detection board 749 ), and a gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the rear cover 742 therebetween covering the sensor substrate 753 from the rear side, and a supply passage capable of contacting game balls rolling in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741. A ground fitting 757, a screw 758 for fixing the payout motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween, and a screw 758 for grounding the payout motor 744, and a back cover 742 are detachably supported on the unit base 741. and an attachment/detachment button 759 .

The prize ball device 740 of this example has a back cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball extraction passage 741d are opened. is to be closed. In addition, the unit base 741 has a shape in which a position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a bulges rearward once, so that the momentum of the game ball ejected and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be reduced. It is possible. In addition, the unit base 741 has one side surface (left side in the rear view) that is partially cut out below the rearwardly bulging position of the supply passage 741a, and is outside the cutout position of the supply passage 741a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball cutoff switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a lower side than the prize ball passage 741c so as to penetrate in the front and back direction. and a motor insertion hole 741g formed through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

By attaching the ball breaker switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the actuating piece of the ball breaker switch 750 forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a. When the actuating piece is pressed by the game ball, the presence or absence of the game ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the ball break switch 750. As shown in FIG. When the game balls in the supply passage 741a are not detected by the ball-out switch 750 (ball-out state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and the player or the hall can detect the ball-out state. It is designed to be notified to the side.

In addition, the unit base 741 includes a bearing portion 741h for axially supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotating body 748), and between the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. and a button support hole 741j for supporting a detachable button 759 disposed on the upper part of the unit base 741 and for detachably supporting the back cover 742. I have it. This unit base 741 has a supply path grounding metal fitting 757 attached to the grounding metal fitting mounting portion 741i so that the rear surface of the supply path grounding metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game balls in the supply path 741a. The front surface of the supply passage grounding fitting 757 contacts with the rear surface of the lower end of the U-shaped grounding fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball rolling in the supply passage 741a is removed via the supply passage grounding fitting 757. It is possible to do so.

The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically elongated plate shape as a whole, and the upper end thereof is bulged rearward. In the upper part of the back cover 742, there are a button insertion hole 742a for inserting the attach/detach button 759, a relay board mounting part 742b for mounting the winning ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the rear surface of the approximately center in the vertical direction, and a relay board mounting part. A sensor board mounting portion 742c for mounting the sensor board 753 disposed below the portion 742b, and a through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass are provided. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the rear cover 742 is formed so as to be positioned behind the ground metal fitting mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is in contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, so that the heat generated by the payout motor 744 can be removed. It is designed to facilitate heat dissipation.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 82, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three concave portions 748a each having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating the 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated one by one in the concave portion 748a, and can be paid out to the winning ball passage 741c or the ball extraction passage 741d side. Three detection slits 749a of a rotation detection plate 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotor 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the recesses 748a of the payout rotor 748. By detecting, the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

In the prize ball device 740 of this example, a payout command from the main control board 4100 or a lending command from the CR unit 6 is input to the payout control board 4110, or a payout motor is operated by operating the ball extraction switch 860b. 744 rotates to discharge a predetermined number of game balls to the player side (upper tray 301) or to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotary shaft 744a of the dispensing motor 744 is driven to rotate, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotary shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshing with the first gear 745 is rotated. A third gear 747 meshing with is rotated. A payout rotor 748 is fixed to the front side of the third gear 747, and a rotation detection board 749 is fixed to the rear side of the third gear 747 so as to be rotatable together. It is designed to rotate.

As shown in FIG. 82, this prize ball device 740 has a payout rotating body 748 rotatably supported substantially in the center of a sorting space 741b. When the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise in a rear view by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the winning ball passage 741c, and the payout rotation is performed. The game balls put out to the prize ball passage 741 c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710 . On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the ball extraction passage 741d side, and the payout rotating body 748 The game ball dispensed to the ball extraction passage 741d side from the lower end of the ball extraction passage 741d, the ball extraction passage 778 of the full tank branch unit 770 described later, the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, the board unit 800 It can be discharged to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power board box holder 840 .

In addition, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball extraction passage 741d, etc. of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and troubles such as ball clogging can be easily discovered. .

Next, the full-tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 78, 79 and 83. FIG. The full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 to the plate unit 300. In addition, when the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is filled with game balls, the game balls can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 so as to be put out.

This full tank branch unit 770 has a locking portion 770a that is locked to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the upper part in the approximate center in the front and back direction, and is fixed to the lower end back surface of the prize ball base 710 at the upper rear end. and a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side, and the prize ball base By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branch unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

As shown in the figure, the full-tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box shape that is lowered from the rear end to the front end. A prize ball receiving port 771 that receives the game balls that have flowed down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 that is arranged below the prize ball receiving port 771 and spreads in the left and right direction (see FIG. 83) Then, a normal path 773 (see FIG. 83) that guides the game ball forward from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772, and the game ball that rolls in the normal path 773 is released forward and the front end A normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end in front view, and a full tank passage 775 (see FIG. ), and a full ball outlet 776 that discharges game balls rolling in the full tank passage 775 forward and opens on the left side of the normal ball outlet 774 in front view.

Furthermore, the full tank branch unit 770 has a ball extraction receiving opening 777 that opens upward at the left end in the front view of the upper rear end and receives the game ball that has flowed down the ball extraction passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, and a ball. A ball extraction passage 778 (see FIG. 83) that guides the game ball received in the extraction and reception opening 777 to the front side, and a normal ball exit 774 at the left end in the front view that releases the game ball rolling in the ball extraction passage 778 forward. and a ball extraction port 779 opened at a position behind the full tank ball outlet 776. - 特許庁

In the full-tank branch unit 770 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full-tank ball outlet 776 are the first foul cover units 540 in the door frame 5, respectively. The ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are opposed and communicated, and the game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and reaches the plate unit 300. A game ball supplied to the upper tray 301 and discharged from the full ball outlet 776 passes through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540 and is supplied to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300.例文帳に追加In addition, the ball extraction port 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the rear. is delivered to the body frame base ball extraction passage 622.

In this full-tank branch unit 770, the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 are received at the prize ball receiving port 771 through the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In a normal state, the game ball entering the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 . Then, the game ball that has flowed down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball entrance 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal ball exit 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and exits the first ball exit 544a of the plate unit 300. It will be supplied to the upper tray 301 .

By the way, when the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is filled with game balls, and game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740), the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540 The game balls that cannot exit from 544a to the upper plate 301 side stay in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770 is also full. become. In this state, the game ball entered into the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 could not enter the normal passage 773, started to move laterally in the branch space 772, and moved laterally. A game ball enters into the full tank passage 775, passes through the full tank ball exit 776, the second ball entrance 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball exit 544b, and under the plate unit 300. It is adapted to be supplied to the plate 302 .

The full-tank branch unit 770 of this example is entirely made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, foreign matter such as dust and dirt that has entered the full-tank branch unit 770 and the occurrence of ball clogging can be easily found without disassembling the full-tank branch unit 7700. .

In this way, the full-tank branching unit 770 of the present example automatically distributes the game balls paid out from the winning ball device 740 until the game balls in the upper tray 301 become full. Since it is possible to supply the game balls to the lower tray 302, unlike the conventional pachinko machine, when the upper tray is full and the ball ejection button on the upper tray is operated, the game balls are not supplied to the ball shooting device. Interruption of hitting the game ball can be avoided, troublesomeness during the game can be eliminated, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example branches the path of the game balls paid out directly below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko machine 1 when the upper tray 301 is full. Since the game balls staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are dispensed to the upper tray 301, the game balls in the upper tray 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 are released by the hitting ball shooting device. A game ball can be hit directly by 650 , and the amount of game balls stored in the upper tray 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper tray 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773 . That is, even if the capacity of the upper tray 301 is smaller than that of the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the upper tray 301 can store the same amount of game balls as the conventional one. can be done. Therefore, by making the upper tray 301 smaller, it becomes possible to relatively enlarge (widen) the game window 101 in the door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider game area 1100 can be provided. The pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the players, and the wide game area 1100 can entertain the players.

Furthermore, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray and the reception port (first Even if there is only one ball inlet 542a and second ball inlet 542c), the game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made compatible with the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage trays without changing the game ball flow path (full tank branch unit 770) in the main body frame 3. , it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of line-up of pachinko machines 1 having door frames 5 with different numbers of storage trays.

Further, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be dealt with without changing the main body frame 3, so the entire pachinko machine 1 related to the change of the door frame 5 cost can be reduced, and various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

Furthermore, the game ball sent to the door frame 5 side from the normal ball outlet 774 through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 provided with only one storage tray. , the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage tray via the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so the time lag from the payment to the storage can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player due to lack of game balls to be hit, and to sufficiently cope with the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage trays. .

In addition, as long as the upper tray 301 is not full, the game balls paid out from the winning ball device 740 are sent to the upper tray 301, so the frequency of moving the game balls stored in the lower tray 302 to the upper tray 301 is reduced. As a result, the player can concentrate on the operation of hitting the game ball, etc., and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side, and even if the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, the first ball Since the position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a etc. can be made the same height as the first ball inlet 542a etc. corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 having two storage plates, It is possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, secure a sufficient amount of game balls to be stored by deepening the storage tray, and play the game without frequently worrying about the amount of storage for the player. can be performed, and the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays can be made compatible without changing the body frame 3 side, so that the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1, etc. is increased. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper tray 301 is filled with game balls. Even if the game balls cannot come out from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball outlet 774 to the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. , and the substantial amount of game balls stored in the upper tray 301 can be increased as much as possible. In the case where the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, even if the storage tray is filled with game balls and the game balls cannot be discharged from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full ball outlet 776, Since the position where the full-filled passage 775 diverges from the normal passage 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are placed not only in the normal passage 773 but also in the full-filled passage 775. can be stored, and the substantial amount of game balls stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the amount of game balls stored in each door frame 5 can be maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). The number can be increased as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.例文帳に追加

In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full passage 775 in the full tank branching unit 770 are made wide enough to allow game balls to roll in multiple rows, and the amount of game balls retained (storage amount) in the full tank branching unit 770 can be increased, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the substantial storage amount including the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770.例文帳に追加Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be made compatible with door frames 5 having different numbers of storage trays without changing the passage of game balls in the body frame 3.例文帳に追加

In addition, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 can be viewed from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with a transparent resin, a problem occurs when game balls are clogged in the full tank branch unit 770. When this happens, the location of clogged balls can be easily found from the outside of the full-tank branch unit 770, and the problem can be eliminated early to increase the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

[Ball exit opening/closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. FIG. FIG. 84 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the body frame. Also, FIG. 85 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the body frame. Further, FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 in the body frame 3 of this embodiment is attached to the mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end in the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 goes to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of game balls.

The ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed in the vicinity of the upper left end of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front so as not to protrude beyond the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A shutter base 791 is attached. Then, a plate-shaped opening/closing shutter 792 held by the shutter base 791 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, an opening/closing crank 793 for sliding the opening/closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and the opening/closing shutter 792 are lifted through the opening/closing crank 793. and an opening/closing spring 794 that biases the opening and closing.

The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening/closing shutter 792 so as to be vertically slidable so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in the front-rear direction between the pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank disposed on the front surface of the left end in a front view and supporting an opening/closing crank 793 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d that locks one end (upper end) of the opening/closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is arranged on the left side of the opening 791b in front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is arranged in the vicinity of the upper left side of the left-right center in front view.

The opening/closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a flat shutter body 792a and a pair of sliding projections (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide grooves 791a of the shutter base 791. ), and a laterally long rectangular drive hole 792b that is arranged between the pair of sliding protrusions and faces the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

Further, the opening/closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a right outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in front view. A driving rod 793b extends right outward from the opening 791b and has a tip extending to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the opening 791b. an abutment portion 793d extending downward from the lower outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view and having a spherical tip; ), and a spring locking portion 793e for locking.

In addition, in the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening/closing shutter 792 are formed of transparent synthetic resin, and even when the opening/closing shutter 792 is raised, it is arranged on the rear side through the opening/closing shutter 792. A normal ball outlet 774, a full tank outlet 776, and the like in the full-tank branch unit 770 are visible.

In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 of this example, the opening/closing crank 793 rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, so that the driving pin 793c of the opening/closing crank 793 rotates in an arc shape in the vertical direction, and at the same time, the driving pin 793c rotates. The open/close shutter 792 slides in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b into which the is inserted. In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3, the abutting portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 abuts the opening/closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 on the door frame 5. The contact portion 793d is rotated clockwise in front view against the biasing force of the opening/closing spring 794, and the driving pin 793c rotates clockwise in front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open/close shutter 792 is lowered to open the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 .

When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the body frame 3 from this state, the contact portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 and the opening/closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 on the door frame 5 are released, and the opening/closing crank 793 is released. is rotated counterclockwise in front view by the biasing force of the opening/closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening/closing shutter 792 rises to close the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. It is possible to do so.

In this way, according to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3, the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 automatically opens the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened while game balls remain in the full-tank branching unit 770, game balls are prevented from spilling out of the normal ball outlet 774 and the full-tank ball outlet 776.例文帳に追加You can do it.

[Substrate unit]
Next, the board unit 800 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 93. FIG. 87 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the body frame, and FIG. 88 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the body frame. Also, FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit when it is exploded and viewed from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit when it is exploded and viewed from behind. Also, FIG. 91 is a perspective view for explaining the action of the standing wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. FIG. 92(A) is a cross-sectional view of a terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded front perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit. Also, FIG. 93(A) is a front view of the emission power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in (A).

The board unit 800 in the body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a board unit base. A power supply board box 830 attached to the rear surface of the right end of 810 in front view, a power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the power supply board box 830 from the rear side, and a power supply board box holder 840. A power supply board box 850 which is attached to the rear surface and whose rear end is formed in a size that is substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820; , a terminal board box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 in front view, a main side relay terminal board 880 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 810, and a peripheral side relay A terminal plate 882 is provided.

The board unit base 810 in the board unit 800 of this example is, as shown in the figure, elongated in the left-right direction, and the substantially center part in the left-right direction is lowered by one step and gradually inclined upward toward the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding forward from the front surface, an opening 812 disposed above a position one step lower than the center in the left-right direction of the shielding wall portion 811 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the lower side of the shielding wall portion 811. A substrate mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end in front view for mounting the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882, and a rectangular shape elongated in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813 in front view. A cylindrical duct portion 814 that penetrates through, a plurality of longitudinal slit-like through holes 815 that penetrate in the front-back direction at positions corresponding to the lower speakers 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface, and a left side in rear view (right side in front view). ) A box housing portion 816 which is open rearward and upward and which can house the front side of the firing power supply board box 830 is provided on the rear surface of the upper portion.

The board unit base 810 is formed such that the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. A game ball can be prevented from dropping downward from the base ball extraction passage 622, and the strength of the board unit base 810 can be increased. In addition, the board unit base 810 sends game balls flowing down the body frame base ball extraction passage 622 to the power board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through an opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. It is possible to do so.

Further, the board unit base 810 is arranged such that the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main-side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600 . When the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813 , the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are positioned forward from the opening 614 of the body frame base 600 . It is designed to come to Further, the board unit base 810 is configured so that the sound from the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 can be transmitted satisfactorily to the front side by means of the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815 .

Furthermore, the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing part 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box housing part 816 is arranged on the rear side. , it is possible to form a housing recess for housing the firing power supply board box 830 .

A speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 literally has a lower speaker 821 mounted facing forward. The speaker box 820 hermetically covers the rear side of the lower speaker 821 and has a horizontally elongated rectangular opening 822 on the left side of the lower speaker 821 in front view. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the lower speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinthine passage, thereby inverting the phase of the sound behind the lower speaker 821. This is a bass-reflex type speaker box capable of emitting a deeper bass sound with respect to the diameter of the lower speaker 821 . The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound radiated from the opening 822 can be transmitted well forward. ing.

A firing power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box-like shape with an open rear, and includes a firing power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. The emission power supply board box 830 accommodates various electronic components attached to the emission power supply board 831. Heat from the electronic components, etc. can be released to the outside.

This firing power supply board box 830 is attached and detached from above into an upwardly opened housing recess formed by a box housing section 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box housing section 843 of a power board box holder 840, which will be described later. be accommodated as much as possible. As a result, when the body frame 3 is assembled, if a problem occurs in the firing power board box 830, the firing power board box 830 can be easily removed from the front side of the body frame 3 and replaced or repaired. (See Figure 67).

Further detailing the firing power supply board box 830, as also shown in FIG. , and a combined current of the current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is applied to the shooting solenoid 654 of the hitting ball shooting device 650 to drive it. The emission power supply board box 830 has slits 830a formed on its upper and lower surfaces as heat radiation holes in order to release heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the emission power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

In addition, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the emission power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC/DC converter 831a, the side surface of the emission power supply board box 830 where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is arranged has heat dissipation holes. A slit 830a is formed. In addition, in the emission power supply board box 830, a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC/DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is an upper inner wall. and the inner wall of the lower surface are integrally formed from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening. Thus, when the launch power board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power board box 830 to close the internal space of the launch power board box 830, the internal space of the launch power board box 830 is accommodated by the partition wall 830b to accommodate the electrolytic capacitor SC0. and an accommodation space 830d for accommodating the DC/DC converter 831a. , and a housing space 830d for housing the DC/DC converter 831a.

The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is released through the slits as heat dissipation holes formed in the upper, side, and lower surfaces that communicate the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. By releasing the heat to the outside through 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC/DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transmitted to the DC/DC converter 831a. The heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC/DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a is dissipated through heat dissipation holes formed in the upper and lower surfaces that communicate the accommodation space 830d and the outside air. By releasing the heat to the outside through the slit 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transferred to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

In this embodiment, the DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a combined current to flow through the shooting solenoid 654 of the batted ball shooting device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are separate from the power supply board 851. By being provided on the power supply board 831 , the size of the emission power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851 . Therefore, the smaller size of the emission power supply board 831 makes it easier to handle, and the replacement work of the emission power supply board 831 is facilitated, which contributes to shortening the time spent on the replacement work. In this replacement work, the firing power board box 830 can be replaced while the firing power board 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power board box 830, that is, the whole firing power board box 830 can be replaced.

In addition, even if the pachinko machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life and the driving discharge by the discharge solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to discharge and the game has to be interrupted, the replacement work of the discharge power supply board 831 is easy. Interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage by being able to do it immediately. Therefore, the impossibility of shooting due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be very easily resolved, and the interruption of the game due to the impossibility of shooting can be resolved at an early stage to resume the game, thereby reducing the interest of the player. can be suppressed.

In addition, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 is repeatedly charged and discharged at a frequency of, for example, 100 times per minute each time the firing is performed by the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, although the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of island facilities such as game halls, charging and discharging are not repeated at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. , compared to the launch power supply board 831, its life is extremely long. In other words, the emission power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration due to charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply board 851 reaches the end of its life due to aging. The DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a combined current to flow through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the power supply board 851 and the separate firing power supply board 831, thereby shortening the service life. It is possible to concentrate on the power supply board 851 the electronic components associated with long-term aging. As a result, it is possible to prevent an electronic component with a long life due to secular change from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 with a short life.

In addition, since the shooting power supply board 831 having the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball shooting device 650 can be attached and detached from the front side through the game board holding opening 601 holding the game board 4, the capacity Even if an attempt is made to cheat by changing to a different electrolytic capacitor SC0, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding opening 601 in order to detach the firing power supply board 831, and it is difficult to replace the firing power supply board 831. By making it difficult to commit fraud, it is possible to deter fraud that intentionally changes the injection strength that is optimized by illegally modifying the launch power supply board 831, and to make it difficult to commit fraud. The pachinko machine 1 can prevent a frustrated player from developing into dishonesty such as dishonesty.

In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 is detachable and can be replaced, even if fraud is done to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 etc. of the launch power supply board 831, the launch power supply board 831 is immediately replaced to prevent fraud The game interruption period can be shortened as much as possible, and the feeling of frustration or disappointment caused by the interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the player in the game.

Furthermore, the firing power supply board 831 having the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the firing control unit 4120 that controls the ball firing device 650 can be attached and detached from the front side through the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3 that holds the game board 4. , When the game board 4 is replaced due to a model change, etc., the launch power board 831 (launch power board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can also be easily replaced, so it matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. By replacing with a shooting power supply board 831 equipped with an electrolytic capacitor SC0 and a DC/DC converter 831a that can realize hitting characteristics, the hitting characteristics of the hit ball shooting device 650 that has been provided in the main body frame 3 before can be used as a new game. It can be made to match board 4. Therefore, since the hitting characteristics of the game ball can be easily matched with the concept of the game board 4, the game by the game board 4 of the new model can be fully enjoyed, and the decline of the interest of the player can be suppressed. can do.

In addition, since the firing power supply board 831 of the firing control unit 4120 can be attached and detached from the front side, when replacing the firing power supply board 831, there is no need to open the main body frame 3 with respect to island facilities such as game halls. The labor required for replacement can be simplified, the replacement can be performed in a short time, and an increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed. In addition, since the launch power board 831 (launch power board box 830) is detachable and can be replaced, compared to the case where the entire launch control unit 4120 (payout control board 4110) is replaced, the change in driving characteristics Therefore, the cost required for this can be reduced, and the burden on the hall side and the like can be reduced.

Furthermore, when changing the model, etc., only the game board 4 is replaced, and the door frame 5, the main body frame 3, etc. can be used as they are, so that the firing control unit 4120 will not function after long-term use. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launch power supply board 831 deteriorates, as described above, the launch power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side. To eliminate the trouble by doing so, to shorten the interruption period of the game as much as possible, and to quickly eliminate the frustration and disappointment caused by the interruption of the game. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, the firing power supply board 831 (shooting power board box 830) is supported through the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for cheating is inserted through the gap between the door frame 5 and the body frame 3, the game board 4 prevents the cheating tool from reaching the emission power supply board 831. can be blocked, and the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being fraudulent with respect to the launching power supply board 831, and has a high defense against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, the shooting power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding opening 601, and it is likely that the position where the shooting power supply board box 830 is supported is behind the front surface of the main body frame 3, so the shooting power supply A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the emission power board box 830 and achieves the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided on the firing power supply board 831, and the firing power supply board 831 can be easily attached and detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power can be supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load applied to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 increases and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 easily deteriorates, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (the launch power supply board 831) can be easily replaced, and the problem can be resolved early to interrupt the game. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of shortening the time as much as possible and reliably exhibiting the above-described effects.

In addition, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 is opened upward to the front left side of the left-right center in front view, and receives the game ball discharged downward from the out-ball discharge part 1161 of the game board 4. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 that guides downward and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841, and a front side (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841. A front box housing portion 843 that is open forward and upward to accommodate the rear side of the launching power board box 830, and a front end of the power board box 850 that is formed so that the entire rear surface of the power board box holder 840 is recessed forward. and a rear box accommodation portion 844 that can be accommodated.

The power board box holder 840 is arranged such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810 , and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is positioned to face the discharge passage 842 . 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and passes through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 to the rear of the board unit base 810. The game balls that have flowed down to the side and the game balls that have been discharged from the out-ball discharging portion 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharged ball receiving portion 841, which will be described in detail later, are sent through the discharge passage 842 to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. It can be discharged downward.

In addition, the power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodation part 816 of the board unit base 810, and the box accommodation part 816 and the front box accommodation part 843 are formed to accommodate the firing power supply board box 830. A recess can be formed.

Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and allows heat from the electronic components and the like to escape to the outside through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. can be released to As shown in FIG. 90, a power switch 852 attached to a power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 .

The power supply board box 850 is an upright wall in which a power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 88 and 90) attached to the lower side of the power supply switch 852 on the power supply board 851 protrudes rearward along the lower side of the opening facing the rear side. A wiring cord 854 can be inserted between a portion 850b, a projection 850c projecting rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and an outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 arranged on the front side and below the standing wall portion 850b. and a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a large gap. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece that locks with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855. The locking claw and the locking piece By locking the connector terminal 855 from the power terminal 853 , the connector terminal 855 is prevented from coming off.

As shown in FIG. 91, the power supply board box 850 has an upright wall portion 850b that extends slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855 when the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851, as shown in FIG. It is formed so as to protrude to the In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 wraps around from the front lower side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear side so as to be caught by the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the connector is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851. A terminal 855 is adapted to be connected.

By the way, when a connector terminal with a wiring cord extending out is connected to a connection terminal attached to a substrate and then the wiring cord is pulled toward the substrate, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. Since the connector terminal is pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the tip side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply board 851 side (the front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even if the wiring cord 854 is pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed so as to wrap (fold) behind the connector terminal 855 by the upright wall portion 850b projecting rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent the terminal 855 from being pressed against the power terminal 853 side, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power terminal 853 can be easily removed.

In addition, since the power supply board box 850 is provided with projections 850c projecting rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, Protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, thereby preventing the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back at the vertical wall portion 850b can be moved toward the vertical wall portion 850b. In addition, after folding the wiring cord 854 at the standing wall portion 850b, the wiring guide portion 850d can immediately move the wiring cord 854 toward the standing wall portion 850b side, so that a series of operations can be performed continuously. can be performed, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified.

The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board box holder 840 are formed so that the front-rear dimensions of the assembled state are substantially the same as the front-rear dimensions of the speaker box 820 . , the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

In this example, the connector terminals 855 are connected to the power supply terminals 853 facing from the opening of the power supply board box 850 covering the power supply board 851, and the connector is connected by the vertical wall portion 850b projecting rearward from the rear end of the connector terminals 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension acting on the connector terminal 855 due to the pulling of the wiring cord 854 is reduced by the power supply terminal to which the connection is fixed by the locking claw or the like. It is possible to act in such a direction as to release the connection with 853, it is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 from being unable to be removed by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 can be avoided. can be easily removed, and maintenance such as replacement of the substrate can be easily performed.

In addition, since the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the vertical wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 can be bent more loosely than when the vertical wall portion 850b is not provided. It is possible to avoid applying an unreasonable force to the 854 itself, and to prevent the wiring cord 854 from being disconnected due to the unreasonable force.

Furthermore, the vertical wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power terminal 853. Since the vertical wall portion 850b is likely to be positioned adjacent to the power terminal 853, it is connected to the power terminal 853. The wiring cord 854 extending from the connected connector terminal 855 can be extended to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting, and it is possible to prevent troubles such as disconnection from occurring.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 is provided with the vertical wall part 850b covering the power supply board 851, the power supply board 851 does not need to be provided with the vertical wall part 850b, and the power supply board 851 can be easily assembled. . In addition, since the power supply board box 850 covers the power supply board 851, it is possible to prevent dust and dirt from adhering to the power supply board 851, which may cause problems. It is possible to make it difficult to touch or replace electronic parts (for example, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.), and to increase the defense against fraud. It's becoming

Also, the direction in which the connector terminals 855 are connected to the power terminals 853 on the power board 851 is substantially perpendicular to the board surface (the front-rear direction). 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply substrate 851 when connecting or disconnecting 855, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portions of the power supply terminals 853. It is possible to prevent the breakage of the power supply terminal 853 and the disconnection of the power supply terminal 853 from the power supply board 851, thereby making it possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 in which troubles are unlikely to occur.

Furthermore, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means of the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b so that the wiring cord 854 can be fixed. Even if a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in such a direction as to disconnect the connector terminal 855 from the power supply terminal 853 via the connector terminal 855, the disconnection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented. By reliably maintaining the connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853, it is possible to prevent problems such as poor contact and poor conduction.

In addition, since the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 at which the wiring cord 854 is folded back is provided with projections 850c projecting backward, the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b. Even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the side, the protrusions 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, thereby preventing the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to realize the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described effects by preventing the above.

In addition, since the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850 guides the wiring cord 854 folded back at the vertical wall portion 850b toward the vertical wall portion 850b, it is difficult for the wiring cord 854 to come off the vertical wall portion 850b. In addition, the wiring cord 854 can be folded back at the vertical wall portion 850b and immediately brought to the vertical wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d. can be performed, a series of operations can be performed continuously, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified, thereby suppressing an increase in cost.

The payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 which is oblong and open at the rear, and a thin box-shaped cover which is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and opened at the front. 862 and a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 118) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered with the cover 862 . In addition, the payout control board box 860 is provided with a plurality of separation cut portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 projecting outward from the left end in rear view. A box base 861 and a cover 862 are caulked and fixed. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, they cannot be separated unless the separation cutting portion 863 is cut, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. . Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been illegally opened or closed. In this example, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

The payout control board box 860 has an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 4110 facing backward through a cover 862 (see FIG. 66). ). In the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting with the main control board 4100 or the like face rearward through the cover 862. As shown in FIG.

Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and includes a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper rear surface on the left side when viewed from the rear, and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end when viewed from the rear. a peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 attached to the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and having peripheral panel relay terminals 872a mounted on the rear surface thereof; A connection terminal plate cover 873 which is attached from the rear side and has an opening 873b extending vertically in the rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a facing rearward from the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. and a board box cover 875 covering the rear side of the board base 871 together with the connection terminal board cover 873 .

The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the side of the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 with a ball lending machine (also referred to as CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each made of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the CR unit connection terminals are accessible from the outside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, when a problem such as ball jam occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the contents of the error code displayed on the frequency indicator and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side are displayed. A displayed status display sticker 876 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 92, the board base 871 of the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with an open rear end. The board base 871 includes a fixing piece (not shown) that is formed on the inner upper part of the board mounting part 871a and fixes the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and a peripheral panel relay terminal board formed on the inner lower part of the board mounting part 871a. A terminal board box locking claw 871i that locks the lower end of the terminal board 872 is provided, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 is detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the terminal board box locking claw 871i. It is possible to do so.

The substrate cover mounting portion 871b of the substrate base 871 is formed in the shape of a thin box that is open rearward, and the size of the inner periphery is such that the outer periphery of the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be inserted thereinto. In addition, the inner peripheral wall thereof serves as an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The board base 871 has a pair of fixing holes 871d that pass through the outer piece 871c on the right side in the rear view, and a bottom wall of the board cover mounting part 871b that extends rearward from the bottom wall of the board cover mounting part 871b and contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has two ridges 871e extending in the vertical direction, and a locking hole 871f that is arranged on the left outer side of the board cover mounting portion 871b in a rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The ridges 871e on the substrate base 871 project slightly less backward than the outer piece portions 871c, and as shown in the figure, extend as far as possible on both side ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. are arranged so as to be close to the

Further, the board base 871 includes a pair of bearings 871g arranged separately in the vertical direction on the rear surface of the right side of the board cover mounting part 871b when viewed from the rear and for rotatably supporting the board box cover 875, and the left end when viewed from the rear. and a rectangular tubular locking portion 871h arranged on the rear surface near the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

The connection terminal plate cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and has an outer wall portion 873c that can be inserted into the board cover mounting portion 871b surrounded by the outer piece portion 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a that closes the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening 873b that penetrates the rear wall portion 873a and extends in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion that extends substantially along the inner circumference of the opening portion 873b. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is held so that the inner wall portion 873d extending forward (toward the substrate base 871 side) from 873a and the front end of the inner wall portion 873d abut against the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the upper and lower outer wall portions are attached. and a pair of claw-like substrate holding portions 873e formed on 873c.

The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating the rear wall portion 873a arranged at positions corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, A box-shaped protective portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f arranged in the center and is open on the left side in rear view, and a substrate base 871 that extends outward (to the right) from the right end of the outer wall portion 873c in rear view. A pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d of the substrate base 871, and an elastic claw-like engagement that is formed at the left end of the outer wall 873c in rear view and can be engaged with the locking holes 871f of the substrate base 871. and a locking claw piece 873i. Although not shown, inner wall portions 873d extending forward are also formed on the upper and lower sides of the inner periphery of the central opening 873f provided with the protective portion 873g.

The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape with an open front side formed by an outer wall portion 873c and a rear wall portion 873a. In addition, by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 inside the connection terminal plate cover 873 from the front side of the opening, the front end of the inner wall portion 873d can restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 rearward. In addition, forward movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be restricted by the pair of board holding portions 873e, and thus the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. It's becoming Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is configured by inserting its fixing piece 873h into the fixing hole 871d of the board base 871 and then locking the locking claw piece 873i into the locking hole 871f of the board base 871, whereby the board is It can be detachably attached to the substrate cover attachment portion 871b of the base 871. As shown in FIG.

The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has CR unit connection terminals 874a on its surface side (rear side) for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall. In addition, a payout control board 4110 and a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting with the ball rental unit 360 and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a rectangular two-piece connector. there is

The board box cover 875 of the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape that is open to the front side and has a size that substantially covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 . A pair of shaft portions 875a rotatably supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through hole 875b penetrating in the front-rear direction corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873, and forward from both left and right ends of the through hole 875b. and a locking piece 875d that is locked to the locking portion 871h of the board base 871 .

The board box cover 875 can open and close the rear surface of the board base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft parts 875a on the bearing parts 871g of the board base 871. there is Further, the board box cover 875 has a length such that the partition wall 875c on the side closer to the shaft part 875a (the side on which it is supported) extends to the rear surface of the board base 871, and the partition wall on the far side from the shaft part 875a. The length 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. As shown in FIG. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the partition walls 875c are substantially in contact with the board base 871 and the rear surface of the connection terminal board cover 873. It's like

In the terminal board box 870 of this example, the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a D-sub connector, so as shown in FIG. The body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is exposed to the outside even on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. FIG. The internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a rectangular two-piece connector, and as shown in the figure, is attached so that it can be fitted and connected from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, in the assembled state, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 extend in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. As shown in FIG. In the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c and inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the shaft portion 875a of the board box cover 875 are arranged. Since the barrier walls 875c on the sides are present, multiple layers of barriers are constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 is formed into a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, for example, even if an unauthorized tool having excellent flexibility is attempted to enter between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool will not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminals will not be bent. Intrusion of unauthorized tools from the direction along the surface of the plate 874 can be reliably prevented, and tampering with the CR unit connection terminals 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be reliably prevented. It has become.

In the terminal board box 870, the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 abuts the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, so that the CR unit attached as the CR unit connection terminal 874a can be connected. Even if a D-sub connector in which a gap is formed between the connection terminal plate 874 and the connection terminal plate 874 is used, the outer periphery of the exposed lead portion can be covered by the inner wall portion 873d, and fraud can be prevented. It's like

The terminal board box 870 has a board box cover 875 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the board base 871. A pair of shaft parts 875a are provided on the shaft part 875a side of the through hole 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a. A partition wall 875c is provided with a length that spans between them, and the partition box cover 875c can increase the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, the board box cover 875 can be prevented from being distorted and the formation of the gap can be prevented. It is designed to be expensive.

Furthermore, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminals 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection part 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, it is illegal to insert a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord while the wiring cord side connection terminal is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b that is a two-piece connector. Even so, the protection portion 873g and the substrate box cover 875 can prevent the electrode from being inserted, and can prevent tampering with the internal connection terminal 874b.

As described above, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 containing the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are connected from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an illegal tool is inserted through a gap or the like and the tip of the illegal tool enters the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the CR unit connection terminal board 874 accommodated. Thus, tampering with the CR unit connection terminal board 874 can be reliably prevented.

In addition, when the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in the terminal board box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board are in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 (back surface of the board). The projection 871e and the outer piece 871c of the base 871 extend along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 (the surface of the substrate). Since the partition wall 875c of the box cover 875 is present, a multi-layered defense wall is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. For example, even if an unauthorized tool with excellent flexibility is tried to enter between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate base 871 (boundary), the tool will not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal board will not bend. It is possible to reliably prevent unauthorized tools from entering from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and to reliably prevent unauthorized actions on the CR unit connection terminals 874a and the internal connection terminals 874b provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It can be a pachinko machine 1 capable of

In addition, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed between the CR unit connection terminal 874a and the substrate. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the inner wall 873d can cover the outer periphery of the exposed lead portion, thereby reliably preventing fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, one end of the terminal board box 870 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the board base 871 to cover the rear surface of the connection terminal board cover 873 so as to be able to open and close, and the opening 873b of the connection terminal board cover 873 is provided. A substrate box cover 875 having a plate-like barrier wall 875c extending forward from the pivotally supported side end of the through hole 875b corresponding to the substrate to the rear surface of the substrate base 871 is further provided. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted to form a gap between the portions of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported on the substrate base 871 to allow an unauthorized tool to enter, the barrier wall 875c prevents the unauthorized tool from entering the connection terminals. It is possible to prevent it from reaching the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) side and prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the board box cover 875 and then open the connection terminal plate cover 873, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It is possible to increase the deterrence against fraud. In addition, since the partition wall 875c can increase the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875, even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871 to form a gap, the board box cover 875 cannot be removed. can be prevented from being distorted to prevent the formation of gaps, making it difficult for fraudulent actions to be performed, thereby increasing deterrence.

Furthermore, even if an attempt is made to commit a fraudulent act of inserting a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector body and the wiring cord in the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, countermeasures will be taken. Since the rear side of the opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector body is covered with the protective portion 873g and the board box cover 875, the outside of the terminal board box 870 ( The needle-like electrode cannot be inserted into the gap of the connector body from the rear side), and it is possible to prevent tampering with the terminal of the connected wiring cord, and it has a high crime-prevention ability. can be

Further, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with a board holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall portion 873c extends forward beyond the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the circuit board base 871 to form a gap in order to commit fraud, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves rearward together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the connection terminal plate cover 873 does not change, and the outer circumference of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). can remain protected by the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the CR unit connection terminal 874a. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts aimed at etc.

Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is made of transparent resin, the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be seen from the outside. Is an unauthorized tool inserted into the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 housed inside? Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether electronic components (eg, ROM, IC, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like have been replaced with unauthorized ones. Therefore, it is possible to make the fraudulent act hesitant to carry out the fraudulent act, thereby enhancing the deterrence against the fraudulent act. can.

In addition, since the terminal board box 870 is mounted on the back side of the body frame 3 so that the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 etc. faces the rear side, it is possible to prevent the outer frame 2 from being damaged during maintenance or the like. When the body frame 3 is rotated forward and the rear side of the body frame 3 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like accommodated in the terminal board box 870 face the worker side (player side), and the CR Inspection of the unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like and the terminal board box 870 can be facilitated.

The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 in the board unit 800 are connected to the peripheral control section 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like, and the door frame. 5 for relaying connection with the handle device 500, each decorative substrate, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are provided with a plurality of connection terminals for connection to the body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side. By attaching to the attachment portion 813 , the connection terminals are directed forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 600 .

65 and 67, the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. In addition, through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face forward, and the wiring 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

In addition, the main relay terminal plate 880 includes the ball rental button 361, the return button 362, the remaining rental display portion 363, and the rotational position detection sensor of the handle device 500 of the ball rental unit 360 in the plate unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. 512, the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Further, the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 is connected to each of the decoration units 200, 240, and 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each of the decoration substrates 430 and 432 provided in the plate unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. It is for relaying the connection between the provided dial driving motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b, 432c and the peripheral control section 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 of the body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96. FIG. FIG. 94(A) is a front perspective view of the back cover of the body frame, and FIG. 94(B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover of the body frame. FIG. 95 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing the portion of the fastening mechanism on the back cover, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism on the back cover viewed from the rear side. The back cover 900 of this example is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the body frame 3 can be seen from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 .

The back cover 900 of the body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding opening 601 (the game board 4 attached to the body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 of the body frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed. . The back cover 900 includes a plate-like body portion 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding opening 601, a side portion 904 that extends forward from the right side of the body portion 902 when viewed from the front, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of shaft support pins 906 are arranged in a vertical direction and protrude downward and are supported by the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600, and prize balls are formed respectively at the upper and lower left side of the main body portion 902 when viewed from the front. Engaging pieces 908 that engage with the back cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780, and the back cover 900 near the engaging piece 908 on the lower side of the body frame. 3, and a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening so that it cannot be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction to the left side of the lower locking piece 923a in the body portion 902 of the back cover 900 when viewed from the rear. 921, a vertically elongated rectangular locking opening 922 which is arranged at a predetermined distance to the left side of the insertion hole 921 in a rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and locking which is elastically locked to the locking opening 922 from the rear side. A plate-like guide member 923 having a piece 923a on one end side and a horizontally long hole 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 on the other end side; A fastening member 924 having a male threaded portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921, and the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924 are attached so as to sandwich the guide member 923. A holding member 925 is provided. Note that the guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is made of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bendable.

Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is configured so that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is loosely fitted into the locking opening 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is locked within a predetermined range. It is designed to be able to roam around. In addition, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state in which the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. It can slide in the left-right direction and does not drop out of the long hole 923b. In this fastening mechanism 920, when the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked to the locking opening 922 of the main body 902 from the rear side, the fastening member 924 projects forward through the long hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924 a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the body portion 902 .

The back cover 900 of this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding opening 601 in the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the back cover supporting portion 623 of the main body frame base 600 with the pivot pin 906. By engaging the engagement piece 908 with the main body frame base 600 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780, the closed state can be achieved. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 of the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 are substantially aligned.

When the back cover 900 is closed, the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted into the insertion hole 921 from the rear side to the front side is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the tip of the male threaded portion 924a stops at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the body portion 902 of the back cover 900. FIG. By the way, in this example, the fastening member 924 is supported in the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 engaged with the body portion 902 of the back cover 900. The state of being located on the rear side of the body portion 902 is maintained.

Then, by inserting the tip of the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b from this state and rotating the fastening member 924, the male threaded portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. mated) so that the back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. In the fastening mechanism 920 of this example, when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, even if the guide member 923 supporting the fastening member 924 is slanted with respect to the main body portion 902, the fastening member 924 can be screwed. Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male threaded portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be smoothly inserted into the back cover fastening hole 780b. It is designed so that it can be screwed in.

In addition, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, the fastening member 924 at one place can be easily fastened and fastened. It is possible to release the back cover 900, thereby simplifying the time and effort involved in opening and closing the back cover 900 and improving maintainability.

The rear cover 900 also has a connection cutout portion 910 cut upward in a rectangular shape at the right lower end of the main body portion 902 when viewed from the front, and a confirmation opening which penetrates in a rectangular shape at the upper side of the connection cutout portion 910 when viewed from the front. 912 , and a confirmation notch 914 cut in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 5, the rear cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the main control input circuit 4100f of the main control board box 1170 on the game board 4 are connected through the connection notch 910. etc. are arranged to face the rear side. Also, the rear cover 900 has a board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 105) pasted on the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 facing rearward through an opening 912 for confirmation. A sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 faces through the notch portion 914 . As a result, without opening the back cover 900 with respect to the main body frame 3, it is possible to check the operation, appearance, management status, etc. of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100. FIG.

In addition, the back cover 900 has a plurality of elongated slits 916 penetrating through the body portion 902 and the side portion 904. Through these slits 916, the heat generated in the game board 4 and the like is transferred to the body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the rear outside. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through-holes 918 that are wide and elongated in the vertical direction are arranged in a line at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction at a position slightly left of the center in a front view. These through-holes 918 allow the back cover 900 to be closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 to be housed and held in the main body frame 3 . It is located behind the cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3252, so that the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be effectively removed. It can be exhausted. Incidentally, the width of the through-hole 918 is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through-hole 918 .

As a result, in this example, the fastening member 924 for fastening the back cover 900 closing the rear side of the game board 4 held by the body frame 3 to the body frame 3 is attached to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. Therefore, when the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to perform maintenance on the rear side of the game board 4 while the main body frame 3 holds the game board 4, Even if the fastening member 924 that fastens and fixes the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 does not move to the guide member 923. It is held by the back cover 900 via the back cover 900, and it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left behind in the pachinko machine 1, and the fastening member 924 is removed from the back cover 900. The pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from falling off.

In addition, as described above, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling out of the opened back cover 900, so that it is not necessary to store the unfastened fastening member 924 in a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. , can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

Further, since the long hole 923b of the guide member 923 extends at least to the side opposite to the locking opening 922, even if the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900, The male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be positioned straight through the insertion hole 921 of the rear cover 900 into the rear cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, and the male threaded portion 924a can be securely and properly inserted into the rear cover fastening hole 780b. can be concluded in Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

Furthermore, since the holding member 925 that cooperates with the head portion of the fastening member 924 to hold the fastening member 924 movably with respect to the guide member 923 is attached to the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head of the holding member 925 and the holding member 925, so that the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from slipping out of the long hole 923b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 The fastening member 924 can be movably held with respect to the guide member 923 by the gap and the long hole 923b.

In addition, the back cover 900 is provided with an accommodation recess that can accommodate the holding member around the insertion hole 921 , and the male threaded portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 is passed through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 to the back cover of the body frame 3 . When fastening to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be accommodated in the accommodation recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are tightly attached. The protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portions of the guide member 923 and the fastening member 924 is reduced, thereby reducing the occurrence of defects. You can do it and you can make it look better.

In addition, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female threaded portion and is screwed to the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it can be fastened by simply pulling it, compared to engagement by a simple locking claw. can be made difficult to remove the back cover 900, the crime-prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be enhanced, and the Pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraud can be provided.

Furthermore, since the guide member 923 is flexible and can be bent, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921) can be further increased. It is easy to position the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924 in a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the body frame 3, and to move the male threaded portion 924a straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b. The male screw portion 924a can be reliably fastened to the rear cover fastening hole 780b.

In addition, in a state in which the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 abuts along the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 of the locking opening 922 of the back cover 900, the locking opening is closed. Since it is elastically locked to 922, the tip end side (long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 attached movably is attached to the axis extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921. It can be moved so as to rotate around the center, and the locking piece 923 a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking opening 922 . Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 can be rotated to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the body frame 3. Therefore, the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening operation of the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

Further, a plurality of back cover engaging grooves 718, 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engaging grooves 718, 780a. By engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, fastening by the fastening member 924 is achieved. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the number of places to be fastened using the fastening member 924 is only one, and the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible. can enhance sexuality. In addition, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the body frame 3 by engaging the engaging pieces 908 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closing range is wide. Even with the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding opening 601 (the rear side of the game board 4) in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a good condition without increasing the fastening points by the fastening members 924. FIG.

Further, the back cover 900 can be rotatably supported with respect to the body frame 3 by allowing the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the body frame 3 (body frame base 600) to support the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. Since the rear cover 900 is rotated in the closing direction to close the rear side of the game board holding opening 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the rear cover 900 and the rear cover of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b through the insertion hole 921. As shown in FIG. Further, since the back cover 900 is rotatably supported with respect to the body frame 3, even if the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and the back cover 900 is opened during maintenance or the like, the back cover 900 can be opened. The cover 900 can be kept pivotally supported on the body frame 3, the back cover 900 does not need to be removed from the body frame 3, and labor for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[Side security board]
Next, the side security plate 950 of the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. As illustrated, the side security plate 950 of the body frame 3 forms the left side of the body frame 3 in front view, and is attached to the body frame base 600 . The side security plate 950 includes a metal body 952 extruded into a shallow U-shape in plan view, and mounting brackets 954 fixed above and below near the inner front end of the body 952 and attached to the front face of the body frame base 600 . , and a positioning member 956 that is fixed inside the main body 952 and engages with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4 .

A main body 952 of the side security plate 950 includes a side piece 952a that extends in the vertical direction by a length that is substantially the same as the height of the main body frame base 600, and that has a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction. a front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c arranged to form a predetermined gap behind the front end piece 952b and projecting less than the front end piece 952b; and a rear end piece 952d extending longer than the front end piece 952b in the right direction when viewed (see FIG. 112). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by a side piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d. The left side portion of the game panel 1150 when viewed from the front is inserted (see FIG. 112).

The side security plate 950 of this example has a mounting bracket 954 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and a rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 . When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 , the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 is attached to the support side reinforcement plate 152 of the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5 . It is designed to be inserted into the U-shaped protruding piece 166, and to prevent a tool for cheating from being inserted between the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side in front view. (See FIG. 112). The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of extruded metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and has a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and a Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 are increased, and the strength of the entire body frame 3 is increased so that the game board 4, the door frame 5, etc. can be well supported. It has become.

Thus, according to this example, when the front surface of the body frame 3 is closed by the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is positioned between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the side security plate 950. The rear piece of the support-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcement unit 150 is inserted (intruded), and the front end piece 952b is inserted into the support-side U-shape. Therefore, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened from the main body frame 3, the U-shaped protruding piece 166 on the pivot side of the door frame 5 does not touch the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the U-shaped projecting piece 166 on the pivot side of the door frame 5 from moving in the direction away from the body frame 3 by coming into contact with the door frame 5, and to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being prying open. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can prevent fraud such as opening the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3.例文帳に追加

In addition, since the side security plate 950 made of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcement unit 150 made of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted together, there is no gap between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. The strength and rigidity of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced by making it difficult for the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 to be distorted by an illegal tool. In addition, since the body frame base 600 that supports the game board 4 is made of synthetic resin, the side security plate 950 on the side that supports the door frame 5 (the pivot side) is made of metal. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced as compared with the case where the entire body frame 3 is made of metal.

Further, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 for locking the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 at one point between the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (opening side) are locked by the three door frame hooks 1041, the opening side is prevented from being tampered with by a crowbar or the like. It is possible to satisfactorily prevent the gap between the door frame 5 and the body frame 3 from widening even if the door frame 5 is gouged out by a strong tool, and to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly gouged open.

In addition, the rear end of the side piece 952a of the side crime prevention plate 950 is made to extend rearward from the front surface of the game board 4 (the game area 1100). Since the bending rigidity against the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the strength and rigidity of the entire side crime prevention plate 950 can be further increased, and the side crime prevention plate 950 can be prevented from being forcibly bent to prevent fraud. .

In addition, since the side crime prevention plate 950 of the body frame 3 is formed by extruded metal material, the side crime prevention plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined cross-sectional shape having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily manufactured. It is possible to suppress the increase in cost even if the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, and to prevent defects such as a decrease in strength that occur during processing compared to the case where the metal plate is bent. It can be reduced as much as possible, and the side security plate 950 can have high durability and strength.

[Lock device]
Next, the lock device 1000 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 to 101. FIG. FIG. 97(A) is a left side view of the lock device in the body frame, and (B) is a front perspective view of the lock device in the body frame. FIG. 98(A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 98(B) is a sliding rod for the glass door and a sliding rod for the body frame which are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base body of the lock device. , and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device as viewed from behind, and FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the glass door sliding rod and the body frame sliding rod in the lock device. and FIG. 101 are explanatory diagrams showing the operation of the anti-tampering member in the lock device.

The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached along the outer side surface of the opening side of the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 from substantially the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 2, a door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the right side (open side) of the front end frame part 602 in the main body frame base 600, a locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and a peripheral wall of the main body frame base 600 A plurality of lock mounting portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 97 to 99, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base having a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame lock slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001 . A sliding rod 1040, a main body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and a U-shaped structure to prevent unauthorized sliding of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base 1001 .

The U-shaped base body 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a main body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided therein. and are slidably arranged. The U-shaped base 1001 has a width dimension that is extremely thin as compared with a conventional lock device that is integrated into a base having an L-shaped cross section. As a result, the horizontal dimension of the lock device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding opening 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased, thereby increasing the game area. A wide game board 4 of 1100 can be provided.

The U-shaped substrate 1001 is attached with the open side of the U-shaped cross section facing the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the body frame base 600 . As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 are attached to the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is in a completely covered state, and has an anti-tampering structure that makes it difficult for the lock device 1000 to be tampered with from the outside.

The U-shaped substrate 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can pass through on the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002, a screwing portion 1003 protruding outward from the upper part of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 99) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side and a screwing portion 1003, and a screwing portion. Protrudes forward from the upper and middle portions of the open side (front side) of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 99) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the 1003 protrudes, and from the lower ends of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b on the open side. and a locking protrusion 1004 .

The screwed portion 1003 and locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base body 1001 are for attaching the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. and the lock engaging hole 621 from the rear side, and then moved upward, the screwed portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other, and the screwed portion 1003 is The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock mounting portion 625 through it.

The lock device 1000 is attached with screws not only at the upper and middle screw fastening portions 1003, but also at the screw fastening portions 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 described later and near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through-hole 611. The lock attachment portion 625 is also attached to the body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower portion of the lock device 1000 is also attached.

When the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the top, middle, and bottom of the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are attached to the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole at the top and middle. 621 to be positioned and locked, and the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. (Main body frame 3) can be firmly fixed.

In other words, even if the lock device 1000 is integrated into the U-shaped base body 1001 having an extremely thin width, the lock device 1000 is firmly attached to the body frame 3 by engaging and fixing the front and rear sides of the lock device 1000. can be fixed to In particular, in the case of this embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure (fixing structure may be used) on the front side protrudes from the side surface 1001a that does not come into contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure on the rear side protrudes toward the peripheral wall portion 605 from the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 which is in close contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, the locking structure on the front side is the peripheral wall portion 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the body frame 3 so as not to rattle, compared to the case where the lock device 1001 is formed on the side surface 1001b close to the lock.

The U-shaped substrate 1001 has insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction in the upper, middle and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and crimping it in a state where the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is housed, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are installed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 . can be mounted so as to be vertically slidable.

That is, as shown in FIG. 98(C), the rivets 1006 are passed through the upper ends of the rivet elongated holes 1042 formed in the three upper, middle, and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower ends of the elongated rivet holes 1055 and 1061 respectively formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 . The door frame sliding lever 1040 can be moved upward, and the main body frame sliding lever 1050 can be moved downward.

Further, the U-shaped substrate 1001 protrudes laterally from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the body frame base 600 on the open side, and from the anti-tamper notch portion 1007 formed on the closed side surface of the lower portion of the U-shaped substrate 1001. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010, and a vertical insertion opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief horizontal hole 1022 are formed in the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. Although the details will be described later, the tamper-preventing notch 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001 is such that the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-preventing member 1023 advances and retreats. The lock mounting piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is positioned below the lower edge of the game board holding opening 601 when the lock device 1000 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame base 600. A lock insertion hole 1009 protrudes laterally from the front end portion, through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and a mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting base plate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 for mounting with a screw 1012 at two upper and lower positions. A mounting hole 1014 drilled in and a screw portion 1003 drilled for mounting the lower portion of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the body frame 3 are formed.

The U-shaped base body 1001 also has an insertion vertical opening 1020 into which the first engaging protrusion 1017 and the second engaging protrusion 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. , a spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 that urges the second tamper-proof member 1032 upward, and a side relief hole 1022 that forms a relief hole so as not to hinder the movement of the connecting pin 1034, It has

The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped base 1001 . This cylinder lock 1010 has a lock mounting base plate 1011 fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body for mounting to a lock mounting piece 1008, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting base plate 1011. An engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 with a screw 1019 . The engaging cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side is a first engaging projecting piece 1017 that engages with the downward engaging hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engaging protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engaging hole 1045 of the sliding lever 1040 for the door frame during rotation.

This cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in a lock mounting piece 1008 from the rear side, and mounting holes 1013 formed in two upper and lower portions of a lock mounting base plate 1011 . The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 .

The anti-tampering members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base body 1001 of the lock device 1000 are designed to prevent the cylinder lock 1010 from being rotated by an official key, and to be used, for example, by a piano wire or a wire to tamper with the body frame slide rod 1050. to prevent it from dropping. These anti-tampering members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first anti-tampering member 1023 and a second anti-tampering member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034, as shown in FIG. The first tamper-proof member 1023 has a vertically long plate-like shape and is supported by the U-shaped base 1001 so as to be capable of swinging around a swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. Specifically, the first tamper-proof member 1023, through its swing shaft hole 1025, is the most movable together with the door frame sliding lever 1040 and the main body frame sliding lever 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped base body 1001. It is attached by lower insertion holes 1005 and rivets 1006 .

In addition, the first tamper-proof member 1023 has a vertically long opening at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 on its plate-like surface so that the second engaging protrusion 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 can be inserted. It has a projecting piece inserting hole 1026 which has been shaped. The second engaging projection 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 penetrates the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 and the vertical insertion opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 is moved. The rising engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement projecting piece 1018 are engaged with each other. In addition, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is provided on the front obliquely upper outer edge of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 so as to be able to come into contact with the rear side of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates. When the engaging cam 1016 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging projection piece 1017, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 moves around the swing shaft hole 1025. 101(B) in the clockwise direction).

Furthermore, the first tamper-proof member 1023 includes a stopper piece 1027 projecting toward the U-shaped base 1001 from the oblique rear lower outer edge of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026, and further from the position where the stopper piece 1027 projects. It has a regulating projection piece 1031 protruding downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 arranged vertically through the front side of the regulating projection piece 1031 in the horizontal direction. The stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engaging notch 1066 of the main body frame sliding lever 1050 when locking the main body frame sliding lever 1050. Thus, the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from illicitly sliding. In addition, the regulating protrusion 1031 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 contacts the second tamper-proof member 1032 urged upward by the spring 1035, so that the second tamper-proof member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). Movement can be regulated.

Further, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first tamper-proof member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with the oblong opening formed at the lowest end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. can be done. Furthermore, the connecting hole 1030 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is for rotatably connecting the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 with a connecting pin 1034 .

On the other hand, the second anti-tampering member 1032 connected to the first anti-tampering member 1023 is formed of an inverted "T"-shaped plate material, and has a connecting hole 1033 at one end of its upper portion and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other end of its upper portion. , and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end. The second anti-tampering member 1032 can be relatively rotatably connected to the first anti-tampering member 1023 by aligning the connecting hole 1033 with the connecting hole 1030 of the first anti-tampering member 1023 and inserting the connecting pin 1034. It is possible. Also, the second tamper-proof member 1032 locks the lower end (other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked by the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036 . Thus, the spring 1035 urges it upward. Furthermore, the contact portion 1037 of the second tamper-proof member 1032 contacts the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the body frame 3 is closed.

Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate member. This door-frame sliding rod 1040 has door-frame hook portions 1041 projecting forward at three locations, upper, middle and lower, on one vertical side. The door-frame hook portion 1041 of the door-frame sliding rod 1040 projects forward from the open side of the U-shaped substrate 1001 when the door-frame sliding rod 1040 is housed in the U-shaped substrate 1001 . When the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, it protrudes forward from the door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 67 and 72) formed in the main body frame base 600, A hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the frame 5 can be engaged. The door-frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the figure, so that the door-frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover can be engaged by lifting the door-frame sliding rod 1040 . 165 can be released.

In addition, the door frame sliding rod 1040 has a vertically elongated rivet hole 1042 drilled in the center of the upper, middle and lower side surfaces and through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, and a lowermost rivet hole 1042 and door frame sliding rod 1040 . The lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040 is provided with a guide projecting piece 1043 projecting in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 . The rivet slot 1042 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is adapted to receive the rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001, and the rivet 1006 is inserted into the door frame sliding rod. It is formed vertically so as not to interfere with the upward motion of the rod 1040 . In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end portion of the rivet elongated hole 1042 is in contact. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is arranged so that the guide projection piece 1043 is inserted into the projection moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 . , so that it is possible to guide the mutual sliding motion between the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 .

A spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of a spring 1048 is formed at the upper end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040 . The other end of the spring 1048 engaged with the spring hook portion 1046 is engaged with the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the spring 1048 allows the door frame to slide. The rod 1040 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is biased upward. Further, the door frame sliding lever 1040 is provided with a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle of the vertical direction, and is pressed out from one side surface of the door frame sliding lever 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 contacts the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001 and can suppress the door frame sliding rod 1040 from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001 . It's like

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 has a vertically elongated play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. This play hole 1044 is formed at the tip of the first engaging protrusion 1017 so as not to interfere with the rotation of the engaging cam 1016 when the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space in which the part can move. In addition, the rising engagement hole 1045 is designed so that when the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation of the engagement cam 1016 . for engaging the The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 vertically larger than the tampering prevention notch 1007 at the rear of the lower part of the vertical side. The relief notch 1049 is provided so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first anti-tampering member 1023 can be reliably engaged with the anti-tampering notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 is in the way. The corresponding part is notched so that it will not be.

On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting rod 1053 that connects the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, It has In other words, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of a single vertically elongated metal plate as in the conventional art, but an upper hook member 1051 having hook portions 1054 and 1065 and a lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by pressing, and an upper hook member 1051 and a lower hook member 1052 made of metal are connected by a thin metal connecting rod 1053 . As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently accommodated in the narrow space of the U-shaped substrate 1001 .

The upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 has a hook portion 1054 formed toward the rear at the upper end portion, and a long rivet hole 1055 penetrating in the left-right direction through the plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054 . , a projecting piece moving hole 1056 penetrating in the horizontal direction below the long hole 1055 for rivet, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the front vertical side of the projecting piece moving hole 1056, and the lower side of the spring hook portion 1057 and contact portions 1059 formed on the upper and lower sides of the upper hook member 1051 . The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates through the hook through opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper inner side of the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw portion is formed upward.

The rivet elongated hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end of the rivet slot 1055 so that the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to receive the guide projecting piece 1043 above the sliding lever 1040 for the door frame. 1050 and mutual movement can be guided.

The other end of the spring 1048 is engaged with the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 . Further, the upper end of the connecting rod 1053 is bent and inserted into the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 . Further, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 contacts the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is accommodated in the U-shaped base 1001. It can slide smoothly without rattling.

On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1065 projecting rearward from the lower end portion, and a rivet portion penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052 . a slotted hole 1061, a descending engagement hole 1062 arranged below the slotted rivet hole 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the descending engagement hole 1062, and below the play hole 1063 A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 drilled in the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement hole formed in the lower portion of the rear vertical side of the lower hook member 1052. A notch portion 1066 and contact portions 1067 formed on the upper and lower sides of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 passes through the hook through-opening 1002 below the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed on the inner lower portion of the open side of the outer frame 2. , and a locking claw portion is formed upward. The rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which the rivet 1006 is passed through, the rivet 1006 passes through the lowermost end of the rivet elongated hole 1061 . This allows the lower hook member 1052 to move downward.

Further, when the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted into the downward engaging hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and is rotated, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotating operation. It is intended to engage as Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is designed so that when the second engaging protrusion 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the second engaging protrusion 1018 does not interfere with the rotating operation. can form a movable space. Further, the projecting piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052 is adapted to receive the guide projecting piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1040 are connected to each other. Mutual movement with the movable rod 1050 can be guided.

Further, the bent lower end of the connecting rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052 . Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped substrate 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped substrate 1001 . When the hook member 1052 slides, it can slide smoothly without play.

Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described. In order to assemble this lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding lever 1050 are connected by the connecting rod 1053, and in this state, the guide protrusion of the door frame sliding lever 1040 is connected. The piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet elongated holes 1042 and rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook through-opening 1002 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 in a superimposed state, while sliding the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame. After inserting the sliding rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped substrate 1001 , the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005 .

When inserting this rivet 1006 , the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet slots 1055 , 1061 , 1042 . When inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first anti-tampering member 1023 to attach the first anti-tampering member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001 at the same time. In addition, before attaching the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are connected with a connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the pin hole. 1029 is fixed with a screw (not shown), and then the guide pin 1028 must be inserted into the lowermost opening of the vertical insertion opening 1020 .

Furthermore, with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 by the rivets 1006, the spring 1048 is stretched between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057 to move the door. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in mutually opposite directions, and furthermore, the spring 1035 is hung between the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 for the second fraud prevention. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the restricting projecting piece 1031 . After that, the cylindrical body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock mounting piece 1008 and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the mounting hole 1014 with the screw 1012 . At this time, the tip of the first engaging projection 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the vertical insertion opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024, and the second engaging projection of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock mounting piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 and the vertical insertion opening 1020 of the first anti-tampering member 1023 .

In order to attach the assembled lock device 1000 to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 in this manner, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding lever 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting, the locking projection 1004 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in this state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is removed. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the body frame base 600 by aligning it with the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing screws (not shown) into the aligned holes. In particular, in the case of this embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed on the side surface 1001a of the U-shaped base 1001 not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screwed portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 which is in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, the locking structure at the front portion is in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 without rattling, compared to the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b.

Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101. FIG. As shown in FIG. 100, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the door frame 5 are engaged. The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the vertical insertion opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 engages with the downward engaging hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to push down the lower hook member 1052 against the urging force of the spring 1048 and connect with it. The connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. As a result, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the main body frame 3 is pulled forward to remove the main body frame 3. It can be opened to the frame 2.

When the body frame 3 is closed, the hooks 1054 and 1065 are raised by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (same raised position as shown in FIG. 100A). , 1065 are inclined downward toward the outside, the body frame 3 is forcibly pressed against the outer frame 2 so that the upper inclined portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are inclined downward from the closing plates 24 and 25. Since it abuts against the lower end, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the upward claws of the hooks 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are engaged again. The rod 1050 is raised to return to the locked state.

On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the vertical insertion opening 1020, the second The tip of the two engagement projecting piece 1018 engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upward against the biasing force of the spring 1048 . As a result, the locked state between the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is released. It can be opened with respect to the body frame 3 .

When closing the door frame 5, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as shown in FIG. 100(A)). Since the lower side of the door frame hook portion 1041 is inclined upward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the lower side inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 is inclined toward the hook cover 165. The door-frame sliding rod 1040 comes into contact with the upper end and rises upward, and furthermore, the downward claw portion of the door-frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 engage again, and the door-frame slide The movable rod 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 in this embodiment is formed to have a length substantially equal to the overall length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 extends approximately along the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is attached over the entire length, and the door frame hook portion 1041 which is the engaging portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations, namely, the upper end portion, the central portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040 . Therefore, the door frame 5 and the body frame 3 can be securely locked over the entire length in the vertical direction. It has become incapable of performing an act.

As described above, the locking device 1000 for the door frame 5 of the present embodiment unlocks the body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 by turning the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and locks the body frame 3 in the other direction. By rotating, the locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 can be released. Further, the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment is designed so that a piano wire or the like is hooked on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 and the hook is lowered. is not possible. The first structure to prevent such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is the U-shaped substrate 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space.

First, the operation of the locking mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the outer frame 2 and the body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. It is in a state of In this state, the biasing force of the spring 1035 rotates the first anti-tampering member 1023 counterclockwise, causing the stopper piece 1027 to enter the anti-tampering notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 to move into the anti-tampering notch. It is engaged with the engagement notch 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 at the position corresponding to 1007 . As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked on the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and an attempt is made to pull it down, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be pulled down because the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engaging notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) is disabled, and the unauthorized act of opening the body frame 3 cannot be performed.

On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 to unlock the body frame 3 normally, the first engagement projection of the engagement cam 1016 is caused by rotating the key as shown in FIG. 101(B). Piece 1017 is pivoted to enter into longitudinal insertion opening 1020 . When the first engagement protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 abut against each other. It starts to rotate clockwise around 1025 , and the stopper piece 1027 also moves away from the tamper prevention notch 1007 . As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 is released. At this time, the second tamper-proof member 1032 is at a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engaging cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engaging projecting piece 1017 as well, the tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 is engaged with the downward engaging hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. As a result, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 are released from the locked state, and the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2. You can do it.

When the body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second tamper-proof member 1032 is in contact with the regulation projecting piece 1031, so the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1023 are in contact with each other. 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. 101(A). When the body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second tamper-proof member 1032 come into front contact with each other, finally resulting in the state shown in FIG. 101(A). As a result, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 do not get in the way when the body frame 3 is closed. In this embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 only prevent the body frame sliding lever 1050 from being illegally lowered because the main body If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to illegally raise the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like. For this reason, it is devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 .

Further, even with the locking mechanism, which is the first anti-tampering structure, it may be impossible to disable the function of the locking mechanism by swinging the first anti-tampering member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. do not have. Therefore, assuming that the locking function of the locking mechanism is disabled by an illegal act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the internal The sliding lever 1040 for the door frame and the sliding lever 1050 for the main body frame, except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065, are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped substrate 1001 and completely covered. In this state, even if a piano wire or the like is inserted to pull down the sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped substrate 1001, both sides 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped substrate 1001 will not move. Since the entry of unauthorized tools into the closed space is prevented by the structure, unauthorized actions cannot be easily carried out.

Thus, in the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is placed inside the U-shaped base 1001, which is extremely thin compared to the conventional lock device in which the width dimension is integrated into the L-shaped base. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the lock device 1000 to the U-shaped substrate 1001 is set below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is made extremely large and the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame 3 is enlarged, the lock device 1000 can be firmly attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. can be installed.

In addition, since the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped substrate 1001 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the inside The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065. , a piano wire or the like cannot be inserted to pull down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside.

When the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three positions, upper, middle and lower, on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. , and the screwing portions 1003 formed at three locations, upper, middle and lower, on the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws, which makes the structure extremely simple. With such a structure, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the body frame 3 (body frame base 600).

In addition, in the lock device 1000 of this example, a screwing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 and near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the body frame 3 Although a structure is shown in which the formed lock mounting portion 625 is screwed, instead of this, a screw 1012 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock mounting piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is used for lock mounting. A structure in which lock mounting holes to be screwed through the piece 1008 are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611 may be employed. Further, even if the lower part of the U-shaped base body 1001 is not screwed, the lock device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame) only by fixing the rear portion of the lock device 1000 with the screwed portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625. It can be sufficiently firmly fixed to the back surface of the base 600).

In the lock device 1000 of this example, the door frame sliding lever 1040 and the main body frame sliding lever 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped substrate 1001 having left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably attached to the side surface 1001a on the opposite side not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with rivets or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. An L-shaped base (lock base) is used, and a door frame sliding lever 1040 and a body frame sliding lever 1050 are placed in a closed space formed by a side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base (lock base) and a peripheral wall portion 605. A storage structure may be used, and the same effects as those of the lock device 1000 described above can be obtained.

As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present example, the transparent prize sphere base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (forward and backward) on the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize sphere base 710 A prize ball tank 720 for storing game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the rear wall portion of the prize ball base 710 for aligning the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 A transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of 710b, and a rear wall portion of the prize ball base 710 for dispensing game balls released from the tank rail unit 730 to the upper tray 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined dispensing instruction. A partially transparent prize ball device 740 attached to the rear side of 710b and a side portion 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600 are provided, and the rear surface is approximately the rear surface of the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. Since it has a transparent back cover 900 arranged on the same plane, the rear side of the game board 4 held in the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. A Pachinko machine 1 capable of visually checking the rear side of the game board 4 and easily inspecting the rear side of the game board 4 (visual inspection) without opening a back cover 900 covering the rear side of the game board 4.例文帳に追加can do.

In addition, since not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the game board holding opening of the main body frame base 600 When the game board 4 is attached to and detached from the front side of the game board 601, even if tools such as screwdrivers and pliers, cleaning rags, dust, etc. remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, they are removed from the outside. It can be easily found from the inside, and it is possible to prevent any trouble caused by the residue.

Furthermore, as described above, since the rear surface and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the outside, it is possible to attach illegal devices, tools, etc. to the rear side or side surface of the game board 4 for cheating. Even if it is installed, it can be easily discovered, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts, and it is possible to easily find fraudulent devices attached to the game board 4 from the outside. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly deterrent to fraudulent actions by making the player hesitate to install an illegal device or the like.

In addition, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed may come into contact with the game board 4, or the game board 4 may be damaged. It is possible to prevent foreign substances such as dirt and dust from adhering to the rear side of the board, maintain the game board 4 in a good state, and suppress the occurrence of defects.

In addition, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position approximately twice as deep from the front end of the main body frame base 600 as the depth D of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is set to about half the depth of the body frame 3, the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., and the above-described effects are reliably achieved. be able to. In addition, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is approximately half the depth of the main body frame 3, the height of the main body frame base 600 when laid down can be lowered as much as possible to form a flat shape. , It is possible to facilitate the installation work of attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

Furthermore, the rear surface of the transparent back cover 900 (body portion 902) is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be formed into a substantially flat surface, and by eliminating rearward projections, it is possible to prevent the machine from being caught or abutted by other members in the installed island facility. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring by preventing them. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, it is possible to use cushioning materials with a simple shape and to increase the stacking efficiency (storage efficiency). The cost associated with the machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. 4 and the like can be made easier to see, and the above-described effects can be reliably exhibited. Also, even if the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, the heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 of the back cover 900 and the like. , It is possible to prevent the heat from the game board 4 from accumulating, and to suppress the occurrence of problems such as unstable control related to the game due to heat and deformation of members such as synthetic resin. be able to. Furthermore, since the slits 916 and the through holes 918 of the back cover 900 are sized such that game balls cannot pass through, for example, even if a game ball spills to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, it will pass through the slit 916 and the like. Intrusion of game balls into the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented, and trouble caused by the intrusion of game balls can be prevented.

[Basic configuration of the game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 111. FIG. FIG. 102 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame removed from the pachinko machine. 103 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the game board viewed from the front, and FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the game board viewed from the rear. It is a diagram. Further, FIG. 106(A) is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit on the game board in a state of being attached to the pachinko machine, and (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

107 is an exploded front perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 104, etc., and FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. Also, FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel of the game board of FIG. 107 cut in the vertical direction. Further, FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using front structural members of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 107 and the like, viewed from the front, and FIG. is an exploded perspective view of the.

As shown in the figure, the game board 4 of this embodiment has a front configuration in which the outer periphery of a game area 1100 into which game balls are hit by a player operating a handle device 500 is defined, and the external shape is substantially rectangular in front. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 arranged on the rear side of the front component member 1110 and defining the rear end of the game area 1100, a substrate holder 1160 arranged on the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a substrate holder 1160. A main control board box 1170 which is attached to the rear surface and houses a main control board 4100 which controls the contents of games performed by hitting game balls into the game area 1100, and a predetermined control board based on the control signal from the main control board 4100 A function display unit 1180 which can display a game situation and is attached to a predetermined position of the front structural member 1110 so as to be visible to the player side is provided. The game board 4 further includes a front unit attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, although the illustrations in FIGS. 102 to 109 are omitted and the details will be described later. (See FIGS. 113, 116, etc.).

The game board 4 of this embodiment has a basic configuration formed by a front structural member 1110, a game panel 1150, a board holder 1160, a main control board box 1170, and a function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. A detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4) is formed by the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170. Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[Front component]
Next, the front constituent member 1110 of the game board 4 will be described. The front structural member 1110 of the game board 4 of this embodiment has a substantially rectangular outer shape that can be inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The outer periphery of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1110 includes an outer rail 1111 extending in an arc shape clockwise from the lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in the front view, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending obliquely to the upper right. An inner rail 1112 that is arranged inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc from the lower center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left diagonally when viewed from the front, and the inner rail 1112 smoothly continues from the lower end of the inner rail 1112. An inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the terminal end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise in front view, the terminal end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111 The end (upper end) of the game area 1100 is connected to the boundary part between the impact part 1114, which can be contacted by the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111, and the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113. Out port guide surface 1115 arranged at the lowest end and lowered toward the rear, and the upper end of inner rail 1112 are rotatably pivotally supported, and from the upper end of inner rail 1112 so as to close the space between outer rail 1111 and outer rail 1111 . It is rotatable only between the closed position extending upward and the open position in which it rotates clockwise in front view to open the space between the outer rail 1111 and returns to the closed position side. and a backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring (not shown).

When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front structural member 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, as shown in FIG. It is intended to be positioned on an extension of launch rail 660 in device 650 . Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the shooting rail 660, a space is formed that expands in the left-right direction and downward, and a game ball shot out along the shooting rail 660 of the hitting ball shooting device 650 is released. , jumps over the space and is driven into between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 . A game ball struck between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to its momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 , and by rotating it to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to enter the game area 1100 .

Also, when the game ball is hit hard by the hitting ball launching device 650, the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111 within the game area 1100 is arranged so as to abut against the impact portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. When the game ball comes into contact with the impinging portion 1114, the rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed, and the game ball rolls continuously from the outer rail 1111 to the inner peripheral rail 1113. It is designed to prevent it from moving. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered (hit) into the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, it returns to the closed position by the biasing force of the backflow prevention member 1116 before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

In addition, the game ball driven into the game area 1100 flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100 when it is not received by the starting ports 2101, 2102, winning openings 2103, 2104, 2201, etc. of the table unit 2000 described later. Then, it is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guide surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and is discharged from the out port 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. ing.

On the other hand, if the game ball shot from the hitting ball shooting device 650 cannot cross the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112 and enter the game area 1100, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 It rolls downward in the opposite direction between the two, and from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111. The ball falls, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located in the lower part of the foul space 626, and is discharged to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300.

A metal plate is attached to the surface of the outer rail 1111 of the front component member 1110, which enhances wear resistance due to the rolling of the game ball and allows the game ball to roll smoothly. ing. In addition, the impact portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin arranged on the surface thereof, so that even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides with it, the impact can be alleviated. and the game ball can be rebounded inward.

In addition, the front component 1110 includes a wall-shaped crime prevention projection 1117 protruding forward from the outside of the lower portion of the outer rail 1111, and an approximately central portion in the vertical direction along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from the lower side of the out-port guide surface 1115. and a groove-shaped rail crime prevention groove 1118 recessed by a predetermined amount from the front end extending to the front end. The crime prevention projection 1117 on the front component member 1110 is arranged so as to vertically overlap the crime prevention rear end projection 183 of the security cover 180 on the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 . As a result, even if a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire enters from between the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot side (left side in front view), the fraudulent tool can reach the game area 1100. is not possible.

Further, in the front component member 1110 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the crime prevention rear projecting piece 182 of the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118. In addition, the security rear protrusion 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer side of the inner rail 1112 (the side opposite to the play area 1100). Thus, even with the inner rail 1112, the rail crime prevention groove 1118, and the crime prevention rear projecting piece 182, it is possible to prevent unauthorized devices such as piano wire, etc., entering from between the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 from reaching the game area 1100. can be prevented.

In addition, the front structural member 1110 has a pair of positioning recesses 1119 which are arranged apart in the vertical direction at the left end when viewed from the front, are recessed from the front to the rear and are open at the left end, and are vertically spaced at the right end when viewed from the front. a pair of game board stoppers 1120 arranged in a row, a fixed recess 1121 arranged on the left side of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 in front view and opened downward and recessed from the front side with the upper side formed in an arc shape, and a front view A notch 1122 for ball passage is provided in the vicinity of the left end of the lower end and is cut out in a rectangular shape extending upward from the lower end in the left-right direction. The positioning recess 1119 of the front structural member 1110 is fitted with a positioning member 956 attached to the inner side of the side crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3, so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding opening 601 when viewed from the front. can be restricted from moving forward and backward. The game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 can be attached to the game board. By being locked by the locking portion 608, the front-view right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving forward and backward. .

In addition, the fixing concave portion 1121 of the front component member 1110 has a game board fixture 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3 when viewed from the front. When it is turned clockwise, the fixing piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the game board fixture 690 restricts the lower end of the game board 4 from moving forward. It's like In addition, a ball passage notch 1152 is formed at the same position on the game panel 1150 as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front structural member 1110 , and the game board 4 is held by the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3 . The front end of the full-tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the cutouts 1122 and 1152 for the ball passage when it is inserted into the ball passage.

Further, the front component member 1110 has a horizontally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction near the right end in the front view of the lower end, and a front-rear direction thickness at a position on the lower side of the through hole 1123 from the center in the left-right direction to the left in the front view. A fastening portion 1124 formed to have a small thickness, and a certificate stamp pasting portion 1125 arranged on the left side of the through hole 1123 in front view and for sticking a certificate stamp for confirmation of certification are provided. The fastening portion 1124 in the front component member 1110 is not shown in detail, but when the game board is attached to the previous body frame, a predetermined fastening band is attached to the fastening hole formed in the previous body frame. The game board 4 can be made difficult to remove by winding and tightening each other, and illegal removal of the game board 4 can be prevented.

Further, the front structural member 1110 is provided with a display section 1181 of a function display unit 1180, which will be described later, outside the rail crime prevention groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and at the bottom right in the front view. The front structural member 1110 also includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning projections 1127 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112 . This mounting boss 1126 passes through the game panel 1150 and engages with a fixed boss 1162 of the board holder 1160. A predetermined screw is screwed from the rear side of the board holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162 to the mounting boss 1126. By wearing the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160, the game panel 1150 can be sandwiched. Also, the positioning protrusion 1127 can be fitted into an inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 so that the inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position of the game panel 1150 .

[Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 on the game board 4 will be explained. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood board material such as plywood plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and has substantially the same outer shape as the front structural member 1110 . This game panel 1150 has an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 of the front structural member 1110 at the lower part in the left-right direction of the front view, and an out port 1151 extending in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end in the front view. A ball passage notch 1152 that penetrates through and opens downward and has the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front structural member 1110, and a rear projection of the function display unit 1180 that penetrates in the front-back direction at the lower right corner in front view. and an insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted.

In addition, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front structural member 1110 near both left and right ends of the lower portion, and the positioning projections 1127 of the front structural member 1110 are inserted and fixed. and a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155, and a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1156 that is recessed forward by a predetermined amount from the rear surface on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and that is open downward at the lower end side (see FIG. 105). and a notch 1157 which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front structural member 1110 and penetrates in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. In addition, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front structural member 1110 at appropriate positions.

The game panel 1150 in the game board 4 of this example can divide the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is defined by the front component 1110, and within the range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface, A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are to be implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the front unit 2000 is to be attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150 . In addition, the game panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is positioned at the lowest end of the game area 1100, and is formed at the lowest end of the game area 1100 in the front constituent member 1110 when assembled on the game board 4. The game ball guided backward by the out-port guide surface 1115 thus formed enters the out-port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.例文帳に追加

[Substrate holder]
Next, the board holder 1160 on the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open top and front. This substrate holder 1160 has an out-ball discharging portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion substantially in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. It is formed so as to be lowered toward the discharge portion 1161, and the game balls discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit and the rear unit, and supplied (discharged) to the bottom upper surface of the substrate holder 1160 are The ball is discharged downward from the out-ball discharge portion 1161 . In addition, when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 , the out-ball discharging part 1161 is positioned directly above the discharged ball receiving part 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 . All the game balls discharged from the board unit 800 are discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800.例文帳に追加

The substrate holder 1160 also has a plurality of fixed bosses 1162 projecting forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 have their tips inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 1520, and are fitted with the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110. In a state where the bosses 1126 are engaged, predetermined screws are screwed into the mounting bosses 1126 through the fixed bosses 1162 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 , thereby attaching the substrate holder 1160 to the front component member 1110 . As well as being able to be assembled, the game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component member 1110 and the board holder 1160 .

As shown in FIG. 105, the substrate holder 1160 has a fixing portion 1163 in which a fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the lateral side to the left end portion of the rear surface of the rear wall portion when viewed from the rear, and a fixing portion 1163 and an engaging portion 1164 capable of engaging the elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 from behind. The fixing portion 1163 and locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 allow the main control substrate box 1170 to be detachably supported on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 .

[Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 on the game board 4 will be explained. The main control board box 1170 includes a board base 1171 in the shape of a thin oblong box with an open rear side, and a thin oblong box shape with an open front side that covers the rear surface of the board base 1171 and is fitted into the inside of the board base 1171 from the rear side. and a main control board 4100 on which electronic components, terminals, etc. are mounted on the front end of the board cover 1172 on the rear surface side. In addition, the main control board box 1170 has a fixed piece 1174 extending outward from the left end of the board base 1171 in the rear view and fitted with the fixed part 1163 of the board holder 1160, and a board cover 1172 extending from the right end of the board cover 1172 in the rear view. and an elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 .

Also, as shown in FIG. 105, etc., the main control board box 1170 is arranged two by two on the right side in a rear view with an elastic fixing piece 1175 interposed therebetween, and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible seal 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) applied across the substrate base 1171 and substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal covering the surface of the hermetic seal. A protective cover 1177 and a substrate management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 1172 are provided. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation/cutting portion 863 of the dispensing control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and is fixed by caulking at any one of the four sealing portions 1176. It is In order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 of the main control board box 1170, it is necessary to cut the sealing part 1176 fixed by caulking. It's becoming As a result, whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been illegally opened can be clearly determined visually from the outside.

In addition, since four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided in this example, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed three times. Further, in the main control board box 1170 of this example, a sealing seal is attached across the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, and the sealing seal is cut when the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated. It must be peeled off, and even this seal leaves traces of opening and closing. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally remodeled or replaced with an illegal main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program, etc.). However, it is possible to visually check from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such fraudulent acts.

The main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating the board cover 1172 in the front-rear direction. , various connection terminals and the like for connecting with the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like face the rear side. By connecting a predetermined measuring instrument to the main control input circuit 4100f facing from the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the sealing part 1176 and the hermetic seal are skillfully worked, it is possible to confirm whether or not the main control board 4100 is illegally modified other than visually. You can do it.

[Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 on the game board 4 will be explained. The function display unit 1180 is attached to a predetermined position of the front structural member 1110. A display unit 1181 is arranged on the front surface of the front structural member 1110 so as to be visible from the player side. and a rear protrusion 1182 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface.

On the display section 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown enlarged in FIG. A game state indicator 1183 consisting of one LED for playing, and two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the game state indicator 1183 to display the number of reservations related to the reception of game balls to the first start port 2101. For the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the first special symbol lottery result (first A special lottery result) is arranged as a first special symbol, and a first special symbol indicator 1185 consisting of one 7-segment LED, and a second starting port 2102 arranged diagonally above the first special symbol indicator 1185. A second special symbol display device 1186 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the lottery result (second special lottery result) of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball (second special lottery result) as the second special symbol, A second special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of game balls to the second start port 2102 consisting of two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the two special symbol display 1186 ing.

In addition, on the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180, the number of reservations related to the passage of the normal pattern gate 2301 by the game ball is arranged in an arc substantially along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the second special pattern display 1186 A normal pattern memory display 1188 consisting of four LEDs for displaying a normal pattern storage display, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball through a normal pattern gate 2301 arranged below the normal pattern memory display is displayed in a normal pattern. A normal symbol display device 1189 consisting of one LED for displaying and a normal symbol storage display device 1188 are arranged side by side diagonally on the upper right side, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "jackpot (condition device is A round indicator 1190 consisting of two LEDs is provided for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the big prize opening 2103 at the time of "operating hit".

The gaming state indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange. Depending on the combination, it is possible to display various game states (for example, probability fluctuation state, time reduction state, probability variable time reduction game state, jackpot game state, etc.). In this embodiment, at least the probability variation state, the time reduction state, and the right-handed game state are configured to be displayed. In particular, in this embodiment, a game state in which it is advantageous for the player to shoot a game ball into the game area 1100 on the left side of the center role 2500 (so-called “left hitting”), and a game state on the right side of the center role 2500 Since there is a mixed game state in which the player is advantageous if the game ball is shot (so-called "right hit") into the area 1100, the timing of "right hit" is clearly notified and displayed to the player. As a result, even a game beginner can smoothly switch the method of hitting (hitting operation) with the transition of the game state without making a mistake between "left hitting" and "right hitting".

The gaming state display 1183 is not limited to one color LED, and may be composed of a plurality of LED groups or 7-segment LEDs. Any configuration is acceptable as long as it allows the player to easily grasp the current game state, particularly whether the game state should be right-handed, when the player moves his or her line of sight to the game state display 1183 during the game.

In addition, the function display unit 1180 is controlled by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. This control signal is transmitted to the peripheral control section 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010, which will be described later, and displayed to the player on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is preferable to report "Right shot". Normally, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is arranged in the front view of the player (beyond the front line of sight). The player can switch to an appropriate hitting method (hitting operation) without moving.

Also, the first special symbol storage display 1184 in the function display unit 1180, when the first special symbol display 1185 can not variably display the first special symbol, the game ball is accepted to the first start port 2101. In the case, it displays the pending number (memory number) of the first special symbol in which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored). This first special symbol memory display device 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b consisting of predetermined LEDs, and lighting of the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b.・By blinking pattern, it is possible to display the number of pending. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is lit and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is extinguished, and when the number of reservations is two, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b. are lit together, and when the number of reservations is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is lit, and when the number of reservations is four, both the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are lit. Flashing. In this example, up to four are reserved.

In addition, when the second special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 cannot variably display the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 1186, the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2102. In the case, it displays the pending number (stored number) of the second special symbol in which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored). This second special symbol memory display device 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a consisting of a predetermined LED and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b, and lighting of the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b.・By blinking pattern, it is possible to display the number of pending. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is lit and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is extinguished, and when the number of reservations is two, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b. are lit together, and when the number of reservations is three, the second special design memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special design memory lamp 1187b lights up, and when the number of reservations is four, the second special design memory lamps 1187a and 1187b both light up. Flashing. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Furthermore, the first special symbol indicator 1185 and the second special symbol indicator 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102. It displays the result and the second special lottery result, and the 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result. The player side can be made to recognize the special lottery result and the second special lottery result.

In addition, the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is red, green, orange, and a color LED that can change the light emission color, and the light emission color and the combination of lighting and blinking. , it is possible to display the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn by passing the game ball through the normal figure gate 2301 . It should be noted that the display of the normal symbols by the normal symbol display 1189, like the special symbols, is changed and displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then stopped and displayed in a light emission pattern corresponding to the result of the normal lottery.

In addition, the normal symbol memory display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 starts the variable display when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 2301 when the normal symbol display 1189 cannot variably display the normal symbol. It displays the number of reserved (stored) normal symbols (number of memories). This normal design memory display device 1188 has four normal design memory lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal design memory lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of reservations. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the reserved number of normal symbols. In this example, up to four variable displays of normal symbols are retained (stored).

Furthermore, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 is provided with round indicator lamps 1190a and 1190b consisting of predetermined LEDs, and by turning on these indicator lamps, the number of rounds in the "jackpot" game can be displayed. It's like

The function display unit 1180 of this example can be visually recognized from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 106(A). It has become. In addition, the game state indicator 1183 of the function display unit 1180, the first special symbol memory indicator 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, the second special symbol indicator 1186, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187, the normal symbol memory Indicator 1188, normal symbol indicator 1189, and round indicator 1190 are attached to the front surface of the function display board (not shown). A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 .

In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided on the front structural member 1110 of the game board 4, compared to the case where the function display unit 1180 is provided on the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150, the function The display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified, and the increase in cost can be prevented. Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 embodied by the back unit 3000 and capable of characterizing the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different, the position of the display section 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change, so the player and the player can The hall clerk or the like can recognize the position of the display unit 1181 without confusion.

Also, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may be configured as shown in FIG. 106(B). In this example, the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display device 1186, which are composed of 7-segment LEDs, are each composed of eight LED groups. In addition, the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are respectively composed of four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory display 1188 is composed of two LEDs.

This function display unit 1180 can also achieve the same effects as above, and since the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are composed of eight LED groups, 7 As compared with the case of using segment LEDs, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to remember the special symbols displayed. Therefore, since it is difficult to understand the contents displayed on the function display unit 1180, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming uneasy about the display of the function display unit 1180 during the game and having difficulty concentrating on the game. The game can be made more enjoyable by allowing the player to concentrate on moving effects, effect images, and the like.

[Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1200 different from the game panel 1150 on the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. FIG. 107 to 109, the front component member 1110, substrate holder 1160, and main control substrate box 1170 have the same configurations as those described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. The game panel 1200 of this embodiment is thinner than the game panel 1150 described above, and is plate-shaped so that the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is defined by the front component 1110 can be defined. A panel plate 1210 formed to have a small outer shape, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front structural member 1110 .

The panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape slightly larger than the game area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. formed. The thickness of this panel plate 1210 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail G is planted in the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

This panel plate 1210 has a plurality of fitting holes 1211 formed by round holes arranged near the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, long holes 1212 arranged near the outer periphery at the lower left corner and extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. It has These fitting holes 1211 and elongated holes 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100 and are used for positioning with the panel holder 1220 . Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement stepped portions 1213 recessed on the front side at both ends of the upper side and the both ends of the lower side. The engaging stepped portion 1213 is cut out to approximately half the plate thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is arranged outside the game area 1100 like the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. It is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220 .

In addition, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. By fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1127 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 into the inner rail fixing hole 1214, the inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position. Further, the panel plate 1210 has a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 such as the center accessory 2500, and the attacker devices 2100, 2150, etc. are attached to the openings 1215 from the front side. unit is inserted and fixed.

On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the game panel 1200 has a size that encompasses the panel plate 1210 and has a substantially square outer shape, and has a thickness that is substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 1150 made of the wooden board described above (in this example, approximately 20 mm) and made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1220 includes a holding stepped portion 1221 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and a front and rear portion that is approximately the same size as the game area 1100 inside the holding stepped portion 1221 . It mainly has a through hole 1222 penetrating in the direction.

The depth from the front surface of the holding stepped portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210 , and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding stepped portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220 . and substantially the same surface. The holding stepped portion 1221 has a front inner peripheral surface of such a size that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210 . Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. The clearance may be filled with an elastic member such as rubber.

In addition, the panel holder 1220 is arranged at positions corresponding to the fitting holes 1211 and the elongated holes 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding stepped portion 1221, and is arranged forward from the front surface of the holding stepped portion 1221. It has a plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 . By fitting and inserting these projecting pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 that engage with the engaging stepped portion 1213 at positions corresponding to the engaging stepped portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 . More specifically, the engaging claw 1224 is arranged on the upper holding stepped portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engaging stepped portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding stepped portion 1221. It projects toward and elastically engages with the engagement stepped portion 1213 . The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that the tip thereof does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220 . On the other hand, the engaging piece 1225 is disposed on the lower holding stepped portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging stepped portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and is located between the front surface of the holding stepped portion 1221 and the panel. The engaging stepped portion 1213 of the plate 1210 extends upward (toward the center) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220 by a predetermined amount while forming a predetermined gap large enough to be inserted. By engaging the engaging stepped portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engaging claws 1224 and the engaging pieces 1225, the panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220. As shown in FIG.

The panel holder 1220 is also provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the mounting boss 1126 provided on the front structural member 1110 can be inserted. By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component 1110 are positioned relative to each other.

As shown in FIG. 108, this panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 which is recessed forward by a predetermined amount so as to leave the lower side slightly below the center in the vertical direction and the outer peripheral edge on the rear surface side. ing. Due to this mounting support portion 1227, the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 is recessed above a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the outer peripheral portion of the rear surface side protruding rearward. 116) of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 1227 (in this example, about 2.5 mm). and preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the attachment support portion 1227, the fixing portion 3010c can be prevented from protruding rearward from the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 can be attached to the body frame 3. (Pachinko machine 1) can be securely installed and mounted in the game board holding opening 601. - 特許庁

Furthermore, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear side and above the housing recess 630h, into which predetermined screws can be screwed, arranged in a predetermined arrangement. ing. In addition, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged to correspond to the mounting holes 1228 . This positioning hole 1229 is a positioning projection (for example, a positioning projection (illustrated is omitted)) is inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a substantially rectangular (square hole) blind hole when viewed from the rear.

For the mounting holes 1228, holes having a large inner diameter and those having a small inner diameter are mixed, and mounting holes having an appropriate diameter are arranged according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

In addition, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height. It has become. As shown in FIG. 107, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed within a predetermined range from the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, the lower end of the front side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height. Since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is substantially flat, the rear surface of the front structural member 1110 disposed on the front surface is substantially flat, and the game ball shot from the ball shooting device 650 is flat. However, it is designed to be guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, this panel holder 1220 is formed with a lightening portion 1230 so that a mounting hole 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, support them, and maintain the strength of the panel holder 1220. It is in a state in which box-shaped ribs are formed in order to

The panel holder 1220 is formed with a positioning portion 1231 corresponding to a positioning means such as an obstacle nail implantation device (not shown) and an assembly jig, and the game panel 1150 is held by the obstacle nail implantation device. It can be set in the state of In the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guiding surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, and an out port 1232 penetrates in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end in a front view and extends downward. A ball passage cutout portion 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front structural member 1110 and a rear protrusion portion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front-rear direction is inserted into the lower right corner of the front view. an insertion hole 1234;

In addition, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 108) that is recessed forward from the rear surface by a predetermined amount on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and whose lower end side is open downward. A notch portion 1236 is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and penetrates in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. In addition, the panel holder 1220 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front structural member 1110 at appropriate positions.

Out-ball discharge groove 1235 in this panel holder 1220, when the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3 (upper surface of the game board placing portion 606 in the main body frame base 600). The positioning projection 607 provided is fitted, and by fitting the out-ball discharge groove 1235 with the positioning projection 607, the game board 4 moves in the left-right direction relative to the body frame 3. It is supposed to be regulated.

In the game panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding stepped portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225 are engaged with the engaging stepped portion 1213 . By joining together, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front sides of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. The panel plate 1210 held by the panel holder 1220 can be set in the conventional obstacle nail planting device without modifying the installation device, and the increase in the cost required for planting the obstacle nail G can be prevented. It can be suppressed.

In addition, although not shown, the game panel 1200 of this example has a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel plate 1210. and the front unit 2000 is attached. Also, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 . Thus, since the thin panel plate 1210 supports only the front unit, it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

Furthermore, since the game panel 1200 is divided into the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, even if the panel plate 1210 is a transparent plate, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the entire game panel 1200. The pachinko machine 1, in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen from the player through the plate 1210, can be embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 can strongly attract the player's interest.

In addition, since the game panel 1200 is divided into the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210, in which the position of the obstacle nail, the winning opening, etc. changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1, can be used as a replacement part. , the panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 having the game board 4 compatible with various models can be obtained only by replacing the panel plate 1210.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in advance in a predetermined arrangement, various predetermined members such as the rear unit 3000 mounted and fixed to the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 can be mounted and fixed at positions depending on the model. are at different positions, by designing the fixing parts of various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228, the panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part of the pachinko machine 1 that does not depend on the model. It has become.

[Second embodiment of front component]
Next, a front structural member 1110A having a different form from the front structural member 1110 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. FIG. 110 and 112, the game panel 1200, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 are the same as those of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 107 to 109 except that the configuration is the same as that shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

A front structural member 1110A shown in FIGS. 110 and 111 differs from the front structural member 1110 described above in a part of the inner peripheral shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and does not include a function display unit 1180. The points are very different. Other configurations are the same as those of the front constituent member 1110, and thus the same reference numerals are given, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Also, in the game board 4 using the front component 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided in either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 (in this example, the front unit 2000).

As shown in the figure, the front component member 1110A has a frame-like inner peripheral shape extending clockwise from the outlet guide surface 1115 as a base point to the abutting portion 1114 of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 in a front view. The shape is formed in the same shape as the front component member 1110 described above, and the shape from the blocking portion 1114 to the outlet guide surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from that of the front component member 1110 described above. ing. Specifically, the area from the impingement portion 1114 to the right above the certificate stamp pasting portion 1125 on the right side arranged directly below the impingement portion 1114 is formed in a gentle arc shape, and from the lower end of the arc to the out port The portion up to the guide surface 1115 is formed in an inclined linear shape so as to become lower toward the out-port guide surface 1115 .

The front constituent member 1110A of this example can ensure a wider game area 1100 than the front constituent member 1110 described above, and the wide game area 1100 can further entertain the player. It is possible.

[Security structure of pachinko machines]
Next, the security structure of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. FIG. FIG. 112 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the security structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. Also, FIG. 113 is a perspective view seen from the rear side with the game board accommodated.

First, as shown in FIG. 112, the anti-theft structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine 1 of this example is the side surface of the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the body frame base 600 formed of synthetic resin in the body frame 3. and a metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin in the door frame 5.

As described above, the side security plate 950 of the body frame 3 is formed of an extruded shape member made of metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and its vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the body frame base 600. , and the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction of the front component 1110 and the game panel 1150 of the game board 4 combined. The side security plate 950 includes a plate-shaped side piece 952a that extends in the vertical direction and in the front-rear direction and forms the side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end that extends inward (open side) in a substantially perpendicular direction from the front end of the side piece 952a. A piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending from the side piece 952a along the front end piece 952b so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance behind the front end piece 952b, and a middle piece 952c extending inward in a substantially perpendicular direction from the rear end of the side piece 952a. and a rear end piece 952d. As a result, the front end of the side security plate 950 is formed with a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

The side security plate 950 (main body 952) has a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and a rear end piece 952d arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side piece 952a. The strength of the entire body frame 3 is increased so that the game board 4, the door frame 5 and the like can be favorably supported.

On the other hand, as described above, the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed into a frame shape by spot welding, rivets, or the like so as to surround the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the door frame 5. A support-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section and opening outward (to the support side) is provided on the outer side of the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the support side. In the support-side reinforcement sheet metal 152 of the reinforcement unit 150, the strength of the support-side reinforcement sheet metal 152 is further increased by the support-side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so that the support-side reinforcement sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. .

By the way, in this example, the door frame 5 is attached to and supported by the main body frame 3 only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the pivot support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 will be deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 will become larger. Fraud may occur. On the other hand, in the security structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, there is a gap between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the side security plate 950. The rear piece of the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (intruded) to pivotally support the front end piece 952b. The side U-shaped projecting pieces 166 are arranged to be sandwiched. As a result, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3 , the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 contacts the rear surface side of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is opened. can be prevented from moving in the direction away from the body frame 3, the closed door frame 5 can be prevented from being pryed open, and the body frame It is possible to prevent fraud such as opening the door frame 5 against 3.

In addition, since the side security plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcement unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted together, there is no gap between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. The strength and rigidity of the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance can be improved.

Furthermore, since the rear end of the side piece 952a of the side security plate 950 extends further rearward than the game panel 1150 of the game board 4, if the body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is destroyed, unauthorized tools such as piano wires cannot enter the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game board 4 (game panel 1150) from the rear end of the side piece 952a. can be reliably prevented. In addition, as shown in FIG. 112, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the outside of the side security plate 950 so as to cover the outside, the pachinko machine 1 has a solid side surface. are sufficiently resistant to vandalism. In addition, generally, in a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed within the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1. From (the front side), it is almost impossible to allow an unauthorized tool to enter the rear side of the rear end of the intermediate piece 952c.

Next, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. Since the unit base 741, the full-tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are made of transparent synthetic resin, the rear side and the side side of the game board 4 housed in the body frame 3 can be It can be visually recognized from the rear side of the body frame 3 without removing it from the body frame 3 or opening the back cover 900.例文帳に追加As a result, even if a fraudulent device is attached to the back side of the game board 4, it can be easily found, and fraud can be prevented. In addition, since an illegal device or the like attached to the game board 4 can be easily found from the outside, it is possible to discourage the attachment of the illegal device, thereby enhancing the deterrence against fraudulent acts. ing.

In addition, since the rear side and the side side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the main body frame can be used for maintenance or model change. When the game board 4 is attached to or detached from the main body frame 3 and the game board 4, even if tools such as screwdrivers and pliers, cleaning rags, dust, dirt, etc. remain between the body frame 3 and the game board 4, they are removed to the outside. It is possible to easily find out the troubles from the pachinko machine 1, prevent any troubles from occurring, and improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

[Detailed configuration of game board]
Next, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 117. FIG. FIG. 114 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine. FIG. 115 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the special prize winning opening of the game board is opened. 116 is a rear perspective view of the game board, and FIG. 117 is an oblique rear view of the game board disassembled for each main member (the center accessory 2500 is not shown). Figure 2 is a viewed perspective view;

The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game ball (also simply referred to as "ball") as a game medium is produced by a player operating the handle device 500. It comprises a frame-shaped front structural member 1110A that divides and forms the inner periphery of a game area 1100 to be driven, and a plate-shaped game panel 1200. - 特許庁

The game panel 1200 of this example includes a transparent panel plate 1210 formed in a plate shape smaller in outer shape than the front component 1110A so that the rear end of the game area 1100 whose inner periphery is defined by the front component 1110A can be defined. , and a frame-like panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110A. An opening of the game panel 1200 is formed in a transparent panel plate 1210 .

The game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached to the opening of the game panel 1200 from the front side, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a front left end of the back unit 3000. A function display unit 1180 arranged at a position visible from the player side through a transparent panel plate 1210 and visible from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to the pachinko machine 1; A liquid crystal display device 1900 having a rectangular display screen (display area) attached to the rear side of the rear unit 3000 so as to be visible from the player side and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and covering the lower part of the rear unit 3000 from the rear side. A board holder 1160 attached to the lower rear surface of the game panel 1200 and a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1160 are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, in the game area 1100, a large number of obstacle nails are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and windmills are provided at predetermined positions along the way. A center accessory 2500 is arranged at a substantially central position of the game area 1100, and the design of the center accessory 2500 characterizes the model of the pachinko machine 1, the game concept, and the like.

In addition, behind the center accessory 2500, an effect display device 1900 is provided to display an effect with a large area when viewed from the front so as to attract the player's attention. As the effect display device 1900, an appropriate display device capable of displaying image information obtained by synthesizing decorative pattern image information, background image information, character image information and the like is used. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as effect display device 1900 .

Moreover, above the liquid crystal display device 1900, a second liquid crystal display device 3252 having a display area smaller than that of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and realizing an auxiliary display effect is provided. This second liquid crystal display device 3252 may also display image information obtained by synthesizing decorative pattern image information, background image information, character image information, and the like.

On the other hand, from the right side area to the lower side area of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100, from the upstream, the normal figure gate 2301, the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker device 2100, the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101, the second A starting port 2102 is provided. On the other hand, in the left area of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100, a plurality of general winning openings 2201 are provided. In addition, in the lower area of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100, a regular winning opening 2101a of the first starting opening 2101 is provided.

Here, the first starting port 2101 includes a normal winning port 2101a which is located substantially in the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction and is below the liquid crystal display device 1900 so that game balls can always win a prize, and a It is configured to have a special winning opening 2101b in which a game ball can win only when the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 is operated on the right side. Then, when a game ball enters this first starting hole 2101 (regular winning hole 2101a, special winning hole 2101b), a first starting hole sensor 3131 described later (see FIG. 118) enters the game ball (winning ) is detected. And at this time, if a predetermined special start condition is established, based on the random number for the first special symbol that is updated (generated) periodically (for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical range, the attacker, which will be described later. A first special symbol lottery (first special determination) is performed for a hit that triggers the operation of the device 2100, and the first special symbol dynamically displayed on the first special symbol display device 1185 is variably displayed for a predetermined time. be. Then, when winning is won, after the variable display is completed, drive control of an attacker driving mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 118), which will be described later and which has a solenoid or the like, is performed, whereby the attacker device 2100 opens and closes. It will work. After the attacker device 2100 is opened and closed in this way, it is possible to shift to a time-saving game state described later in which the ease of winning the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 is improved. .

As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a control structure capable of simultaneously varying the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and by starting the variation of the second special symbol The symbol variation according to the result of the first special symbol lottery cannot be put into a variation start waiting state.

In addition, the normal figure gate 2301 is provided above the special winning opening 2101b, and is configured so that a game ball hit to the right side area of the center accessory 2500 can pass through. Then, when there is acceptance (passage) of a game ball to the normal figure gate 2301, the acceptance is detected by a gate sensor 2302 (see FIG. 118) described later.

At this time, if a predetermined normal starting condition is satisfied, the movable piece (normal Judgment processing (normal judgment) for a normal hit, which triggers the operation of the electric accessory) 2111, is performed, and normal symbols dynamically displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 are variably displayed for a predetermined time. Then, when a normal win is won, after this variable display is finished, drive control of a normal role product drive mechanism 3114 (see FIG. 118), which will be described later and which has a solenoid or the like, is performed. Through this drive control, the movable piece 2111 rotates its upper end to the right (clockwise) around its lower end, thereby allowing the reception of game balls into the special prize winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101. .

That is, the special prize-winning port 2101b is opened only when the movable piece 2111 performs the opening operation (rotating operation of the upper end centering on the lower end of the movable piece 2111) in response to the winning of the normal winning. ball) is provided so that prizes can be won. In this sense, the movable piece 2111 has a mode in which the game ball cannot enter the special winning port 2101b of the first start port 2101 (rejection mode) and a mode in which the same ball can enter (permission). It can be said that it is maintained in the refusal mode unless the drive control of the normal accessory drive mechanism 3114 is performed. Therefore, in the special winning opening 2101b, basically, when the game is in the normal game state (non-time-saving game state), winning of game balls hardly occurs. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state, the game ball is hit in the right side area of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100 (right hitting), so that the ease of accepting the game ball is improved. A game property centered on a game (first special symbol lottery) corresponding to the acceptance of game balls into the winning opening 2101b is realized.

In addition, the second starting opening 2102 is provided below the special winning opening 2101b, and is driven into the right side area of the center accessory 2500, and the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker device 2100 and the first starting opening 2101 A game ball that is not accepted by the mouth 2101b can be entered. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 2102, the second starting hole sensor 3132 (see FIG. 118), which will be described later, detects the entry of the game ball (winning a prize). And at this time, if a predetermined special starting condition is established, based on the random number for the second special symbol that is updated (generated) periodically (for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical range, the attacker, which will be described later. A second special symbol lottery (second special determination) is performed for the hit that triggers the operation of the device 2100, and the second special symbol dynamically displayed on the second special symbol display device 1186 is variably displayed for a predetermined time. be. Then, when a hit has been obtained, after this variable display is completed, drive control of an attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 118), which will be described later and which has a solenoid or the like, is performed, whereby the attacker device 2100 will be opened and closed.

Here, the attacker device 2100 according to the present embodiment is provided above the special prize winning port 2101b, and is configured to be able to receive a game ball hit to the right side area of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100 when in the open state. It is

The attacker device 2100 is composed of a large winning opening 2103, an opening/closing member 2106 that can operate between a closed state and an open state, and an attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 118) that drives the opening/closing member 2106 to open and close. Normally, the large winning opening 2103 is closed by an opening/closing member 2106 so that game balls cannot be received.

However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the special lottery performed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first start opening 2101 opens the big winning opening 2103 (first special Winning game on the symbol side), when opening the big winning opening 2103 as a result of the special lottery performed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second start opening 2102 (winning game on the second special symbol side), The number of game balls that can be accepted is adjusted by varying the control mode for opening them.

That is, the attacker device 2100 opens the big winning opening 2103 by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2106 when a big hit or a small hit is obtained as a result of either the first special determination or the second special determination. In this way, a big win game state or a small win game state is generated as a privilege advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the game ball wins the first start port 2101 (first start port sensor 3131) or the second start port 2102 (second start port sensor 3132), three game balls are paid out, When game balls enter the big winning opening 2103 (count sensor 2122a) used for execution of the big winning game state and the small winning game state, 15 game balls are paid out. In addition, when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 2201 (general winning opening sensor 3133), 10 game balls are paid out.

By the way, in the time-saving game state (rush preparation mode in this embodiment), the normal symbol fluctuation time is "0.08 seconds", and after the normal symbol fluctuation stops, the movable piece 2111 is in an open state (special winning opening 2101b The time that the game ball is maintained at the right rotation side position where the game ball can win a prize is "5.5 seconds". In other words, when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 2301, the game ball that has passed is always won in a normal hit, and the time shorter than the time it takes for the passing game ball to reach the movable area of the movable piece 2111 (0 08 seconds), the game ball triggered by winning the normal winning can enter the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 as it is. According to such a configuration, in the time-saving gaming state, it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the second starting hole 2102, which is provided below the special winning hole 2101b and can accept the flowing down game ball. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress execution of the second special symbol lottery in a time-saving gaming state in which execution of the first special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning hole 2101b is preferred.

In addition, after the movable piece 2111 is maintained in the open state (the position where the game ball can be received in the special winning opening 2101b) for "5.5 seconds", it is closed (the game ball is not in the special winning opening 2101b). unacceptable position).

Therefore, in the time saving game state (rush preparation mode), the probability of winning the normal symbol is 100%, and the movable piece 2111 of the special winning opening 2101b is moved to the right rotation side position for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). In this case, hitting to the right makes it easier for the game ball to enter the special winning hole 2101b. Therefore, in the time-saving game state rush preparation mode), instead of the first start port 2101 (constant winning port 2101a), the first starting port 2101 (special winning port 2101b) so that many game balls win, the center role Aiming at the right side of 2500 and shooting a game ball (so-called "right hitting") is considered more advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, in the non-time-saving gaming state (normal mode and rush mode in this embodiment), the winning probability of normal symbols is set to 0%, and the time required for variable display control of normal symbols is a predetermined variation time (for example, 1 second ), the reception of game balls to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 is disabled.

It should be noted that, even in the non-time-saving gaming state, depending on whether or not the variable probability gaming state, it differs whether it is more advantageous for the player to aim at the left or right side of the center accessory 2500 to shoot the game ball. In the normal game state (normal mode), which is a non-time-saving game state and not a variable probability game state, the left side of the center accessory 2500 is moved so that many game balls win in the regular winning port 2101a of the first start port 2101. Aiming and shooting a game ball (so-called "left-handed hitting") is considered more advantageous for a player. In addition, in a high probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode), which is a non-time-saving gaming state and a probability variable gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is higher than the normal gaming state, many game balls are placed in the second start port 2102. It is considered more advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called "right-handed hitting") so as to win a prize.

In addition, as the time saving control, the control to increase the winning probability of the normal symbol than the non-time-saving game state, the control to shorten the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol than the non-time-saving game state, the first start port 2101 Control to extend the period of maintaining the movable piece 2111 of the special winning opening 2101b at the right rotation side position than the non-time saving game state, and the number of times to operate the movable piece 2111 to the right rotation side position than the non-time saving game state any one or any combination (or all) of increasing control may be performed.

The back unit 3000 of the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and the front side is open. A back box 3010 in which 3010b is formed, a back front decorative unit 3100 arranged near the front end in the back box 3010, a back up effect unit 3200 arranged above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and a back box. A back bottom effect unit 3400 arranged below the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and a back bottom right placed between the back bottom effect unit 3400 and the back front decoration unit 3100 at the bottom right corner in the front view in the back box 3010. A production unit 3600 is mainly provided. The back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is provided with a function display unit 1180 at a position visible from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210 .

Further, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board 4, a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 118) having a peripheral control section 4140 and a liquid crystal control section 4150 is accommodated, although the details will be described later. Box 1910 is provided.

In the game board 4 of the present embodiment, the area between the outer periphery on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and the outer periphery of the game area 1100 (the inner periphery of the front constituent member 1110A) is a wide area in which the game balls can sufficiently roll. A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel plate 1210 in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100 .

In the game board 4 of this example, when a game ball is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (hit with a strength equal to or greater than a predetermined strength), the game ball hits the upstream of the impact part 1114 of the front component 1110A. It flows down the right passage 2545 of the center accessory 2500 from the side. Here, the right side passage 2545 has a width that allows game balls to flow down one by one, and the game balls that have flowed down this right side passage 2545 are decelerated by the impingement portion 1114, and then first pass through the right side passage 2545. It reaches the normal map gate 2301 arranged above. After that, it is guided to the movable area of the opening/closing member 2106 of the attacker device 2100 . In this movable area, the game ball that has not been received by the opening/closing member 2106 into the big winning opening 2103 is then guided to the movable area of the movable piece 2111 . Note that the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the movable area is decelerated by the first guide section 2901 and the flowing direction is changed, and then guided to the movable area of the movable piece 2111 . Here, the game ball passing through the upper normal gate 2301 is guided to the special winning opening 2101b, which is in a state where the game ball is received by the movable piece 2111.

In the movable area of the movable piece 2111, the game ball not guided by the movable piece 2111 so as to be received in the special winning opening 2101b is again decelerated by the second guiding part 2902, and then guided to the second starting opening 2102. be done. A game ball flowing down the right path 2545 is guided to the second starting hole 2102 with a probability close to 100% unless it enters either the big winning hole 2103 or the special winning hole 2101b.

As described above, in the time-saving game state, the game ball that is hit to the right and has passed through the normal game gate 2301 will be accepted by the special winning opening 2101b of the first start opening 2101 with a probability of almost 100%.

As a result of such a game, when a big win or a small win is obtained as a judgment result of either the first special judgment or the second special judgment, the big winning opening 2103 is opened by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2106. By doing so, a big hit game state or a small hit game state is generated as a privilege advantageous to the player.

[Liquid crystal display device]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. As shown in FIG. 117, etc., the liquid crystal display device 1900 has fixing pieces 1902 protruding outward from both left and right sides, and is attached to the rear side of the back case 3010 via the fixing pieces 1902 . ing.

Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted from the rear side into a liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d formed on the rear side of the rear wall 3010a of the back case 3010. The two fixing pieces 1902 are inserted into the two liquid crystal fixing portions 3010e on the left side in the rear view of the back case 3010, and the fixing piece 1902 on the opposite side is inserted into the insertion opening formed by the lock mechanism 3050. By sliding the lock mechanism 3050 downward to close the insertion opening, the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked and attached to the back case 3010 .

116 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 housing a peripheral control section 4140, a liquid crystal control section 4150 (see FIG. 118), etc., and a peripheral control board box 1910. and a rearwardly extending volume 1912 . By rotating this volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, it is possible to adjust the volume output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5 and the lower speaker 821 provided on the body frame 3. It has become.

The liquid crystal display device 1900 uses bright white LEDs as backlights.

[Various substrates]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and these two groups share various controls. The group of the main substrates 4000 includes a main control substrate 4100 for controlling game operations (progress of the game), and a payout control substrate 4110 for controlling the payout of game balls. The group of peripheral control boards 4010 includes a peripheral control section 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control section 4140. and a liquid crystal control unit 4150 for controlling the display of effect images.

[Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 118, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a, which is a microprocessor in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data are incorporated. , a main control I/O port 4100b as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids. A drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing information stored in a RAM 4100e built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter also referred to as "main control built-in RAM 4100e"). . The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter also referred to as a "main control built-in ROM 4100d"), a main control built-in RAM 4100e, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), and a functions are also built in.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes a first starting hole sensor 3131 that detects a game ball accepted into the first starting hole 2101 and a second starting hole sensor that detects a game ball accepted into the second starting hole 2102. 3132 and the detection signals from the general winning hole sensor 3133 that detects the game ball accepted into the general winning hole 2201 are input via the main control I/O port 4100b, or the gate sensor 2302 and the count sensor 2122 (count sensor 2122a, count sensor 2122b), the specific sensor 2580, and the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 3134 attached to the back unit 3000, the panel relay board 3040 attached to the game board 4, and the main control I/O port 4100b. It is designed to be input via

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g, so that the normal accessory drive mechanism 2114, through the panel relay board 3040, It outputs drive signals to the attacker drive mechanism 2121, the winning opening distribution drive motor 2558, and the specific area distribution drive motor 2559, and via the main control I/O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3040, and the function display board 1191 First special symbol display 1185, second special symbol display 1186, first special symbol memory display 1184, second special symbol memory display 1187, normal symbol display 1189, normal symbol memory display 1188, game state display 1183 and round indicator 1190.

In addition, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. or Furthermore, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I/O port 4100b. (The main control board 4100 and the peripheral control section 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown)). The main control MPU 4100 a , which will be described later in detail, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110 , shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140 .

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 from the power supply board 851, although detailed description will be given later. A power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when power is cut off. described.). This capacitor allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in power-off processing even when the power is off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control internal RAM 4100e when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch 4100 c is also output to the payout control board 4110 .

Further, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I/O port 4100b, and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 118, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of game balls includes a payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout, a launch control by a launch solenoid 654, and a ball feed by a ball feed solenoid 585. A launch control unit 4120 that performs control, an error LED indicator 4130 that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch 860a for canceling the error displayed on the error LED indicator 4130, and a prize ball tank 720 , a tank rail 731, and a ball extraction switch 860b for discharging the game balls in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball extraction operation.

[Dispensing control unit]
A payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. a payout control MPU 4111a, a payout control I/O port 4111b as an I/O device, and an external watchdog timer 4111c for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally (hereinafter referred to as "external WDT 4111c ), a payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. , is equipped with In the payout control MPU 4111a, in addition to its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM") and RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), It also has built-in functions.

The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port 4111b. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from 4100 being input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, and the ball out switch 750 , the detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input via the winning ball relay board 754 .

A ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of game balls in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the unit base 741 is detected. A detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first inputted to the payout control input circuit 4111e through the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and is inputted to the payout control MPU 4111a through the payout control I/O port 4111b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed in the rotation detection plate 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first transmitted through the sensor substrate 753 of the prize ball device 740 and then through the prize ball relay substrate 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b.

Detection signals from a door frame open switch 618 for detecting opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and a main body frame open switch 619 for detecting opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first sent to the dispensing control input circuit. 4111e, and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of stored game balls is first transmitted to the handle device relay board 192 and then to the main side relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the board 880, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b.

The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I/O 4111b and the prize ball relay board 754, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the error LED indicator. 4130 through the payout control I/O port 4111b to the error LED indicator 4130, or output a command to indicate the state of pachinko game 1 through the payout control I/O port 4111b. is sent to the main control board 4100 in a serial manner, and the number of game balls actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 784 through the payout control I/O port 4111b. This external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

The error LED indicator 4130 is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 4100 and It informs that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the boards with the payout control board 4110), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, it informs that there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, "the ball is caught." (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotating body 748 and game balls are engaged near the entrance, making it difficult for the payout rotating body 748 to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it is a "counting switch error" (specifically indicates that there is a problem with the counting sensor 751 based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751), and when the number "5" is displayed, it is a "retry error" (specifically, When the number "6" is displayed, it is notified that the retry count of the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit value, and that the tank is "full" (specifically, from the full tank detection sensor 550). based on the detection signal of the foul cover unit 540 is full of game balls), and when the number "7" is displayed, "CR is not connected" ( It informs that the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number "9" is displayed, it is "in stock" (specifically indicates that the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

A game ball lending request signal from the ball lending switch 365a and a prepaid card return request signal from the return switch 365b first pass through the ball lending unit board 366, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It is input to the CR unit 6 via. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in a serial manner. It is received by the port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and transmits a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining degree indicator 365c to the CR unit connection terminal. The signals are output to the board 874, the main-side relay terminal board 880, and the ball rental unit board 366, and this signal is input to the remaining number indicator 365c.

[Launch control unit]
A firing control unit 4120, which performs firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585, has a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to firing are inputted, as shown in FIG. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a launch timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on this clock signal, and this launch. It has a firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse, and a ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a drive signal to the ball-feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit 4120c generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game area 1100 per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b, and outputs it to the launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, it generates a ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

Detection signals from a touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not the palm or fingers are in contact with the handle body 504, and a firing stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. is first input to the firing control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and the main side relay terminal board 880, and is input to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit 4120a and to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. Signals from the rotational position detection sensor 512, which electrically adjusts the strength with which the game ball is struck toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the handle body 504, are sent first to the handle device relay board 192 and then to the main side relay terminal board 880. to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d.

This firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d, based on the signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512, generates a drive current for launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launching strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle body 504, by generating a firing reference pulse. is input to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, when the ball-feeding reference pulse is input, the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e applies a constant current to the ball-feeding solenoid 585 via the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192. By outputting, the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 accepts one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current By stopping the output of , the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. In this way, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the firing solenoid 654 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. controlled.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 has a capacitor BC1 (see B169) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. . Due to this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various kinds of information in the payout control built-in RAM even when the power is cut off in the process at the time of power cutoff. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM.

[Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 4010, as shown in FIG. and a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls drawing of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 .

[Peripheral control unit]
Peripheral control unit 4140, which performs performance control in the peripheral control board 4010, as shown in FIG. and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c is stored.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, based on these various commands, each decoration board of the game board 4 The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED etc. is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to the lamp driving board 3041, or the game board The game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor that operates the various effect units provided in 4 is transmitted from the game board decoration drive board serial I/O port to the motor attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 Door-side drive data for transmitting to the drive board 3045 or for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5, and each decoration board provided on the door frame 5 door-side drive light-emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED, etc., and the door-side drive light-emission data is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board to the peripheral panel. Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted to the door frame base substrate 194 via the relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 or to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is displayed on the liquid crystal display. In addition to transmitting from the serial I/O port for control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, it outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d to the sound source IC 4140c.

Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting the original positions of various effect units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting rotation of the dial operation portion 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressure operation portion 405 are detected by the door frame base substrate. 194, the peripheral-side relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, to the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a also receives a signal (operation signal) from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 that indicates that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on this operation signal. is doing.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided on the body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc., matched to various effects are played from the lower speaker 821, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base board 194 are connected to the door frame 5. The speakers 130 , 222 , 262 provided and the lower speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 are controlled so that music, sound effects, etc. are played in accordance with various presentations. By rotating a volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and projecting backward from the peripheral control board box 1910, the volume can be adjusted.

Note that the peripheral control unit 4140 includes a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and an external watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT”, not shown). WDT"), and the peripheral control MPU 4140a uses both the peripheral control internal WDT and the peripheral control external WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is running out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed through a serial input/output port. ) bits per second (hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4140a outputs initial data to the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the door frame side lighting and blinking command, the game board side lighting and blinking command, and the movable body driving command. , and a display command through a plurality of serial input/output ports, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

The lamp driving board 3041 and the motor driving board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 transmit a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting blinking command to the door frame through the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 . 5 provided in the LED of each decoration board 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc., or a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received game board side lighting blinking command It outputs to the LEDs of each decoration board 2116, 2125, 2569, 3113, 3114, 3115, 3123, 3124, 3266, 3320, 3322, 3426, 3536, 3546, etc. provided on the game board 4. In addition, the panel relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 transmits a drive signal based on the received movable body drive command to the dial drive motor provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 . 414, drive motors 3228, 3234, 3304, 3460, 3476, 3508, etc. provided on the game board 4, and each solenoid.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 that indicates that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally, or receives a signal from the liquid crystal control unit 4150. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressure operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are sent to the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 and the back box. It is input via a lamp drive board 3041 and a motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the 3010 .

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and outputs the sound information to the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the peripheral relay terminal board. 882 from the side speaker 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5, or from the lower speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 through the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Then, control is performed so that music and sound effects, etc., are played in accordance with various performances. In this example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the game window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged above the game window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 Sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal or a 4.1ch surround signal added with the lower speaker 391 described later, etc.) as sound information to the lower speaker 821 for bass. Therefore, it is possible to present a sound effect (sound production) that is more realistic than before.

[Measures to prevent abnormal noise]
The door frame 5 is equipped with equipment that requires electric power such as various audio equipment, LEDs, sensors, etc. A door frame base substrate 194 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame 5 (FIG. 25). The door frame base substrate 194 includes the side speaker 130, the upper speakers 222 and 262 (FIGS. 29 and 32) of the left and right side decoration units, and the lower speaker 821 (FIG. 67) in the speaker box 820 provided in the body frame 3 (FIG. 67). It is connected to the bass speaker) (FIG. 89) and is connected to the peripheral control board 4010 provided on the game board 4, and the audio signal sent from the peripheral control board 4010 is amplified and output to each speaker. It has an amplifier circuit (digital amplifier circuit).

In addition, on the door frame base board 194, wiring connecting various sound equipment, LEDs, sensors, etc. to the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4010, etc. is bundled together and extended backward. It is designed to be connected to the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the body frame 3 (FIGS. 67 and 89). The rear side of the door frame base board 194 is covered with a door frame base board cover 195 (FIG. 23).

In addition, at the place (rear side) where the door frame base board cover 195 is arranged, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and the game balls fired by the batted ball launching device 650 enter the game area 1100. A foul cover unit 540 (transparent polycarbonate molding) for guiding game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit is provided in close proximity (FIG. 23).

Since game balls (metal) pass through the ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540 at a high speed while contacting the wall surface of the passage, static electric charges are accumulated in the polycarbonate of this portion, and the voltage can be as high as 10 kV. (3-4 kV at most, even if the discharge of the accumulated electrostatic charge is painful). In addition, unlike metal, the electric charge accumulated in the resin can be discharged only in the vicinity thereof even if it is grounded, and most of it remains.

Electrostatic induction due to this charge may cause a malfunction of a digital amplifier circuit (not shown) of the adjacent door frame base board 194 . In this case, an abnormal audio signal that continues for a certain period of time may be input to the voice coil of the speaker, or the audio signal may be excessively amplified by the digital amplifier circuit and exceed the appropriate amplification width (excessive AC voltage). Occur. In that case, for example, a broken sound such as a crackling sound is generated from the speaker, or the sound reproduced by the speaker becomes a loud unpleasant sound (abnormal sound is generated), which makes the player feel uncomfortable. will be felt. In addition, there is a possibility that the speaker may be damaged, which is not good for the speaker. Although the digital amplifier circuit has a DC voltage cutting function on the input side, it usually does not on the output side.

Since the woofer of the lower speaker 821 is difficult to hear, there is a tendency to set the output to a large value.

The embodiment described below detects whether or not the audio signal output from the door frame base board 194 to the lower speaker 821 is the above-described abnormal audio signal, and if it is an abnormal audio signal, This invention relates to an abnormal audio signal blocking board (described later) that blocks abnormal audio signals from being input to the lower speaker 821 .

Regarding audio output, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when various commands are received from the main control board 4100, it responds to these various commands. Based on this, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c (FIG. 118).

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and transmits the sound information to the lower portion provided in the main body frame 3 via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, the door frame base substrate 194, and the like. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. in accordance with various presentations are played from the speaker 821, the side speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, and the upper speakers 222, 262 (see FIGS. 118 and 119).

[Abnormal sound signal blocking board]
Next, the abnormal sound signal blocking board will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. FIG. 119 is a block diagram of the door frame base board 194, the peripheral relay terminal board 882, the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884, and the lower speaker 821. As shown in FIG. FIG. 120 is a circuit diagram showing the circuitry of the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 119, the door frame base substrate 194 arranged on the door frame 5 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 arranged on the body frame 3 are connected by wiring 196, and the door frame base substrate 194 is connected to the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. To the side relay terminal board 882, a +24 V voltage, a woofer + signal and a woofer - signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821 amplified by the door frame base board 194, are output, and are output to the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 through the wiring 196. It is designed to be transmitted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119, in the body frame 3, an abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 is provided between the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 and the lower speaker 821 housed in the speaker box 820, and the peripheral side relay terminal The plate 882 and the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 are connected by a speaker protection harness 883 , and the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 and the lower speaker 821 are connected by a lower speaker harness 819 .

In FIG. 120, from the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 to the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884, the ground GND, +24V voltage, the woofer + signal which is the audio signal for the lower speaker 821 output from the door frame base board 194, and the woofer - The signal is relayed and transmitted to the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883 .

Also, the woofer + signal and woofer - signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821, are output from the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 to the lower speaker 821, and supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. It is In this way, the sound signal output from the door frame base board 194 is supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 .

By the way, it is desirable that the location of the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 in the body frame 3 is a location that is less likely to be affected by static electricity noise. In this embodiment, an abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 is arranged at a location far away from the foul cover unit 540, for example, inside the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. In this way, by arranging the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 at a location that is less likely to be affected by static electricity noise, it is possible to stably prevent abnormal audio signals from being input to the lower speaker 821 .

[Circuit of Abnormal Sound Signal Blocking Board]
The abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 detects whether the audio signal supplied to the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883 is an abnormal audio signal. It blocks the input of the audio signal to the lower speaker 821 .

As shown in FIG. 120, the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 includes an abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 that detects that the audio signal is an abnormal audio signal and outputs an abnormality detection signal. An abnormal sound signal blocking circuit 895 is provided for blocking supply of an abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821 when receiving the outputted abnormality detection signal.

The +24V voltage supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 through the +24V supply line 886 in the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 . Also, the ground GND supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 through the ground line 887 in the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 .

The woofer + signal, which is an audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two at the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884, one of which is input to the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 through the woofer + signal line 888, and the other It is input to the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 .

In addition, the woofer signal, which is the audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two at the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884, one of which is relayed in the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 through the woofer signal line 889. It is connected to an external lower speaker 821 through a lower speaker harness 819 . The other is input to the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 .

[Abnormal sound signal detection circuit]
The abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 includes a rectifying bridge circuit formed by connecting four diodes SD1 to SD4 in a bridge configuration, a resistor SR1 (47 kΩ) and an electrolytic capacitor SC1 (in this embodiment, 47 μF), a transistor STR1, a transistor STR2, and a photocoupler SPC1 (in which an infrared LED and a phototransistor are incorporated).

The cathode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD2, and the other woofer + signal of the two branches is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD4 and the anode terminal of the diode SD2. . The cathode terminal of the diode SD3 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD1, and the other of the two woofer signals is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD1. ing.

Furthermore, the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 and the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 are electrically connected, and the anode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD4 are electrically connected to form a rectifying bridge circuit. The cathode terminal of the diode SD2 is connected to a +voltage line 890 that supplies a positive voltage rectified by the rectifying bridge circuit to the subsequent stage, while the anode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the rectifying bridge circuit to the subsequent stage. A 0V line 891 is connected to supply 0V, the voltage of which is substantially 0V after the negative portion has been cut by the circuit.

In the latter stage of the rectifying bridge circuit, one end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890, the other end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the - terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is connected to the 0V line 891. It is connected.

That is, the woofer + signal and woofer - signal rectified by the rectifying bridge circuit (a + voltage waveform in which the high and low peaks of the audio signal waveform are continuously connected to each other with 0 V as the connection point) are electrolyzed through the resistor SR1. By being applied to the + terminal of the capacitor SC1, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0 V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the mountain, and during the period from the peak voltage of the + voltage waveform to 0 V The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is designed to discharge. The resistance value of the resistor SR1 and the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 determine the time constant of charging and discharging in the series circuit (smoothing circuit) of the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1.

One end of a capacitor SC2 is connected to the +voltage line 890 after the connection point of the resistor SR1 on the +voltage line 890, and the other end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR1. The base terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the other end of the capacitor SC2 and also to the other end of the resistor SR3, one end of which is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1. That is, the voltage of the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR1 through the resistor SR3. Also, the capacitor SC2 removes ripples from the waveform of the positive voltage and smoothes the waveform.

A collector terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890 after the connection point of the capacitor SC2 of the + voltage line 890, and a rectified and smoothed woofer signal, that is, a + voltage is applied. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR2, the other end of the resistor SR2 is connected to one end of the resistor SR4, and the other end of the resistor SR4 is connected to the 0V line 891. A resistor SR2 and a resistor SR4 are voltage dividing resistors.

One end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4, the other end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1, and the anode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR6. , the other end of the resistor SR6 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2. One end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2, and the other end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the 0V line 891. FIG.

That is, the voltage at one end of the resistor SR7 appearing based on the output voltage of the emitter of the transistor STR1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2.

On the other hand, the anode terminal of a diode SD5 is connected to the +voltage line 890 after the connection point of the +voltage line 890 and the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, and the cathode terminal of the diode SD5 is the anode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1. It is connected to the. The cathode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR2 is connected to the 0V line 891.

That is, when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on.

[Abnormal sound signal blocking circuit]
The abnormal sound signal blocking circuit 895 is mainly composed of a phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, a transistor STR3, and a relay SRL1. That is, the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 are connected through the photocoupler SPC1.

In the abnormal sound signal blocking circuit 895, the 24V supply line 886 is branched into two, one of which is connected to the collector terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, and the other of which is connected to the 8th terminal (coil + input) of the relay SRL1. It is The emitter terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR8, the other end of the resistor SR8 is connected to one end of the resistor SR9, and the other end of the resistor SR9 is connected to the ground line 887. A resistor SR8 and a resistor SR9 are voltage dividing resistors.

A connection point between the resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9 is connected to the base terminal of a transistor STR3 for relay operation, and to one end of a capacitor SC3 having the other end connected to the ground line 887 . The emitter terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the ground line 887, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the first terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1 and the third terminal (one of the A contacts) of the relay SRL1.

A fourth terminal (the other contact A) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the ground line 887 . Further, the 5th terminal (one of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the woofer + signal line 888, and the 6th terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the lower speaker harness 819 as an external output of the woofer + signal. It is connected to the external lower speaker 821 through the .

Furthermore, a varistor SZNR1 for bypassing the induced current due to self-induction is connected in parallel between the 8th terminal (coil + input) of the relay SRL1 and the 1st terminal (coil - input) of the relay SRL1. A varistor SZNR2 for contact protection is connected in parallel between the terminal (one of the B contacts) and the sixth terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1.

Since the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 are signal-connected by the photocoupler SPC1, electrical noise does not directly enter the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 from the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885. It's like

Next, the operation of the circuit of the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 configured as above will be described.

[Operation when a normal audio signal is input]
<Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When a normal audio signal (an AC voltage waveform with different amplitude peaks) is input, in the rectifier bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885, in the case of the woofer + signal, the diodes SD2 and SD3 become conductive, In FIG. 120, current flows from top to bottom through the resistor SR1 to the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0 V of the positive voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the mountain.

When a normal audio signal (an AC voltage waveform with different amplitude peaks) is input, the voltage increase due to the charge accumulated in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage that operates the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on and remains off.

Next, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0 V, and the charge accumulated at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 through the resistor SR1.

In the case of a woofer signal, the diodes SD1 and SD4 are conductive, and in FIG. 120, the current flows through the resistor SR1 to the electrolytic capacitor SC1 from top to bottom, from 0 V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the mountain. During this period, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged.

When a normal audio signal (an AC voltage waveform with different amplitude peaks) is input, the voltage rise due to the charge accumulated in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on and remains off.

Next, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0 V, and the charge accumulated at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 through the resistor SR1.

Thus, when a normal audio signal (an AC voltage waveform with different amplitude peaks) is input, the transistor STR1 of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 remains off. Therefore, the transistor STR2 and the infrared LED (photocoupler) of the photocoupler SPC1 are also kept off, and the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 does not actually turn on.

<Abnormal sound signal blocking circuit 895>
On the other hand, in the abnormal sound signal blocking circuit 895, the photocoupler SPC1 maintains the off state, so that the transistor STR3 also maintains the off state. Also, the relay SRL1 is in a non-operating state. Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in a non-excited state, the non-operating B contact (the contact is closed) between the 5th and 6th terminals of the relay SRL1, and the non-operating between the 3rd and 4th terminals. The contact is A (the contact is open). Therefore, the 5th and 6th terminals of the relay SRL1 are in a conducting state, and the woofer+ signal on the woofer+ signal line 888 is supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 .

[When an abnormal audio signal that continues for a certain period of time is input]
[Operation when an abnormal audio signal is input by a fixed DC voltage]
<Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal with a fixed DC voltage (for example, a constant voltage of +24 V, +18 V, +1.5 V, etc.) is continuously input, in the rectifying bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 becomes conductive, charging current flows from top to bottom through resistor SR1 to electrolytic capacitor SC1 in FIG. 120, and electrolytic capacitor SC1 continues to be charged.

When an abnormal audio signal with a fixed constant voltage is input, the voltage at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 rises due to the increase in charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 over time. , and reaches the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

When the transistor STR1 is turned on, a current flows through the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the emitter terminal of the transistor STR1, the resistors SR2 and SR4, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR4 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistors SR2 and SR4) causes , the resistor SR5, the Zener diode SZD1, the resistor SR6, and the resistor SR7, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR7 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistor SR6 and the resistor SR7) is applied to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor STR2. This turns on the transistor STR2.

When the transistor STR2 is turned on, the collector voltage of the transistor STR2 is pulled down to the 0V line 891 side, and the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on through the diode SD5. That is, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. Turning on the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 corresponds to outputting an abnormality detection signal. Diode SD5 limits the current flowing through the infrared LED.

<Abnormal sound signal blocking circuit 895>
When the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, and current flows to the ground through the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, the resistors SR8 and SR9. Here, turning on the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 means receiving an abnormality detection signal. The voltage applied to the resistor SR9 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistors SR8 and SR9) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3, turning on the transistor STR3. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3 is smoothed by removing noise from the capacitor SC3.

When the transistor STR3 is turned on, the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side, and the No. 1 terminal of the relay SRL1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side. The coil inside the relay SRL1 between the terminal No. 1 is energized, and the relay SRL1 operates.

Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is energized, and between the 5th and 6th terminals of the relay SRL1 is the B contact (the contact is open) in the operating state, and between the 3rd and 4th terminals is the B contact in the operating state. It becomes the A contact (the contact is closed). Accordingly, the 5th and 6th terminals of the relay SRL1 are switched to the cutoff state, and the woofer+ signal on the woofer+signal line 888 is cut off from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1. This cuts off the supply of the abnormal woofer+ signal through the lower speaker harness 819 to the lower speaker 821 .

Further, the 3rd and 4th terminals of the relay SRL1 are brought into conduction, the 3rd terminal of the relay SRL1 is pulled down to the ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 connected to the 3rd terminal of the relay SRL1 is grounded. pulled down, turning off transistor STR3.

On the other hand, the 1st terminal of the relay connected in parallel with the 3rd terminal of the relay SRL1 is also pulled down to the ground, so that the current flows through the 8th terminal, the 1st terminal, the 3rd terminal, the 4th terminal, and the ground line 887. The energized state of the coil is maintained by transitioning to the flowing conductive state. Therefore, the woofer+ signal remains cut off from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1.

In this way, when an abnormal audio signal with a fixed constant voltage is input, the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 detects that the audio signal is an abnormal audio signal and outputs an abnormality detection signal (photocoupler turns on). When the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 receives the abnormality detection signal output from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 (when the photocoupler turns on), the relay SRL1 operates to supply the abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821. block the Therefore, it is possible to prevent damage to the speaker due to continuous application of a fixed DC voltage to the speaker.

In the above-described embodiment, when an abnormal sound is input, the energized state of the coil of the relay SRL1 is maintained, and the woofer + signal keeps the output from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 cut off. Ultimate safety measures are taken with the highest priority on preventing damage to the speaker. Therefore, when the cause of the abnormal sound signal is identified by the staff, or when it is confirmed that the sound output is stopped, the operating state of the relay SRL1 is canceled by turning on the power of the gaming machine again. It is possible to return to a normal initial state by

[Operation when an abnormal audio signal is input due to excessive AC voltage]
<Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal due to excessive AC voltage is input, that is, when the audio signal is extremely amplified and an excessive AC voltage exceeding the appropriate amplification width is input, for example, in the case of a woofer + signal, Diode SD2 and diode SD3 become conductive, charging current flows through resistor SR1 to electrolytic capacitor SC1 from top to bottom in FIG. be done.

Further, for example, in the case of a woofer signal, the diodes SD1 and SD4 become conductive, the charging current flows through the resistor SR1 through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 from top to bottom in FIG. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period up to the peak voltage.

In this case, the peak voltage of the abnormal audio signal is extremely higher than the peak voltage of the normal audio signal. A charging current rapidly flows through the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is rapidly charged.

Therefore, the charge stored in the + terminal of electrolytic capacitor SC1 through resistor SR1 rapidly increases. This rapid increase in charge causes the voltage at the + terminal of electrolytic capacitor SC1 to rise and reach the base terminal voltage that drives transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

The operation of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 and the operation of the abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895 after the transistor STR1 is turned on is the same as the operation when the abnormal audio signal is input by the fixed DC voltage described above. Yes, and will be briefly explained.

Turning on the transistor STR1 turns on the transistor STR2, and turning on the transistor STR2 turns on the photocoupler SPC1. In the abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on to turn on the transistor STR3, and when the transistor STR3 is turned on, the relay SRL1 is operated, and the 5th and 6th terminals of the relay SRL1 are cut off. state and the woofer+ signal on woofer+ signal line 888 is cut off from terminal 6 of relay SRL1. This cuts off the supply of the abnormal woofer+ signal through the lower speaker harness 819 to the lower speaker 821 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the generation of abnormal sound due to an abnormal audio signal having an excessively amplified AC voltage that exceeds the proper amplification width. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unpleasant sounds from being emitted to the player.

[LCD controller]
Next, as shown in FIG. 118, the liquid crystal control unit 4150, which controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 in the peripheral control board 4010, includes a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b that stores various commands and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c that controls display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 described above, and a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and a character RAM 4150e to which the various data stored in the character ROM 4150d are transferred and copied.

The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a incorporates a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to 2 Controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 3252 . When liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to peripheral control unit 4140. FIG. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-execution signal, which will be described later, from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b contains various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252, as well as control data (display commands) from the peripheral control board 4010, corresponding schedule data, and A plurality of nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like corresponding to control data (display commands) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining screen configurations in time series, and defines the order of screens to be rendered on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 . The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constructed by arranging non-resident area transfer data in chronological order, which defines the order when various data stored in the character ROM 4150d are transferred to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e. This non-resident area transfer data prescribes the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in accordance with the progress of the schedule data.

The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the screen data following the top screen data to the VDP 4150c. It extracts from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c. In this manner, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the extracted screen data to the VDP 4150c.

When screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252. Drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900 . When the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, it outputs an execution signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. Note that the VDP 4150c employs a line buffer system. This "line buffer method" is a method in which drawing data for one line for drawing in the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in a line buffer, and drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is transferred to the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. This is a method of outputting to the second liquid crystal display device 3252 .

The character ROM 4150d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored and affects the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

A “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the liquid crystal display device 1900 . For example, when various persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, the data for drawing each person is called "sprite". Thus, when displaying a plurality of persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be made into one sprite. For these sprites, the position to be arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as "sprite superimposition order") are set, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device are set. 3252 is rendered.

Note that the sprite is constructed by gluing together a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels each in length and width. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "character". A small sprite can be expressed using one character, and a relatively large sprite such as a person can be expressed using a total of 6 characters, for example, arranged horizontally by 2×vertically 3. be able to. Larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using more characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

In the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252, the display state of each pixel is sequentially set in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front, and the main scanning is performed to cross the one direction. and a sub-scan in which main scan is repeatedly performed in the direction to be driven. When drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input, the liquid crystal display device 1900 scans from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as main scanning. are sequentially output to the pixels of one line. When the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Based on the drawing data for one line, the pixels are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as main scanning.

[Control processing in the main control board]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 121 to 149, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (especially the main control MPU 4100a) will be described.

[Main processing]
FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board of this embodiment. When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes power-on processing (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is normal (whether or not the set value at the time of power failure occurs). For example, according to the backup data stored in the RAM, the process to return to the state at the time of power failure (power recovery process) is executed, and if the backup data is abnormal, the RAM is cleared and the device settings around the CPU (normal initial settings , interrupt timing settings, etc.).

If the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 stops during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM as backup data. Also, if the RAM clear switch 624a for instructing clearing of the backup data stored in the RAM is turned on in the power-on process, the RAM is cleared and normal initial setting is performed. Also, in the power-on processing, if backup data is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), the RAM is cleared and normal initial settings are performed.

In the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has started up to the peripheral control unit 4140 when normal initial settings are executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control unit 4140 of the activation of the main control board 4100 and the progress of the game such as the game state at the time of power-off. Even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, the backup data is stored in the RAM, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is restored. Power-on processing is executed when the supply is started.

When this power-on process ends, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process for repeatedly executing each game process. At the start of this loop process, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board. That is, since the plurality of types of devices installed in the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply board, and then each supplying the equipment. When a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board falls below a predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure warning signal indicating that the supply of power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 4100 will be stopped. sent. Then, when the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 detects a power outage warning signal in step S2, the power failure processing is executed (step S4).

In this power failure processing, when the power supply voltage (24 V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board is restored after a power failure (hereinafter referred to as power recovery), the operation of the game machine is restored from the state before the power failure. This is a process of storing the state at the time of power failure in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) as backup data in order to start. Although the details of the processing will be described later, in this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power failure processing is not an interrupt processing, but a branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

By the way, when the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power is normally supplied from the external power source, random number update processing 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S3).

[Processing when power failure occurs]
FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when power failure occurs according to the present embodiment. The power-off occurrence process is a process that is executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main process.

The main control MPU 4100a first performs interrupt prohibition settings so that interrupt processing is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM before the power failure are retained when power is restored.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM to a specified value indicating that the power failure processing has been performed (step S4c). After completing the above processing, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d), enters an infinite loop, and prepares for power supply stoppage. In addition, in this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure (hereinafter referred to as "instantaneous power failure"), and the power failure processing is started, the actual Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, the above process may not be able to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined period of time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while processing is being performed normally, but when power failure occurs processing is entered, updating is not performed. As a result, even if an instantaneous power failure causes the power failure processing to occur and an infinite loop to occur, the main control MPU 4100a is activated by the same process as when the power is turned on, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing according to this embodiment. Note that the timer interrupt processing is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment) by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100. FIG.

The main control MPU 4100a first executes a register saving process (step S10), and then executes the processes from step S11 to step S18. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring detection signals of the above-described switches (gate switch, start sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 of step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 and the random number updated in the random number update process 2 are different. In the payout operation process of step S13, a payout command for instructing the payout of game balls is set in the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

Also, in the special control process of step S14, the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186 variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the progress of the game, or the special electric accessory (that is, the attacker drive mechanism 2121 to control the opening/closing member 2106 that opens and closes the big winning opening 2103, and to change the opening/closing state of the big winning opening 2103.

In step S15, a normal control process including a lottery process for winning a normal win, which triggers the movement of the movable piece 2111, is executed. In this normal control process, basically, corresponding processes are selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. In addition, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, if a specific condition (time saving flag ON) is satisfied, the lottery processing so that the frequency of driving the movable piece 2111 is higher (so-called time-saving game state). In addition, in this embodiment, the time required for the variable display control of normal symbols is shortened for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game state, and the operation time when the movable piece 2111 operates is also set to a long time. Thus, a time-saving game state is realized in which the acceptance of game balls into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101 is easier than in the normal state (non-time-saving game state).

In the subsequent output data setting process of step S16, the process of outputting a state signal indicating the game state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (eg, management computer, etc.), outputting a drive signal to a special figure start memory display (not shown) process, etc. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting an effect command to the peripheral control section 4140 is executed. In the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the peripheral control unit 4140 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the processing from step S11 to step S17 is executed, the register restoration processing (step S18) is executed, and the processing ends.

Various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) described above will now be described. In this embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, the jackpot determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate the jackpot game state (also called jackpot determination or jackpot lottery), and the jackpot game state generated in the jackpot determination A random number for a big hit pattern used to determine the stop pattern of the special pattern when it is determined to let go, and a judgment of whether or not to generate a small hit game state instead of a big hit (also called a small hit judgment or a small winning lottery) ) used for small hit determination random number, small hit design random number used to determine the stop design of the special design when it is determined to generate a small hit game state in the small hit determination, jackpot lottery and small hit Reach judgment random number used for judgment (reach judgment) as to whether or not to perform high-expectation production such as reach production when it is judged that there is no hit in the lottery, special displayed on special pattern indicators 1185 and 1186 Variation display pattern random number (variation time random number) used to determine the symbol variation display pattern (variation time, etc.), opening mode (round number etc.), and whether the movable piece 2111 that opens and closes the special prize winning opening 2101b is controlled to the open state (the upper end is rotated clockwise around the lower end) Ordinary winning determination random numbers used for determining whether or not (ordinary lottery winning determination) are included.

In addition, the jackpot symbol random number is also used for the determination of the jackpot state type (whether or not to activate the time-saving function, etc.) when it is determined that the jackpot has been won.

Among these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, the random number for judging the big win (small win), the random number for the big win (small win) pattern, the random number for round determination, and the movable piece 2111 are opened. The random number for determining per normal symbol, which is related to whether or not to control to the normal, is updated. That is, the random number used for the big hit (small hit) lottery and the determination related to the opening/closing control of the movable piece 2111 is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing so, the probability of each random number in a predetermined period (probability of determining to generate a big win (minor winning) game state, probability of determining to control the movable piece 2111 to the open state) can be made constant. It is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, a reach determination random number, a variation display pattern random number, etc., which are not related to the big win (small win) lottery and the normal lottery, are updated.

[Special control processing]
Next, special control processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing an example of special control processing according to this embodiment.

In this special control process, first, the first and second start opening winning process (step S110) is performed. In the first and second start opening winning processing, determination as to whether or not the game ball has won the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102 is performed. Then, after the first and second start opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the second special symbol control process (step S14b) in which the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is controlled, and the first special A first special symbol control process (step S14a) for controlling the progress of the game on the symbol side is performed in sequence. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game on the side of the first special symbol (first special symbol) and the game on the side of the second special symbol (second special symbol) can fluctuate simultaneously, As a result, even if the pattern variation on one side starts, the pattern variation on the other side will not start.

[1st and 2nd starting entrance winning process]
Next, the first and second start opening winning processing (processing of step S110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing an example of the first and second starting opening winning processing of this embodiment.

In this first and second starting hole winning process (step S110), roughly speaking, a process for judging whether or not a game ball has won the first starting hole 2101 or the second starting hole 2102, and the winning On the condition that it is determined that there is a special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol), a process for updating the pending state of the corresponding special symbol is performed.

Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a detection signal has been output from the second start opening sensor 3132 . As a result, when it is determined that a detection signal has been output from the second starting opening sensor 3132, it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 2102 (YES in step S201), and then The process of step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for the second special symbol lottery (random number for judging a big hit, random number for a big hit symbol, etc.) are acquired, and the second A determination is made as to whether the value of the pending number counter is less than 1, which is the upper limit. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 1 (the second hold number counter is 0), the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs the second start suspension storage process (step S203), various data (random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers, etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of reservation. Next, as a hold history update process (step S204), 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM.

In addition, in the process of step S203, a winning notification command indicating that the game ball has won a prize to the second starting port 2102 (more precisely, the type of special symbol, the order of reservation, etc.) is set, and thus The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the command transmission process (step S17) described above. With such a configuration, when the suspension display of the second start port 2102 side is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like through the control of the peripheral controller 4140, it can be quickly updated.

On the other hand, in the processing of step S201, when it is determined that the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 3132 is not output, or in the processing of step S202, the value of the second holding number counter becomes the upper limit value. If it is determined to be 1, it is next determined whether or not a detection signal has been output from the first starting port sensor 3131 as processing in step S205. As a result, when it is determined that a detection signal has been output from the first starting hole sensor 3131, it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 2101 (YES in step S205), and then , the process of step S206 is performed. In the processing of this step S206, various random numbers for the first big win lottery (random number for judging the big win, random number for the big win design, etc.) are obtained, and the value of the first reservation number counter provided in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is the upper limit. A determination is made as to whether the value is less than four. As a result, if the first suspension number counter is less than 4, the first start suspension storage process (step S207) and the suspension history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs the first start suspension storage process (step S207), various data (random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for big hit symbols etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of reservation. Next, as a hold history update process (step S208), 1 is added to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM.

Also in the process of step S207, a winning notification command indicating that the game ball has entered the first start port 2101 (more precisely, the type of special symbol, the order of reservation, etc.) is set, and thus The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the command transmission process (step S17) described above. With such a configuration, through the control of the peripheral control unit 4140, even when the hold display on the first start port 2101 side is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like, it can be quickly updated.

On the other hand, in the process of step S205, when it is determined that there is no winning of the game ball to the first start port 2101, or in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first reservation number counter becomes the upper limit When it is determined that the number has reached 4, the first and second starting opening winning processing is ended at this point.

In this embodiment, after executing the prize winning process (steps S201 to S204) to the second start port 2102, the prize winning process to the first start port 2101 (steps S205 to S208) is executed. . However, instead of this, after executing the prize winning process for the first starting port 2101, the prize winning processing for the second starting port 2102 may be executed.

In addition, the main control MPU 4100a may execute a preceding determination process based on the acquired random numbers, and further transmit a command indicating the result of the preceding determination process to the peripheral control unit 4140 as a winning notification command. The preceding determination process is performed prior to the lottery using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, the jackpot lottery, probability variable lottery, and determination of the variable display pattern described later), and the lottery result is determined in advance. is. The precedence determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the precedence determination table. The precedence determination table is a table similar to the table used for the lottery using the random numbers. In the advance judgment process, by comparing the random number and the advance judgment table, the lottery result (whether or not the big hit (small hit) is successful, the type of the big hit, and the variation display pattern when the lottery using the random number is performed) etc.) is determined (such a determination performed prior to the lottery is also called a "prefetch determination"). The peripheral control unit 4140 may realize an effect reflecting the received prize notification command (preceding determination result) before the lottery using the random number is performed (such an effect is called "prefetching (also known as “performance”).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the contents of the precedence determination table are the same as the contents of the table used for the lottery. However, at least part of the contents of the precedence determination table may differ from the contents of the table used for the lottery.

Hereinafter, a first special symbol control process (step S14a) in which the progress of the game on the first special symbol side is controlled, and a second special symbol control process (step S14b) in which the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is controlled Each detailed procedure for and will be described. Here, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol control process (step S14a) will be explained first, unlike the control execution procedure.

[First special symbol control process]
Next, the first special symbol control processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing on the first special symbol side of the present embodiment. In the first special symbol control process, the above-described first and second start opening winning process (Figure 125) and the second special symbol control process (Figure 134) described later in the above-described special control process (Figure 124) are executed. This is a process that will be executed later.

The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the interlocking flag on the side of the first special symbol is ON (step S100a). The interlocking flag of the first special symbol is a flag that is set to ON when the game on the first special symbol side should be interlocked with the game on the second special symbol side.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a control structure in which the game on the side of the first special symbol and the game on the side of the second special symbol can proceed simultaneously. In such a control structure, there is a concern that a big hit game (small hit game) may occur redundantly between the game on the side of the first special symbol and the game on the side of the second special symbol. To avoid this, when a big win (minor win) is obtained in the game on one side, an interlocking flag indicating that the progress of the game on the other side is controlled regardless of the processing flag is turned on. Therefore, the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is set to ON state when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (small hit) in the second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) described later.

When the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is ON (YES in step S100a), the main control MPU 4100a does not perform the process (step S130a to step S200a) according to the first process flag, 1 interlocking setting processing is executed (step S250a). Details of the first interlock setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 133 .

On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a, in the process of step S100a, when the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is in the OFF state (NO in step S100a), the original game of the first special symbol side The state of the first processing flag indicating the progress of the game on the side of the first special symbol is confirmed assuming that the game is in a game state in which progress is permitted. Then, the main control MPU 4100a selectively selects the processing that matches the state of the first processing flag (the progress of the game on the first special symbol side) among the plurality of processing (step S130a to step S200a) shown in the drawing. Since it is executed, the game on the side of the first special symbol is properly progressed.

More specifically, main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the first processing flag is 0 (step S120a). 1 fluctuation start processing (step S130a) is executed. In the first variation start process (step S130a), after the setting for starting the variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the winning first special symbol lottery (first special determination), etc. 1 processing flag is updated to "1".

On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether the first processing flag is 1 (step S140a). As a result, if the first processing flag is 1 (YES in step S140a), the first variation pattern setting processing (step S150a) is executed. In this first variation pattern setting process (step S150a), the variation pattern of the first special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display device 1185 (the first special symbol (identification pattern) on the first special symbol display device 1185 After the fluctuation time from the start of the variable display of the symbol) to the stop display) is determined, the first processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first processing flag is 2 (step S160a). As a result, if the first process flag is 2 (YES in step S160a), the first process during fluctuation (step S170a) is executed. In this first fluctuation process, the timer monitors the fluctuation time set in the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S150a), and the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 1185 based on the timeout. Stop the variable display. After that, when it is determined that the jackpot is won in the first variation start process (step S130a), an interlocking flag for interlocking the game on the side of the second special symbol with the game on the side of the first special symbol is set. After being turned on, the first processing flag is updated to "3" in order to start the jackpot game. However, if the prize is not won (loss), the first processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the first fluctuation start process (step S130a) is restarted.

On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S160a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first processing flag is 3 (step S180a). As a result, if the first processing flag is 3 (YES at step S180a), a first big win game start process (step S190a) for creating an interval period before starting a big win game is executed. In addition, when the interval period before starting the jackpot game has passed, the first processing flag is updated to "4" in the first jackpot game start processing.

On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S180a), the main control MPU 4100a executes the first jackpot game start processing (step S200a). In this first jackpot game start processing, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is operated, or the time saving function is stopped. After the preparation for starting the jackpot game is completed, the first processing flag is updated to "4".

On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S180a), the main control MPU 4100a assumes that the first processing flag is 4, and executes the first jackpot game processing (step S200a). In this first jackpot game process, the mode of the jackpot game (the number of rounds, the opening time, the maximum winning number, etc.) is set, and the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2106 is controlled based on the set mode of the jackpot game. . Further, when the jackpot game ends, the processing flag is updated to "0" after the processing for stopping the operation of the conditional device is performed. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the first fluctuation start process (step S130a) is restarted.

Thus, in the processing of step S100a, when the interlocking flag indicating that the game on the side of the first special symbol should be interlocked with the game on the side of the second special symbol is in the off state, the step When one of the processes of S130a, step S150a, step S170a, step S190a, and step S200a is selectively executed based on the state of the first process flag, the first special control process within the interrupt process is is terminated.

Hereinafter, the first fluctuation start process (step S130a), the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S150a), the first fluctuation process (step S170a), the first jackpot game start process (step S190a), the first jackpot game process ( Step S200a) and the first interlocking setting process (step S250a) will be described in detail below.

[First fluctuation start process]
First, the first fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing an example of the first fluctuation start process of this embodiment. The first fluctuation start process is executed when the first process flag is "0" in the above-described first special symbol control process (FIG. 126).

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not there is a lottery process for the first special symbols in the pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter as the processing of step S301a. I do. Then, when it is determined that there is no lottery process for the first special symbol in the pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter (YES in step S301a), the interrupt process is performed. The first fluctuation start process is temporarily terminated. That is, in this case, every time the above-described interrupt process is performed, in the process of step S301a, it is determined whether or not there is a lottery process for the first special symbol in the pending state, and the pending state Until it is determined that there is a lottery process for the first special symbol, the progress of the game on the side of the first special symbol is substantially in a standby state.

On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a, in the process of step S301a, when it is determined that there is a lottery process of the first special symbol in the pending state (NO in step S301a), next step S302a As a process, it is determined whether or not the number of times of ST is zero. The number of ST is the number of lottery processes (the number of fluctuations of special symbols) in which the probability of winning a big hit is high (probability variable state), and is set at the end of the big win game in the first big win game process (FIG. 131) described later. . In this embodiment, 70 times are provided as the number of times of ST after all jackpot games are completed. Details of the jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the ST count is not 0 (NO in step S302a), the main control MPU 4100a updates the ST count by subtracting 1 as the process of step S303a. On the other hand, if the number of times of ST is 0 (YES in step S302a), the process of step S303a is not performed, and the process proceeds to step S304a.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a, as the process of step S304a, the random number group related to the lottery process of the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol holding storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a (for example, the first winning The random number group stored in the first storage area among the determination random number, the first pattern random number, the first reach random number, and the first fluctuation random number) is read out from the same RAM 4100e. Next, as the process of step S305a, a group of random numbers related to the lottery process of the first special symbol stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a (random number for first winning/losing determination , first symbol random number, first reach random number, first variable random number) are shifted in a first-in first-out manner.

More specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning in order from the first (first) area. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

Then, after that, the main control MPU 4100a counts down the first special reservation number counter as the processing of steps S306a and S307a, and the lottery processing (the first 1 special design lottery).

Here, in the first special symbol lottery according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146(A), when the jackpot winning probability state is the normal state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/399, and the jackpot is won. It is set so that a jackpot is won with a probability of 1/45 when the probability state is a variable probability state (high probability state).

Then, when the first special symbol lottery (step S307a) is performed in this way, the main control MPU 4100a next sets a flag indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery and a winning information command as the process of step S308a. do. At this time, a stop symbol is also determined according to the result of the first special symbol lottery. After that, as the process of step S309a, this process ends when the first process flag is updated to "1" so as to proceed to the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a).

It should be noted that the result of the first special symbol lottery obtained in this first variation start process is used as the winning information command set in the process of step S308a, and the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. It will be sent to the unit 4140 .

[First variation pattern setting process]
Next, the first variation pattern setting process in which the variation pattern of the first special symbol is set based on the result of the first special symbol lottery (step S307a) will be described. FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing an example of the first variation pattern setting process of this embodiment.

In the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a) executed when the first process flag is "1", as shown in FIG. If the flag indicating that is set (YES in step S401a), the variation pattern table for the big hit according to the game state is selected (step S402a), and the flag state indicates that the big win is not won. If there is (NO in step S401a), a variation pattern table for failure is selected (step S403a).

Then, the main control MPU 4100a determines a variation pattern by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the first variation random number read in step S304a in the first variation start process (step S404a), and the determined variation pattern Start the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1185 by setting the variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 4010 of starting (step S405a). In addition, the main control MPU 4100a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the first variation timer (step S406a). As a result, the variation control is performed on the first special symbol display device 1185 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 only for the variation time thus determined. After that, as the process of step S407a, this process ends when the first process flag is updated to "2" so as to proceed to the first process during fluctuation (step S170a).

The variation pattern set in this first variation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123 as the variation pattern command set in the process of step S405a. be done. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the result of the big win lottery is displayed through the control by the peripheral control section 4140 side based on the variation pattern indicated by the performance command and the information indicated by the winning information command. A display effect will be performed.

Of the variation pattern tables used in the processing of steps S402a and S403a, the variation pattern table used when in the normal gaming state (normal mode) and the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode), liquid crystal display A plurality of variation patterns (variation times) for enlivening the display effects in the device 1900 are stored. These variation patterns are set with effects (including ready-to-win effects) that make the degree of expectation for "winning" different, and one of the variation patterns is selectively determined in the process of step S405a. becomes. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table used when the high probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode), a shortened variation time (for example, 1 second) is always selected. The details of setting the variable time will be described later with reference to FIG. 146(E).

[Process during first fluctuation]
Next, referring to FIG. 129, the first process during fluctuation (step S170a) executed when the first process flag is "2" will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an example of the first during-fluctuation process of the present embodiment.

First, as the process of step S501a, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first variation timer set in the process of step S406a in the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a) has reached 0. A determination is made as to whether or not the specified variable time has elapsed. As a result, as long as it is determined that the first variable timer is not 0, that is, the set variable time has not elapsed (NO in step S501a), the first variable process (step S170a) is executed. Each time this is performed, 1 is subtracted from the first variation timer as the processing of step S521a.

As a result of such processing, when it is determined that the first variable timer has become 0 in the processing of step S501a, that is, the set variable time has elapsed (YES in step S501a) ), the main control MPU 4100a, as the processing of steps S502a and S503a, displays the already determined stop symbol (stop symbol according to the result of the first special symbol lottery) on the first special symbol display 1185. By doing so, the display control for ending the variable display is performed, and the first fixed stop command for instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is issued. It is set as a command to the peripheral controller 4140 . Note that the first fixed stop command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control section 4140 by the command transmission processing (step S17) shown in FIG. 123 . As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, through the control described later by the peripheral control section 4140 side, the result of the same display effect is determined and displayed.

After the symbol stop processing is performed in this manner, this processing is terminated when various types of processing are performed according to the result of the first special symbol lottery.

When the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (YES in step S504a), the main control MPU 4100a controls the second special symbol side in order to avoid overlapping hits on the second special symbol side. The interlocking flag of the second special symbol, which indicates that the game should be interlocked with the game of the first special symbol, is turned on (step S505a). In addition, the probability variation flag indicating that the special symbol lottery jackpot winning probability is in a high probability state (probability variation state) is turned off (step S506a). After that, when the first processing flag is updated to "3" in order to start the jackpot game (step S507a), this processing ends.

By performing such control, until the end interval of the big hit game ends and the interlocking flag of the second special symbol is turned off (first big win game processing (FIG. 131) described later) In step S726a), the game on the side of the second special symbol is stopped interlocking with the game on the side of the first special symbol regardless of the second processing flag, or the current state is maintained.

On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss (NO in step S504a), the main control MPU 4100a first checks whether the variable probability flag provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 is on. It judges (step S511a). The variable probability flag is set to ON state when the winning probability of the jackpot is shifted from normal probability (normal state) to high probability (variable probability state). Since the change of the jackpot winning probability is triggered by the occurrence of the jackpot, the probability variable flag is set at the end of the jackpot game in the first jackpot game process (FIG. 131) described later.

Then, when the variable probability flag is ON (YES in step S511a), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the number of times of ST is 0 (step S512a). When the number of times of ST is 0 (YES in step S512a), it is determined that the variable probability state has ended, and the variable probability flag is set to OFF (step S513a).

On the other hand, when the variable probability flag is OFF (NO in step S511a), the main control MPU 4100a proceeds to the process of step S514a. Also, even if the variable probability flag is ON, if the number of STs is not 0 (NO in step S512a), the variable probability state continues, so the variable probability flag is maintained in the ON state and the process proceeds to step S514a. .

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the time saving function is in operation as the process of step S514a (step S514a). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 is ON. The time saving flag is set to the ON state when the time saving function is operated in the time saving function setting process (step S725a) of the first jackpot game process (FIG. 131) described later.

Then, when the time saving function is in operation (YES in step S514a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not to stop the time saving function (step S515a). In this embodiment, the time-saving function is given together with the probability variation function triggered by the occurrence of the first big hit A, and operates while the probability variation function is continued. Therefore, when the variable probability flag is in the OFF state, it is determined to stop the time saving function, and when the variable probability flag is in the ON state, it is determined to continue operating the time saving function.

That is, the main control MPU 4100a stops the time saving function assuming that the conditions for ending the time saving gaming state are established when the probability variation flag is set to the OFF state in the processing of the above-described step S513a (step S516a). Then, after the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this way, the special symbol is stopped from fluctuating so as to indicate that it is lost, and the first processing flag is set to " 0” (step S517a), and this process ends. As a result, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation of the first special symbol is performed.

[First jackpot game start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the first jackpot game start process (step S190a) executed when the first process flag is "3" will be described. FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing an example of the first jackpot game start processing of this embodiment.

The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the timer (first jackpot start interval timer) for timing the interval before the start of the jackpot game has been set as the process of step S601a. As a result, when the first jackpot start interval timer has not yet been set (NO in step S601a), as the processing of step S602a, the condition device is operated, and as the processing of steps S603a and S604a, time saving is performed. If the function is operating (YES in step S603a), the operation is stopped. That is, after such preparations are completed, in order to start the interval before the start of the jackpot game, as the processing of steps S605a and S606a, the first jackpot start interval timer is set and the first jackpot interval start command is set. , terminate this process.

It should be noted that the first jackpot interval start command set in the process of step S606a is transmitted to the peripheral control section 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display performance during the interval before the start of the big win game appears through control described later by the peripheral control section 4140 side.

That is, after the first big hit start interval timer is set in this way, every time an interrupt process is performed, it is determined that the first big hit start interval timer has been set in the process of step S601a ( YES at step S601a), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the first big hit start interval timer is 0 in the processing of the next step S611a, that is, the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game has elapsed. A decision will be made as to whether or not And, in the processing of this step S611a, as long as the first big hit start interval timer is not 0, that is, as long as it is determined that the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game has not passed (NO in step S611a ), every time the first jackpot game start process (step S190a) is performed, the first jackpot start interval timer is subtracted by 1 as the process of step S621a.

As a result of such processing, in the processing of step S611a, it is determined that the first jackpot start interval timer has become 0, that is, the time set as the interval before the start of the jackpot game has elapsed. When (YES in step S611a), the main control MPU 4100a updates the first processing flag to "4" (step S612a) to execute a jackpot game, and ends this process.

As for the first jackpot start interval timer, the length of time can be set according to the type of jackpot pattern (the type determined by the first pattern random number).

[First jackpot game process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the 1st jackpot game process (step S200a) performed when the 1st process flag is "4" is demonstrated. FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing an example of the first jackpot game process of this embodiment.

The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the first jackpot game execution flag, which indicates that the control for executing the jackpot game is already in progress, is in the ON state as the process of step S701a. The first jackpot game execution flag is provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100, is set to the ON state in the processing of step S703a described later at the start of the first jackpot game, and is set to the OFF state in the processing of step S723a described later when the first jackpot game is started. set.

Then, when the first jackpot game execution flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S701a), the main control MPU 4100a performs the process of step S702a in order to start the control related to the execution of the jackpot game using the attacker device 2100. , the mode of opening (number of rounds, opening time of each round, maximum winning number of each round) is set according to the type of jackpot. The details of the opening modes corresponding to the types of big hits will be described later with reference to FIG. 146(C).

After the execution mode of the jackpot game is thus set, the main control MPU 4100a performs the first jackpot game execution indicating that the control for the execution of the jackpot game is already in progress as the processing of steps S703a and S704a. When the flag is turned on and the first jackpot start command is set, this process is temporarily terminated.

That is, after the first jackpot game execution flag is turned on in this way, every time an interrupt process is performed, it is determined that the control related to the execution of the jackpot game is already in progress ( YES at step S701a), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the set number of rounds has been completed as the processing of the next step S711a. And, in the processing of this step S711a, as long as it is determined that the set number of rounds has not yet been consumed, that is, it is an intermediate stage of the control related to the execution of the big hit game (NO in step S711a ), every time the first jackpot game process (step S200a) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a executes control according to the set opening pattern as the process of step S712a. As a result, each time the interrupt process is performed (every 4 ms), the opening/closing movement of the opening/closing member 2106 (including the interval between rounds) is updated (managed) through the process of step S712a. As a result, a big win game is realized in which the attacker device 2100 opens and closes with an opening pattern corresponding to the kind of big win.

Then, while such control is being performed, in the process of step S711a, when it is determined that the set number of rounds has been consumed, that is, all the control related to the execution of the big win game has been completed. (YES at step S711a), the main control MPU 4100a performs each process (step S721a, step S722a, step S731a, step S741a, step S742a) for generating a jackpot game end interval.

That is, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the timer (first jackpot end interval timer) for timing the jackpot game end interval has been set (step S721a). As a result, when the first jackpot end interval timer has not yet been set (NO in step S721a), in order to start the jackpot game end interval, the first jackpot end interval is executed as the processing of steps S741a and S742a. At the time when the timer is set and the first jackpot interval end command is set, this processing is once terminated.

In addition, the 1st jackpot interval end command set by the process of said step S742a will be transmitted to the peripheral control part 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display performance during the end interval of the big win game appears through control described later by the peripheral control section 4140 side.

That is, after the first jackpot end interval timer is set in this way, every time an interrupt process is performed, it is determined that the first jackpot end interval timer has been set in the processing of step S721a ( YES at step S721a), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first jackpot end interval timer is 0 as the processing of the next step S722a, that is, the time set as the jackpot game end interval has elapsed. A decision will be made as to whether or not And, in the processing of this step S722a, as long as it is determined that the first big hit end interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game has not passed (NO in step S722a ), each time the first jackpot game process (step S200a) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a subtracts 1 from the first jackpot end interval timer as the process of step S731a.

Then, as a result of such processing, in the processing of step S722a, when it is determined that the first big win end interval timer has become 0, that is, the time set as the end interval of the big win game has passed. Then (YES at step S722a), the main control MPU 4100a performs each process (steps S723a to S728a) for ending the big hit game.

That is, the main control MPU 4100a first turns off the first jackpot game execution flag indicating that the control for executing the jackpot game is already in progress as the process of step S723a. And next, as the process of step S724a, the probability variation flag indicating that the special symbol lottery jackpot winning probability is in a high probability state (variability state) is operated to the ON state, and the number of special symbol lotteries to be in a high probability state ( ST times) is set to 70 times. Here, the variable probability flag operated to ON state is operated to OFF state when the number of times of ST is consumed (step S513a) or when a big hit is achieved before digestion (step S506a).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the probability variation function is operated for all big hits, but if the probability variation function is operated or not according to the type of the big hit, time saving function setting processing (step S725a) described later , the process of determining whether or not it is a big hit that first activates the variable probability function may be executed. Then, in the case of a big hit that activates the variable probability function, the main control MPU 4100a turns on the variable probability flag in the same manner as in the processing of step S724a described above, and sets the number of times of ST. Also, in the case of a big hit that activates the variable probability function until the next big hit, the main control MPU 4100a only needs to turn on the variable probability flag and not set the number of times of ST.

Next, the main control MPU 4100a executes a time saving function setting process of setting whether or not to operate the time saving function according to the type of big hit and the game state as step S725a. In addition, the detail about a time saving function setting process is later mentioned in FIG.

Then, after the processing related to the variable probability function and the time saving function is performed, the main control MPU 4100a eliminates the possibility that the big hit game will occur redundantly on the second special symbol side. The above-mentioned interlocking flag indicating that the game should be interlocked with the game of the first special symbol is turned off (step S726a). After that, the operation of the conditional device is stopped (step S727a), and the first processing flag is updated to "0" assuming that the first special symbol that has become a big hit this time is in the processing stage where it is held and digested (step S728a ) and terminate this process. As a result, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation of the first special symbol is performed.

According to such a jackpot game process, until it is determined in the process of step 711a that the round game has reached the maximum number of rounds, the corresponding jackpot 2103 is opened according to the type of jackpot ( After step S712a), it is repeatedly opened, and the player can obtain prize balls corresponding to the type of the big win.

[Time saving function setting process]
Next, the time saving function setting process (step S725a) of the above-described first big hit game process (FIG. 131) will be described based on FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving function setting process of this embodiment.

The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the current big win is a big win that activates the time saving function according to the type of the big win (step S751). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146(C), which will be described later, the time-saving function is provided only when the jackpot of symbol A (first jackpot A) is won in the first special symbol lottery.

Then, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the current game mode is the rush mode (step S752) when it is a jackpot that activates the time saving function (YES in step S751). The rush mode in the present embodiment indicates a gaming state (high-probability non-time-saving gaming state) in which the variable probability function operates and the time-saving function does not operate. Therefore, specifically, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag is in the ON state and the time saving flag is in the OFF state.

The main control MPU 4100a operates the time saving flag to turn on the time saving function when the current game mode is not the rush mode (high accuracy non-time saving game state) (NO in step S752) (step S753). . After that, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a ends this process without operating the time saving flag when the current big win is not the one that activates the time saving function (NO in step S751). In addition, even when the current jackpot is a jackpot that activates the time-saving function and the current game mode is the rush mode (high-accuracy non-time-saving game state) (YES in step S752), the time-saving flag is not operated. End this process. Here, the time saving flag is set to the OFF state when the big hit game is started by the processing of steps S603a and S604a of the first big hit game start processing (FIG. 130).

Therefore, when the current game mode is the rush mode (high-accuracy non-time-saving game state), the time-saving function is activated even if the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (first big hit A) that activates the time-saving function. It will not operate. In the present embodiment, a game state (rush mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a game state (rush preparation mode) in which the time saving function is not activated, which is generally considered to be advantageous to the player, is provided. It is characterized by

[First interlock setting process]
Next, referring to FIG. 133, the first interlock setting process (step S250a) of the first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart illustrating an example of first interlock setting processing according to the present embodiment.

In the first interlocking setting process, when a big win or a small win is derived in the game of the second special symbol side, the game of the first special symbol side is controlled so as to interlock with the game of the second special symbol side.

The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the first special symbol is fluctuating (step S1001a).

Then, when the first special symbol is fluctuating (YES in step S1001a), the main control MPU 4100a determines the first special symbol lottery (step S307a) of the first fluctuation start process (FIG. 127). A stop symbol is set to a predetermined losing symbol (step S1002a).

Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs display control for ending the variable display by displaying the set losing symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 (step S1003a). Further, the first fixed stop command for instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decorative design corresponding to the stop design of the first special design is set as a command to the peripheral control section 4140 (step S1004a). . The processing of these steps S1003a and S1004a is the same as steps S502a and S503a that are performed when the variation time has expired in the above-described first processing during variation (FIG. 129).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a performs the same processing as the processing of steps S511a to S517a executed when the first special symbol is lost in the first fluctuation processing (FIG. 129) described above in the processing of steps S1005a to S1011a. After execution, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the first special symbol is not fluctuating (NO in step S1001a), the main control MPU 4100a continues the current state of the first special symbol (that is, the state where the first special symbol is not fluctuating). (step S1021a), and the process ends.

In this way, in the first interlocking setting process, when a big hit or a small hit is derived by the variation of the second special symbol (when the first interlocking flag is on), the first special symbol during variation is forcibly changed. Stop with a losing pattern. In addition, the first special symbols that are not fluctuating are placed in a standby state in which they do not start fluctuating until the first interlocking flag turns off. As a result, overlapping hits between the game on the side of the first special symbol and the game on the side of the second special symbol are avoided.

In this embodiment, in the process of step S505b of the second fluctuation process (FIG. 137), the first interlocking flag is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol ends, and in the first interlocking setting process The stop symbol already determined in the hit determination process (step S307a) of the first variation start process (FIG. 127) is changed to the lost symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. The first interlocking flag may be set to ON at the timing when variation starts according to the game state. For example, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode), when the big hit or small hit is derived in the hit determination process (step S307b) of the second variation start process (FIG. 135), the first interlocking flag is turned on be set. Then, when the hit determination process (step S307a) of the first variation start process (FIG. 127) is performed during the variation for deriving the second big win, the random number for the first hit/loss determination is not used, and no lottery is performed. You may make it determine a lost design. As a result, the variation of the first special symbol to be executed during the variation of the second special symbol from which the big hit is derived is determined at the start of the variation, thereby simplifying the processing at the timing of ending the variation of the second special symbol. can do.

Further, as a modification of the first interlocking setting process of the present embodiment, a standby state in which the fluctuation state is maintained even when the first special symbol is fluctuating may be created. In this way, when the big win is derived by the fluctuation of the first special symbol side, the control is forcibly lost, and the player loses the chance to win the first big win that should have been originally won. Gone.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 134 to 142, each detailed procedure of the second special symbol control process (step S14b) in which the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is controlled will be described.

It should be noted that the second special symbol control process may be performed by using the same program as in the case of performing the above-described first special symbol control process, and by changing various values referred to in the program.

[Second special symbol control process]
The second special symbol control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing on the second special symbol side of the present embodiment.

The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the interlocking flag on the side of the second special symbol is ON (step S100b). The interlocking flag of the second special symbol is a flag which is set to ON state when the game of the second special symbol side should be interlocked with the game of the first special symbol side.

That is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a control structure in which the game on the side of the first special symbol and the game on the side of the second special symbol can proceed simultaneously. In such a control structure, since there is a concern that a big hit game (small hit game) may occur redundantly between the game on the side of the first special symbol and the game on the side of the second special symbol, this is avoided. Therefore, when a big win (minor win) is obtained in the game on one side, at that time, the interlocking flag indicating that the progress of the game on the other side is controlled regardless of the processing flag is turned on. ing. Here, the interlocking flag of the second special symbol is set to ON state when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit in the above-described first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) (step S505a).

The main control MPU 4100a does not perform any processing (steps S130b to S240b) according to the second processing flag when the interlocking flag of the second special symbol is on (YES in step S100b). , the second interlock setting process is executed (step S250b). Details of the second interlock setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 142 .

On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a, in the process of step S100b, when the interlocking flag of the second special symbol is in the OFF state (NO in step S100b), the original game of the second special symbol side The state of the second processing flag indicating the progress of the game on the side of the second special symbol is confirmed, assuming that the game is in a state where the progress of is permitted. Then, the main control MPU4100a, out of the plurality of processes (step S130b to step S240b) shown in the figure, the process that matches the state of the second processing flag thus confirmed (the progress of the game on the second special symbol side) is selectively executed, the game on the side of the second special symbol is properly progressed.

More specifically, main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the second processing flag is 0 (step S120b). 2 fluctuation start processing (step S130b) is executed. In this second variation start process (step S130b), after the setting for starting the variation display of the second special symbol based on the result of the winning second special symbol lottery (second special determination), etc., The second processing flag is updated to "1".

On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120b), it is determined whether or not the second processing flag is 1 (step S140b). As a result, if the second processing flag is 1 (YES in step S140b), the second variation pattern setting processing (step S150b) is executed. In this second variation pattern setting process (step S150b), the variation pattern of the second special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the second special symbol display device 1186 (the second special symbol (identification pattern) on the second special symbol display device 1186 After the fluctuation time from the start of the variable display of the symbol) to the stop display) is determined, the second processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second processing flag is 2 (step S160b). As a result, if the second processing flag is 2 (YES in step S160b), the second in-varying processing (step S170b) is executed. In this second fluctuation process, the timer monitors the fluctuation time set in the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step S150b), and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 1186 based on the timeout. Stop the variable display. After that, when it is determined that the jackpot is won in the second variation start process (step S130b), an interlocking flag for interlocking the game on the side of the first special symbol with the game on the side of the second special symbol is set. After being turned on, the second processing flag is updated to "3" in order to start the jackpot game. In addition, when it is determined that a small win has been won, similarly the interlocking lag for interlocking the game on the side of the first special symbol with the game on the side of the second special symbol is turned on, and then the small win game is started. The second processing flag is updated to "5" so that However, if neither the small win nor the big win is won (loss), the second processing flag is updated to "0". Since this completes the current fluctuation, the second fluctuation start process (step S130b) is executed in the next interrupt process.

On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S160b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second processing flag is 3 (step S180b). As a result, if the second processing flag is 3 (YES at step S180b), the second jackpot game start processing (step S190b) is executed. In this second jackpot game start processing, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is operated, or the time saving function is stopped. Then, after the preparation for starting the jackpot game is completed, the second processing flag is updated to "4".

On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S180b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second processing flag is 4 (step S200b). As a result, if the second processing flag is 4 (YES at step S200b), the second jackpot game processing (step S210b) is executed. In the second jackpot game processing, the mode of the jackpot game (the number of rounds, the opening time, the maximum winning number, etc.) is set, and the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2106 is controlled based on the set mode of the jackpot game. Further, when the jackpot game ends, the second processing flag is updated to "0" after processing such as stopping the operation of the conditional device is performed. Since this completes the current fluctuation, the second fluctuation start process (step S130b) is executed in the next interrupt process.

On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S200b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second processing flag is 5 (step S220b). As a result, if the second processing flag is 5 (YES at step S220b), the second small-hit game start processing (step S230b) for creating an interval period before starting the small-hit game is executed. In addition, when the interval period before starting the small-hit game has passed, the second processing flag is updated to "6" in the second small-hit game start processing.

On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 5 (NO in step S220b), the main control MPU 4100a assumes that the second processing flag is 6, and executes the second small winning game processing (step S240b). In this second small-hit game process, a small-hit game is performed in which the opening/closing member 2106 is opened and closed in a control mode corresponding to the type of the small-hit. Further, when the small winning game ends, the second processing flag is updated to "0". Since this completes the current fluctuation, the second fluctuation start process (step S130b) is executed in the next interrupt process.

Thus, in the process of step S100b, when the interlocking flag indicating that the game on the second special symbol side should be interlocked with the game on the first special symbol side is in the OFF state, the step When any one of the processes of S130b, step S150b, step S170b, step S190b, step S210b, step S230b, and step S240b is selectively executed based on the state of the second process flag, in the interrupt process The second special control process ends.

Hereinafter, the second fluctuation start process (step S130b), the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step S150b), the second fluctuation process (step S170b), the second jackpot game start process (step S190b), the second jackpot game process ( Step S210b), the second small winning game start processing (step S230b), the second small winning game processing (step S240b), and the second interlocking setting processing (step S250b), their detailed procedures separately I will explain each.

[Second Fluctuation Start Processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 135, the second fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing an example of the second fluctuation start process of this embodiment. The second fluctuation start process is executed when the second process flag is "0" in the above-described second special symbol control process (FIG. 134).

The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not there is a lottery process for the second special symbol in the pending state based on the counter value of the second special pending number counter as the process of step S301b. Then, when it is determined that there is no lottery process for the second special symbol in the pending state based on the counter value of the second special pending number counter (YES at step S301b), the interrupt process is performed. The second fluctuation start process is temporarily terminated. That is, in this case, every time the above-described interrupt processing is performed, in the processing of step S301b, it is determined whether or not there is the second special symbol lottery processing in the pending state, and the pending state. Until it is determined that there is a lottery process for the second special symbol, the progress of the game on the side of the second special symbol is substantially in a standby state.

On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a, in the process of step S301b, when it is determined that there is a lottery process of the second special symbol in the pending state (NO in step S301b), next step S302b As a process, it is determined whether or not the number of times of ST is zero. The number of times ST is the number of times of lottery processing (variation number of special symbols) in which the winning probability of the big hit is high probability (probability variable state), and is set at the end of the big win game in the second big win game process (FIG. 139) described later. . In this embodiment, 70 times are provided as the number of times of ST after all jackpot games are completed. Details of the jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the ST count is not 0 (NO in step S302b), the main control MPU 4100a updates the ST count by subtracting 1 as the process of step S303b. On the other hand, if the number of times of ST is 0 (YES in step S302b), the process of step S303b is not performed, and the process proceeds to step S304b.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a, as the process of step S304b, the random number group (for example, the second win-loss The random number group stored in the first memory area among the determination random number, the second pattern random number, the second reach random number, and the second fluctuation random number) is read out from the same RAM 4100e. Next, as the process of step S305b, a random number group related to the lottery process of the second special symbol stored in each storage area of the second special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a (random number for the second winning/losing determination , second symbol random number, second reach random number, and second variable random number) are shifted in a First-In First-Out manner.

More specifically, the second special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning in order from the first (first) area. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the second special symbols occurs is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become. In addition, in the present embodiment, only the first area (digestion area) is valid as the second special symbol reservation storage area. That is, in the variable display control of the second special symbol of the present embodiment, as long as the second special symbol corresponding to the starting winning that occurred earlier has not finished varying, the random number extracted according to the starting winning that occurred later is stored. will not be

Then, after that, the main control MPU 4100a counts down the second special reservation number counter as the process of steps S306b and S307b, and draws a lottery process (the second 2 special design lottery).

Here, in the second special symbol lottery according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146(A), when the winning probability state is the normal state, a big hit is won with a probability of 1/399, and the winning probability state varies. In the case of the state (high probability state), it is set to win the jackpot with a probability of 1/45. In addition, when the winning probability state is the normal state, a small win is won with a probability of 390/399, and when the winning probability state is a variable state (high probability state), a small win is won with a probability of 44/45. is set.

Then, when the second special symbol lottery (step S307b) is performed in this way, the main control MPU 4100a next sets a flag indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery and a winning information command as the process of step S308b. do. At this time, a stop symbol is also determined according to the result of the second special symbol lottery. Thereafter, as the process of step S309b, this process ends when the second process flag is updated to "1" so as to proceed to the second variation pattern setting process (step S150b).

It should be noted that the result of the second special symbol lottery obtained in the second variation start process is used as the winning information command set in the process of step S308b above, and the peripheral control is performed by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. It will be sent to the unit 4140 .

[Second variation pattern setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the second variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing an example of the second variation pattern setting process of this embodiment. The second variation pattern setting process is executed when the second process flag is "1" in the above-described second special symbol control process (FIG. 134).

The main control MPU 4100a selects a variation pattern table at the time of the big hit according to the game state (step S402b) if the flag indicating that the big win is won is set (YES in step S401b), and wins the small win. If the flag indicating that it has been done is set (YES in step S403b), the variation pattern table at the time of the small hit according to the game state is selected (step S404b), and it is neither a big hit nor a small win. If the flag state indicates that (NO in step S403b), the change pattern table at the time of failure is selected (step S405b).

Then, the main control MPU 4100a determines a variation pattern by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the second variation random number read in step S304b in the second variation start process (step S406b), and the determined variation pattern Start the variable display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display device 1186 by setting the variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 4010 of starting (step S407b). In addition, the main control MPU 4100a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the second variation timer (step S408b). As a result, variation control is performed on the second special symbol display device 1186 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 only for the variation time thus determined. After that, as the process of step S409b, this process ends when the second process flag is updated to "2" so as to proceed to the second process during fluctuation (step S170b).

The variation pattern set in this second variation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123 as the variation pattern command set in the process of step S407b. be done. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, through control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side, the result of the big win lottery (small win lottery) is based on the variation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the winning information command. A display effect is performed as shown.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game on the side of the first special symbol and the game on the side of the second special symbol are played at the same time. , Through control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side, the display effect on the side of the first special pattern (variation of decorative patterns, etc.) and the display effect on the side of the second special pattern (variation of decorative patterns, etc.) are designed to appear at the same time. .

Of the variation pattern tables used in the processing of steps S402b, S404b and S405b, the variation pattern table used when in the normal gaming state (normal mode) and the high-accuracy short-time gaming state (rush preparation mode), A variable time (for example, 600 seconds) having a length of 10 times or longer than any other variable time that can be selected on the first special symbol side is always selected. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table used when the high probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode), a shortened variation time (for example, 1 second) is always selected. The details of setting the variable time will be described later with reference to FIG. 146(E).

[Second fluctuating process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the second fluctuating process (step S170b) executed when the second process flag is "2" will be described. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing an example of the second during-fluctuation process of the present embodiment.

First, as the process of step S501b, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the second variation timer set in the process of step S408b in the second variation pattern setting process (step S150b) has reached 0. A determination is made as to whether or not the specified variable time has elapsed. As a result, as long as it is determined that the second variable timer is not 0, that is, the set variable time has not elapsed (NO in step S501b), the second variable process (step S170b) is executed. Each time this is performed, 1 is subtracted from the second variation timer as the process of step S521b.

As a result of such processing, when it is determined that the second variable timer has become 0 in the processing of step S501b, that is, the set variable time has elapsed (YES in step S501b) ), the main control MPU 4100a, as the processing of step S502b and step S503b, displays the already determined stop symbol (the stop symbol according to the result of the second special symbol lottery) on the second special symbol display 1186. By doing so, the display control for ending the variable display is performed, and the second fixed stop command for instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the second special symbol is issued. It is set as a command to the peripheral controller 4140 . The second fixed stop command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control section 4140 by the command transmission processing (step S17) shown in FIG. 123 . As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, through the control described later by the peripheral control section 4140 side, the result of the same display effect is determined and displayed.

After the symbol stop processing is performed in this manner, this processing is terminated when various types of processing are performed according to the result of the second special symbol lottery.

When the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (YES in step S504b), the main control MPU 4100a controls the first special symbol side in order to avoid overlapping hits on the first special symbol side. The interlocking flag of the above-described first special symbol indicating that the game should be interlocked with the game of the second special symbol is turned on (step S505b). Also, the variable probability flag indicating that the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is in a high probability state (variable probability state) is turned off (step S506b). After that, when the second processing flag is updated to "3" in order to start the jackpot game (step S507b), this processing ends.

On the other hand, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a small win (NO in step S504b and YES in step S531b), first, the main control MPU 4100a firstly doubles the win on the first special symbol side. In order to avoid this, the first special symbol interlocking flag indicating that the game on the first special symbol side should be interlocked with the game on the second special symbol side is turned on (step S532b). ). After that, when the second processing flag is updated to "5" in order to start the small winning game (step S533b), this processing is terminated.

By performing such control, until the end interval of the jackpot game ends and the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is turned off (second jackpot game processing (FIG. 139) described later) In step S726b), the game on the first special symbol side is stopped interlocking with the game on the second special symbol side regardless of the first processing flag, or the current state is maintained.

On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss (NO in step S504b and NO in step S531b), the main control MPU 4100a first turns on the variable probability flag provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100. (step S511b). The variable probability flag is set to ON state when the winning probability of the jackpot is shifted from normal probability (normal state) to high probability (variable probability state). Since the change of the winning probability of the big win is triggered by the occurrence of the big win, the probability variable flag is set at the end of the big win game in the second big win game process (FIG. 139) described later.

Then, when the variable probability flag is ON (YES in step S511b), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the number of times of ST is 0 (step S512b). When the number of times of ST is 0 (YES in step S512b), it is determined that the variable probability state has ended, and the variable probability flag is set to OFF (step S513b).

On the other hand, when the variable probability flag is OFF (NO in step S511b), the main control MPU 4100a proceeds to the process of step S514b. Also, even if the variable probability flag is ON, if the number of STs is not 0 (NO in step S512b), the variable probability state continues, so the variable probability flag is maintained in the ON state and the process proceeds to step S514b. .

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the time saving function is in operation as the process of step S514b (step S514b). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 is ON. The time saving flag is set to the ON state when the time saving function is operated in the time saving function setting process (step S725b) of the second jackpot game process (FIG. 139) described later.

Then, when the time saving function is in operation (YES in step S514b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not to stop the time saving function (step S515b). In this embodiment, the time-saving function is given together with the probability variation function triggered by the occurrence of the first big hit A, and operates while the probability variation function is continued. Therefore, when the variable probability flag is in the OFF state, it is determined to stop the time saving function, and when the variable probability flag is in the ON state, it is determined to continue operating the time saving function.

That is, the main control MPU 4100a stops the time saving function assuming that the condition for ending the time saving gaming state is established when the probability changing flag is set to the OFF state in the processing of the above-described step S513b (step S516b). Then, after the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this way, the special symbol is stopped from fluctuating so as to indicate that it is lost, and the second processing flag is set to " 0” (step S517b), and this process ends. As a result, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation of the second special symbol is performed.

[Second jackpot game start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the second jackpot game start process (step S190b) executed when the second process flag is "3" will be described. FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing an example of the second jackpot game start processing of this embodiment.

The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the timer (second jackpot start interval timer) for timing the interval before the start of the jackpot game has been set as the process of step S601b. And as a result, when the second jackpot start interval timer has not yet been set (NO in step S601b), as the processing of step S602b, the condition device is operated, and as the processing of steps S603b and S604b, time saving is performed. If the function is operating (YES in step S603b), the operation is stopped. That is, after such preparations are completed, in order to start the interval before the start of the jackpot game, as the processing of steps S605b and S606b, the second jackpot start interval timer is set, and at the time when the second jackpot interval start command is set. , this processing is once terminated.

The second jackpot interval start command set in the process of step S606b is transmitted to the peripheral control section 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display performance during the interval before the start of the big win game appears through control described later by the peripheral control section 4140 side.

That is, after the second jackpot start interval timer is set in this way, every time an interrupt process is performed, it is determined that the second jackpot start interval timer has been set in the process of step S601b ( YES in step S601b), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the second big hit start interval timer is 0 in the process of the next step S611b, that is, the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game has elapsed. A decision will be made as to whether or not And, in the processing of this step S611b, as long as it is determined that the second big hit start interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game has not passed (NO in step S611b ), every time the second jackpot game start process (step S190b) is performed, the second jackpot start interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S621b.

As a result of such processing, in the processing of step S611b, it is determined that the second jackpot start interval timer has become 0, that is, the time set as the interval before the start of the jackpot game has passed. When (YES at step S611b), the main control MPU 4100a ends this process at the time when the second processing flag is updated to "4" (step S612b) in order to execute a jackpot game.

As for the second jackpot start interval timer, the length of time can be set according to the type of jackpot pattern (the type determined by the second pattern random number).

[Second jackpot game processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the 2nd jackpot game process (step S200b) performed when the 2nd process flag is "4" is demonstrated. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing an example of the second jackpot game process of this embodiment.

The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the second jackpot game execution flag, which indicates that the control for executing the jackpot game is already in progress, is in the ON state as the process of step S701b. The second jackpot game execution flag is provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100, is set to an ON state in the process of step S703b described later at the start of the second jackpot game, and is set to an OFF state in the process of step S723b described later when the second jackpot game is started. set.

Then, when the second jackpot game execution flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S701b), the main control MPU 4100a performs the process of step S702b in order to start the control related to the execution of the jackpot game using the attacker device 2100. , the mode of opening (number of rounds, opening time of each round, maximum winning number of each round) is set according to the type of jackpot. The details of the opening modes corresponding to the types of big hits will be described later with reference to FIG. 146(C).

After the execution mode of the big win game is thus set, the main control MPU 4100a performs the second big win game execution indicating that the control related to the execution of the big win game is already in progress as the processing of steps S703b and S704b. When the flag is turned on and the second jackpot start command is set, this process is temporarily terminated.

That is, after the second jackpot game execution flag is turned on in this way, every time an interrupt process is performed, it is determined that the control related to the execution of the jackpot game is already in progress ( YES in step S701b), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the set number of rounds has been completed as the processing of the next step S711b. And, in the processing of this step S711b, as long as it is determined that the set number of rounds has not yet been completed, that is, it is an intermediate stage of the control related to the execution of the big hit game (NO in step S711b ), every time the second jackpot game process (step S200b) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a executes control according to the set opening pattern as the process of step S712b. As a result, each time the interrupt processing is performed (every 4 ms), the movement of the opening and closing member 2106 (including the interval between rounds) is updated (managed) through the processing of step S712b. As a result, a big win game is realized in which the attacker device 2100 opens and closes with an opening pattern corresponding to the kind of big win.

Then, while such control is being performed, in the process of step S711b, when it is determined that the set number of rounds has been consumed, that is, all the control related to the execution of the big win game has been completed. (YES at step S711b), the main control MPU 4100a performs each process (step S721b, step S722b, step S731b, step S741b, step S742b) for generating a jackpot game end interval.

That is, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the timer (second jackpot end interval timer) for timing the jackpot game end interval has been set (step S721b). As a result, when the second jackpot end interval timer has not yet been set (NO in step S721b), in order to start the jackpot game end interval, the second jackpot end interval is executed as the processing of steps S741b and S742b. When the timer is set and the second jackpot interval end command is set, this processing is once terminated.

It should be noted that the second jackpot interval end command set in the process of step S742b is transmitted to the peripheral control section 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display performance during the end interval of the big win game appears through control described later by the peripheral control section 4140 side.

That is, after the second jackpot end interval timer is set in this way, it is determined that the second jackpot end interval timer has been set in the processing of step S721b each time an interrupt process is performed ( YES at step S721b), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second jackpot end interval timer is 0 in the processing of the next step S722b, that is, the time set as the jackpot game end interval has passed. A decision will be made as to whether or not And, in the processing of this step S722b, as long as the second big hit end interval timer is not 0, that is, as long as it is determined that the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game has not passed (NO in step S722b ), each time the second jackpot game process (step S200b) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a subtracts 1 from the second jackpot end interval timer as the process of step S731b.

As a result of such processing, in the processing of step S722b, when it is determined that the second jackpot end interval timer has become 0, that is, the time set as the jackpot game end interval has elapsed. Then (YES at step S722b), the main control MPU 4100a performs each process (steps S723b to S728b) for ending the big hit game.

That is, the main control MPU 4100a first turns off the second jackpot game execution flag indicating that the control for executing the jackpot game is already in progress as the process of step S723b. And next, as the process of step S724b, the probability variation flag indicating that the special symbol lottery jackpot winning probability is in a high probability state (probability variation state) is turned on, and the number of times of special symbol lottery to be in a high probability state ( ST times) is set to 70 times. Here, the variable probability flag operated to ON state is operated to OFF state when the number of times of ST is consumed (step S513b) or when a big hit is achieved before digestion (step S506b).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the probability variation function is operated for all the big hits, but if the probability variation function is operated or not according to the type of the big hit, time saving function setting processing (step S725b) described later , the process of determining whether or not it is a big hit that first activates the variable probability function may be executed. Then, in the case of a big hit that activates the variable probability function, the main control MPU 4100a turns on the variable probability flag in the same manner as in the processing of step S724b described above, and sets the number of times of ST. Also, in the case of a big hit that activates the variable probability function until the next big hit, the main control MPU 4100a only needs to turn on the variable probability flag and not set the number of times of ST.

Next, the main control MPU 4100a executes a time saving function setting process of setting whether or not to operate the time saving function according to the type of big hit and the game state as step S725b. The time saving function setting process is the same as the time saving function setting process (step S725a) in the first big hit game process (FIG. 131), and is as described above with reference to FIG.

Then, after the processing related to the variable probability function and the time saving function is performed, the main control MPU 4100a eliminates the possibility that the big hit game will occur redundantly on the first special symbol side. The above-mentioned interlocking flag indicating that the game should be interlocked with the game of the second special symbol is turned off (step S726b). And after this, the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S727b), and the second processing flag is updated to "0" as it is in the processing stage where the second special symbol that has become a big hit this time is held and digested (step S728b), this process ends. As a result, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation of the second special symbol is performed.

According to such a jackpot game process, until it is determined in the process of step 711b that the round game has reached the maximum number of rounds, the corresponding jackpot 2103 is opened according to the type of jackpot ( After step S712b), it is repeatedly opened, and the player can obtain prize balls according to the type of the big win.

[Second Small Hit Game Start Processing]
Next, with reference to Drawing 140, the 2nd small hit game start processing (Step S230b) performed when the 2nd processing flag is "5" is explained. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing an example of the second small winning game start processing of the present embodiment.

The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the timer (second small-hit start interval timer) for timing the interval before the start of the small-hit game has been set as the process of step S801b. And as a result, when the second small hit start interval timer has not yet been set (NO in step S801b), in order to start the interval before the start of the small hit game, the second This processing is temporarily terminated at the time when the small hit start interval timer is set and the second small hit interval start command is set.

In addition, the 2nd small hit interval start command set by the process of said step S803b will be transmitted to the peripheral control part 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display performance during the interval before the start of the small winning game appears through control described later by the peripheral control section 4140 side.

That is, after the second small hit start interval timer is set in this way, it is determined that the second small hit start interval timer has been set every time the interrupt process is performed (YES in step S801b ), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second small hit start interval timer is 0 in the process of the next step S811b, that is, the time set as the interval before the start of the small hit game has passed. It will be done. And, in the processing of this step S811b, as long as it is determined that the second small hit start interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the interval before the start of the small hit game has not passed (in step S811b NO), every time the second small-hit game start process (step S230b) is performed, the second small-hit start interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S821b.

Then, as a result of such processing, in the processing of step S811b, the second small hit start interval timer has become 0, that is, it is determined that the time set as the interval before the start of the small win game has passed. (YES at step S811b), the main control MPU 4100a terminates this process at the time when the second processing flag is updated to "6" (step S812b) in order to execute a small hit game.

[Second Small Hit Game Processing]
Next, with reference to Drawing 141, the 2nd small hit game processing (Step S240b) performed when the 2nd processing flag is "6" is explained. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing an example of the second small winning game process of this embodiment.

The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the second small-hit game execution flag indicating that the control related to the execution of the small-hit game is already in progress as the process of step S901b is in the ON state. do. The second small-hit game execution flag is provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100, is set to ON state in the processing of step S903b described later at the start of the second small-hit game, and is turned off in the processing of step S921b described later at the end state.

Then, when the second small-hit game execution flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S901b), the main control MPU 4100a starts the control for executing the small-hit game using the attacker device 2100, step S902b. As the process of (1), an opening mode (opening pattern) corresponding to the type of small win and a control timer for measuring the time required for executing the control related to the opening pattern are set respectively. It should be noted that there is one kind of small hit in this embodiment. The details of the opening mode of the small hit will be described later with reference to FIG. 146(D).

Next, the main control MPU 4100a turns on the second small-hit game execution flag indicating that the control related to the execution of the small-hit game is already in progress as the processing of steps S903b and S904b. , when the second small winning start command is set, this process is temporarily terminated.

That is, after the second small-hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, every time an interrupt process is performed, it is determined that the control related to the execution of the small-hit game is already in progress. (YES in step S901b), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the control timer is 0 in the process of the next step S911b, that is, whether or not the timing for ending the control for executing the small winning game has arrived. judgment will be made. And, in the processing of this step S911b, the control timer is not 0, that is, as long as it is determined that it is in the middle stage of the control related to the execution of the small winning game (NO in step S911b), the second small winning Each time the game process (step S240b) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a first executes the opening/closing control of the attacker device 2100 according to the set opening pattern as the process of step S912b. As a result, every time the interrupt process is performed (every 4 ms), the opening/closing movement of the opening/closing member 2106 is updated (managed) through the process of step S912b. A game is realized.

And, while such control is being performed, in the process of step S911b, the control timer is 0, that is, if it is determined that all the control related to the execution of the small hit game is completed (step S911b YES), the main control MPU 4100a performs each process (step S921b to step S929b) for ending the small hit game.

The main control MPU 4100a first turns off the second small-hit game execution flag indicating that the control for executing the small-hit game is already in progress as the process of step S921b. Next, in view of the fact that there is no longer a possibility that the jackpot game will occur redundantly on the first special symbol side, it is in a state where the game on the first special symbol side should be interlocked with the game on the second special symbol side. The interlocking flag of the first special symbol shown is turned off (step S922b).

Further, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the variable probability flag provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 is on (step S923b). Then, when the variable probability flag is ON (YES in step S923b), it is determined whether or not the number of times of ST is 0 (step S924b). When the number of times of ST is 0 (YES in step S924b), it is determined that the variable probability state has ended, and the variable probability flag is set to OFF (step S925b).

On the other hand, when the variable probability flag is OFF (NO in step S923b), the main control MPU 4100a proceeds to the process of step S926b. Also, even if the variable probability flag is ON, if the number of STs is not 0 (NO in step S924b), the variable probability state continues, so the variable probability flag is maintained on and the process proceeds to step S926b. .

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the time saving function is in operation as the process of step S926b. Then, when the time saving function is in operation (YES in step S926b), it is determined whether or not to stop the time saving function (step S927b). In this embodiment, the time-saving function is given together with the probability variation function triggered by the occurrence of the first big hit A, and operates while the probability variation function is continued. Therefore, when the variable probability flag is in the OFF state, it is determined to stop the time saving function, and when the variable probability flag is in the ON state, it is determined to continue operating the time saving function.

That is, the main control MPU 4100a stops the time saving function assuming that the condition for ending the time saving gaming state is established when the probability variation flag is set to the OFF state in the processing of the above-described step S925b (step S928b). Then, after the processing related to the variable probability function and the time saving function is performed in this way, the second processing flag is updated to "0" assuming that the special symbol from which the small hit is derived is held and digested (step S929b). , terminate this process. As a result, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation of the second special symbol is performed.

[Second interlock setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the second interlocking setting process (step S250b) of the second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart illustrating an example of second interlock setting processing according to the present embodiment.

In the second interlocking setting process, when a big hit is derived in the game of the first special symbol side, the game of the second special symbol side is controlled so as to interlock with the game of the first special symbol side.

The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the second special symbol is fluctuating (step S1001b).

Then, when the second special symbol is fluctuating (YES in step S1001b), the main control MPU 4100a determines the second special symbol lottery (step S307b) of the second fluctuation start process (FIG. 135). A stop symbol is set to a predetermined losing symbol (step S1002b).

Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs display control for ending the variable display by displaying the set losing symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 (step S1003b). In addition, the second fixed stop command for instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decorative design corresponding to the stop design of the second special design is set as a command to the peripheral control section 4140 (step S1004b). . The processing of these steps S1003b and S1004b is the same as steps S502b and S503b that are performed when the variation time has expired in the above-described second processing during variation (FIG. 137).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a performs the same processing as the processing of steps S511b to S517b executed when the second special symbol is lost in the above-described second fluctuation processing (FIG. 137) in the processing of steps S1005b to S1011b. After execution, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol is not fluctuating (NO in step S1001b), the main control MPU 4100a continues the current state of the second special symbol (that is, the state where the second special symbol is not fluctuating). (step S1021b), and the process ends.

In this way, in the second interlocking setting process, when the big hit is derived by the variation of the first special symbol (when the second interlocking flag is on), the second special symbol during variation is forced to be the losing symbol. to stop. In addition, the second special symbol which is not being changed is placed in a waiting state in which the change is not started until the second interlocking flag is turned off. As a result, overlapping hits between the game on the side of the second special symbol and the game on the side of the first special symbol are avoided.

[Processing on normal symbol side]
Next, the normal control process (step S15) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. FIG. In the normal control process, normal symbol variation control (normal symbol lottery) is executed based on the passage of the game ball of the normal pattern gate 2301, and when a hit (normal pattern lottery) occurs in the normal pattern lottery, the movable piece (normal Winning assistance control is executed to operate the electric accessory) 2111 to facilitate the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b.

[Normal control process]
FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal control process of this embodiment.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not the gate sensor 2302 for detecting the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 2301 is in the ON state (step S2001). Then, when the gate sensor 2302 detects the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 2301 and is in the ON state (YES in step S2001), the main control MPU 4100a calculates the normal random number of the normal pattern by the random number counter. Gate passage processing such as acquiring from and storing this in the normal symbol reservation storage area of RAM is executed (step S2010). Details of the gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main control MPU 4100a is one of five process processes (normal symbol normal process, normal symbol fluctuation time determination process, normal symbol change process, normal symbol stop process, normal electric accessory release process) according to the normal symbol process flag. Selectively execute one to end the normal control process.

First, in the normal symbol normal process of step S2100, the main control MPU4100a reads out the normal random number stored in the RAM4100e of the main control MPU4100a, and based on the read normal random number, determines the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped. Execute lottery processing and the like.

Next, in the normal symbol fluctuation time determination process of step S2200, the main control MPU 4100a performs lottery processing and the like for the normal symbol fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) displayed on the normal symbol display device 1189 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number. Run.

Next, in the normal symbol variation process of step S2300, the main control MPU 4100a executes a process of waiting until the normal symbol display of the normal symbol display 1189 is stopped.

Next, in the normal symbol stop processing of step S2400, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the mode of the normal symbol variation control stop is normal, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode of the normal symbol variation control stop. A process for stopping the variable display of normal symbols so as to be displayed on the symbol display 1189 is executed.

Next, in the normal electric accessory opening process of step S2500, the main control MPU 4100a is movable when the result of the lottery process for the mode of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal symbol indicates "per normal symbol". A piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 is operated to execute a process of controlling the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first start opening 2101. - 特許庁

In addition, the normal design process flag is manipulated to indicate that normal design normal processing (step S2100) should be performed in the process of initializing data stored in various registers and main control built-in RAM 4100e.

[Gate passage processing]
Next, the gate passing process (step S2010) of the normal control process (FIG. 143) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing the procedure of gate passage processing according to this embodiment.

The main control MPU 4100a first acquires the counter value of the normal holding number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a, and based on the counter value, the number of holding normal symbols is a value less than "4", which is the maximum value. It is determined whether or not (step S2011).

Then, when the number of reserved normal symbols is less than the maximum value (YES in step S2011), the main control MPU 4100a puts the variable display control of normal symbols in a state of new suspension, step S2012. to execute the processing of S2014. First, as the process of step S2012, the normal pending number counter is counted up (1 is added). Then, as the process of step S2013, normal random numbers and normal pattern fluctuation random numbers are obtained from the random number counter. Then, as the process of step S2014, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. After that, the gate passage processing is terminated.

On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a does not newly suspend the variable display control of the normal symbols when the number of suspensions of the normal symbols is the maximum value (NO in step S2011). In other words, the gate passage processing ends without executing the processing of steps S2012 to S2014.

[Normal pattern normal processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 145, normal design normal processing (step S2100) of the normal control processing (FIG. 143) described above will be described. The normal design normal process is executed when the normal design process flag indicates that this process should be performed in the normal control process described above. FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing the procedure of normal symbol normal processing of the present embodiment.

The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the pending state based on the counter value of the normal pending number counter (step S2101). As a result, when it is determined that there is variable display control of the normal symbols in the pending state (YES in step S2101), the normal symbols stored in the normal symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a Of the random numbers related to the display mode (for example, normal random numbers, normal pattern fluctuation random numbers), the random number stored in the first storage area is read out from the same RAM (step S2102). Then, while performing a countdown to subtract 1 from the normal reservation number counter (step S2103), it is related to the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation display of the normal symbols stored in each storage area of the normal reservation storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a Random numbers (ordinary random numbers, normal fluctuation random numbers) are shifted in a first-in first-out manner (step S2104).

Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a stores a random number extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the general pattern gate 2301 in order from the first (earmost) region of the normal pattern reservation storage region having 4 storage regions. do. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 2301, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the first storage area are satisfied, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area is read. , is moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbols occurs is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension).

Next, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state (step S2105). And, if the current game state is the time-saving game state (YES in step S2105), the normal figure per determination table (not shown) during time-saving is selected (step S2106), and the current game state is the non-time-saving game state If so (NO in step S2105), a non-time saving normal pattern per determination table (not shown) is selected (step S2107). After that, the general pattern hit determination table selected in the process of step S2106 or step S2107 is compared with the normal random numbers read out in the process of step S2102 (step S2108).

In addition, the normal pattern hit determination table is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and the normal pattern hit determination table used when the game state is short time and the normal pattern hit determination table used when the game state is non-short time. It is provided with a normal figure per determination table for non-time saving. Then, in the time-saving normal pattern hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal pattern per decision value, which indicates that the normal pattern has been elected. Ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so that they do not coincide with the normal diagram deviation judgment value indicating that it is a deviation. In this way, in the time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 2301, the winning is always per normal figure, and the movable piece (normal electric accessory) 2111 is operated to operate the first start port 2101. It is controlled so that the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b is possible.

In addition, in the non-short-time normal pattern hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, all 255 types of normal random numbers can match the normal pattern per decision value indicating that they have been elected per normal pattern. Instead, the normal random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the normal pattern deviation determination value indicating that the normal pattern is out. Thus, in the non-time-saving gaming state, even if there is a passage of the game ball to the normal figure gate 2301, because there is no winning per normal figure, through the opening operation of the movable piece (normal electric accessories) 2111 It is not controlled so that the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 is possible. It should be noted that, as described above, even in the non-time-saving gaming state may be able to obtain the hit of the normal pattern, in this case the probability of winning lower than the time-saving gaming state (for example, 50%), the lottery result of the normal pattern is When a win is achieved, the movable piece 2111 of the special prize winning port 2101b is opened for a time shorter than the time saving game state, for example, 0.1 seconds, and the closing operation is performed after enabling the game ball to enter the special prize winning port 2101b. It is also possible to disable the winning of game balls into the special winning opening 2101b.

The main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the result of the process of step S2108 is a normal game (step S2109). Then, in the case of per normal pattern (YES in step S2109), after setting the per normal pattern flag indicating that the variation of the normal pattern is elected per normal pattern (step S2110), the normal pattern A general pattern per pattern is determined as a mode (normal pattern stop pattern) at the time of fluctuation control stop (step S2112).

On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a, as a result of the processing of step S2108 described above, if it is lost (NO in step S2109), the normal pattern as a mode of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol) A missing symbol is determined (step S2111).

After the processing of step S2112 or step S2111 ends, the main control MPU 4100a updates the above-mentioned normal design process flag (step S2113) so that the process shifts to the normal design fluctuation time determination process (step S2200), and ends this process. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning probability of normal symbols in the non-working time saving game state in which the time saving function does not operate is set to 0%, and the winning winning probability of normal symbols in the time saving game state in which the time saving function operates is set to 100%. However, it is not limited to this. Winning frequency (winning probability) of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first start opening 2101 in the time saving game state is higher than the winning frequency (winning probability) of the game ball to the regular winning opening 2101a, that is, the time saving game In the state, it is sufficient if it is a normal pattern game spec (per normal pattern winning probability, normal pattern fluctuation time, normal electric accessory opening pattern) that can guide the player to hit right instead of hitting left. Specifically, in the time-saving game state, the normal pattern probability variation function that increases the probability of winning per normal pattern compared to the non-time-saving game state, the normal pattern fluctuation reduction function that shortens the normal pattern fluctuation time, and the opening operation by normal electric accessories At least one function is provided among the utility power open extension functions for extending (winning assist control). As a result, in the time-saving gaming state, the enhanced winning assistance control that is further enhanced from the winning assistance control set in the non-time-saving gaming state is executed.

[Special design game specs]
FIG. 146 is an example of various tables showing the game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of this embodiment.

First, with reference to FIG. 146(A), the winning winning probability in the first special symbol lottery of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146(A), in the first special symbol lottery of the present embodiment, when the winning probability is normal (low probability state), the winning probability is 1/399. Also, in the case of a variable probability state (high probability state) in which the probability of winning is set higher than that of the normal state, a big win is won with a probability of 1/45. In addition, in the hit in the first special symbol lottery of the present embodiment, only the big win with the conditional device activated occurs, and the small win with the conditional device not activated does not occur. In the hit determination process (step S307a) of the above-described first variation start process (FIG. 127), a big hit determination is made with a winning probability of 1/399 or 1/45 according to the probability state at the time of lottery execution.

Next, with reference to FIG. 146(B), the hit probability in the second special symbol lottery of this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146(B), hits in the second special symbol lottery of this embodiment include a big hit and a small hit. The jackpot winning probability in the second special symbol lottery is the same as the jackpot winning probability in the above-described first special symbol lottery. The probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is that when the probability of winning a big win is in a normal state (low probability state), the probability of winning a small win is 390/399, and the probability of winning a big win is in a variable state (high probability state). , the small win is won with a probability of 44/45. The small winning probability is a fixed probability regardless of the game state, and unlike the big winning winning probability, it does not change between a normal state and a probability variable state. In the hit determination process (step S307b) of the above-described second variation start process (FIG. 135), a big hit determination is made with a winning probability of 1/399 or 1/45 according to the probability state at the time of lottery execution, and 390/399. Alternatively, a small hit determination is made with a winning probability of 44/45.

Thus, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is set high. Especially, in the second special symbol lottery in the variable probability state, when the big win is not won, the small win is always won. It should be noted that the small win may not always be won when the big win is not won. Here, the small win may be won with a much higher probability than the probability of losing when the big win is not won in the second special symbol lottery in the variable probability state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 146(C), the types of jackpots of this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146(C), the big hits of this embodiment include the first big win A and the first big win B that can occur in the first special symbol lottery, and the second big win that can occur in the second special symbol lottery. A total of four types of jackpots, A and the second jackpot B, are provided.

The first big win A occurs with a probability of 75% when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big win, and the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped at the symbol A at this time. In addition, the first big win B occurs with a probability of 25% when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big win, and the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped at the symbol B at this time.

The second big win A occurs with a probability of 50% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big win, and the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped at the symbol A at this time. Also, the second big win B occurs with a probability of 50% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big win, and the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped at the symbol B at this time.

These four types of big wins are probability changes in which the game state after the end of the big win game is shifted to the variable probability state with a probability of 100%, and the variable probability state is continued until the number of fluctuations of the special symbols after the big win game is executed 70 times. It is provided so that a function can be given. In addition, the first jackpot A can be provided with a time-saving function to perform winning assist control to operate the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 to assist the winning of the game ball to the special winning port 2101b of the first start port 2101. provided in

In addition, the opening mode of the big winning hole 2103 is set according to the kind of big win, and the first big win A, the first big win B, the second big win A and the second big win B have opening patterns A, B and C, respectively. and D are set. Here, the number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player is changed according to the release pattern, thereby enhancing the interest of the big win game.

The opening patterns A to C are set so that the opening time of the big winning hole 2103 is long and the player can win enough prize balls. For example, the opening pattern A and the opening pattern B are jackpot games in which round games are played four times, and the opening time and the maximum winning number of each round are set so that the player can win 500 prize balls. The opening pattern C is a jackpot game in which round games are played 16 times, and the opening time of each round and the maximum winning number are set so that the player can obtain 2000 prize balls.

On the other hand, the opening pattern D is set so that the opening time of the big winning hole 2103 is short and the player cannot win enough prize balls. For example, the opening pattern D is a jackpot game in which round games are played 16 times, and is set so that the player cannot actually win prize balls by repeating high-speed opening with a short opening time per time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 146(D), the small hit kind of this embodiment is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 146(D), the small win of this embodiment is provided with a second small win C that can occur in the second special symbol lottery. The second small win C is generated with a probability of 100% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a small win, and the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped at the symbol C at this time. Further, an opening pattern E is set for the opening mode of the big winning opening 2103 in the small winning game. The opening pattern E has a short opening time, and is provided so that prize balls can be obtained by accidental winning. Here, the accidental winning does not mean that the player hits a game ball into the game area with the intention of winning the big winning opening 2013, but does It means a prize that can be obtained by accidentally flowing down a prize-winning position when the game ball that has been hit is opened. In the second small win C, the number of rounds and the opening time of the big winning hole 2013 are so that if the player hits the game ball with the right hand, about 1 to 2 balls can be expected to win by accident. is set. When about 1 to 2 balls are won in the big winning hole 2013 by the second small hit C, about 15 to 30 prize balls can be obtained.

In addition, in the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode) of the present embodiment, the second small hit C is provided so that it occurs frequently, and the player continuously hits the game ball to the right to hit the rush mode. It is possible to promote accidental winnings based on the second small hit C that occurs during the rush mode, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained is the majority of the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the rush mode (total number of winning balls). will occupy In this embodiment, when the second small hit C (maximum 30 balls) with the number of STs (70 times) occurs during the rush mode, prize balls (maximum 2100 balls) greater than or equal to the prize balls (2000 balls) due to the big hit described above ), there is no loss of interest in the game due to the occurrence of small hits in which almost no prize balls are obtained. Rather than one big winning game, a small winning game that occurs multiple times keeps the player interested in the game, so that the series of games in the rush mode can be more interesting.

Also, with reference to FIG. 146(E), the variation time of the special symbol of this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146(E), the variation time of the special symbol of this embodiment differs according to the game mode (game state). The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to 30 seconds to 60 seconds depending on the presence or absence of the reach effect when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and 1 second when the game mode is the rush mode. set. Further, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 600 seconds when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and is set to 1 second when the game mode is the rush mode.

Here, the normal mode is a game mode that encourages the player to win a game ball into the regular winning opening 2101a of the first start opening 2101 (that is, "left shot"), and is a special symbol lottery jackpot winning probability indicates a normal state (low probability state) and a normal game state in which the time saving function is not given. In addition, the rush preparation mode is a game mode that encourages the player to win a game ball into the special winning opening 2101b of the first start opening 2101 (that is, "right shot"), and is a special symbol lottery jackpot winning probability indicates a highly-probable time-saving gaming state in which the probability variable state (high-probability state) and the time-saving function are given. In addition, the rush mode is a game mode that encourages the player to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2102 (that is, "right-handed"), and the special symbol lottery jackpot winning probability is a variable state (high probability state) and shows a high-quality non-time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving function is not given. It should be noted that the high-probability short-time gaming state of the rush preparation mode is a gaming state that can be shifted to when the above-described first big hit A occurs.

In this way, the above specs (hit winning probability, hit type, fluctuation time, etc.) change according to the game state of the special symbol game provided to the player. Then, the transition from the normal game state to the advantageous game state advantageous to the player is triggered by the occurrence of a big hit, and the transition from the advantageous game state to the normal game state is a special for the number of STs given (here, 70 times). Triggered by the digestion of the design lottery (fluctuation).

[Transition of game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 147 to 149, the transition of the game state and the control of the simultaneous variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in each game state will be described. FIG. 147 is a diagram showing the transition of the game state (game mode) of this embodiment.

(normal mode)
First, the game mode at the start of the game is the normal game state (normal mode). In the normal game state, the game ball is shot (so-called "left hitting") aiming at the game area 1100 on the left side of the center accessory 2500, so that the game ball wins the regular prize opening 2101a of the first start opening 2101.例文帳に追加is the best playing method for the player.

Here, the second starting port 2102 of the present embodiment allows a game ball launched (so-called “right-handed hitting”) aimed at the game area 1100 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 to easily win a prize simply by following the flowing path. is provided in Then, the second special symbol lottery based on the winning to the second starting port 2102 has a high winning probability of winning a prize ball (390/399 in the normal state, 44/45 in the variable probability state). In this case, the player tries to hit the game ball to the right from the start of the game to aim for the winning prize of the game ball to the second start hole 2102 . Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146(E) described above, the second special symbol variation in the gaming state (normal mode, rush preparation mode) in which the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is not recommended The time is set to long-term variation (600 seconds). As a result, in both modes, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, it takes a long time until it is stopped and displayed (the result of the lottery becomes clear), so that it is possible to suppress the player's hitting to the right. .

In addition, since the second starting port 2102 of the present embodiment is always open and easy to win, the second special Although the pattern fluctuation time is set to a long time, it is not limited to this. A state conversion member capable of converting the second starting port 2102 into an easy-winning state and a difficult-winning state is provided, and winning is won in a game state (normal mode, rush preparation mode) in which winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is not recommended. You may make it set to a difficult state. In this embodiment, in order to avoid complication of the configuration and processing related to the control of the state changing member and to provide a game that is easy for the player to grasp, the variation time is changed according to the game state. We are inducing you to play with the best game method.

Therefore, in the normal game state, the first special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (regular winning port 2101a) is mainly executed. Then, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss, the normal game state is continued, while when the result of the first special symbol lottery is the first big hit A, the high probability time-saving game state (rush preparation mode, first advantageous game state). Also, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is the first jackpot B, the game shifts to a high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode, second advantageous game state).

In addition, as described above, in the normal game state, the variation time of the second special symbol is set long in order to suppress the occurrence of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, the possibility of finding out the result of the second special symbol lottery in the normal game state (occurrence of the game state transition triggered by the second big hit of the second special symbol) is extremely low.

(rush preparation mode)
Next, a description will be given of the case where the game state has shifted from the normal game state (normal mode) to the high-probability time-saving game state (rush preparation mode). At the time of this state transition, the player is given a benefit advantageous to the player, namely, the winning of prize balls and the provision of a variable probability function and a time saving function by the occurrence of the first jackpot A.例文帳に追加

In the high-probability time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode), by shooting a game ball aiming at the game area 1100 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called "right hitting"), the special winning opening 2101b of the first start opening 2101 It is the best game method for the player to let the game ball win the prize.

Here, when the game ball struck to the right passes through the normal pattern gate 2301 arranged in the game area 1100 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the normal pattern lottery draws the normal pattern hit because the time saving function is operating. (100% probability per normal figure in time saving state). As a result, the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 is operated to facilitate the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101. In addition, as described above, in the time-saving gaming state, the winning frequency (winning probability) of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first start opening 2101 is higher than the winning frequency (winning probability) of the game ball to the regular winning opening 2101a. Since it is set high, the player hits to the right and aims at the special prize winning opening 2101b.

Therefore, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the first special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (special winning port 2101b) is executed. Then, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss for 70 consecutive times, the game shifts to a normal game state (normal mode). In addition, when the result of the first jackpot A is derived before the special symbol lottery is executed 70 times, the number of ST is reset to 70 times and this game state (rush preparation mode, first advantageous game state). to continue. In addition, when the result of the first jackpot B is derived before the special symbol lottery is executed 70 times, the game shifts to a high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode, second advantageous game state).

In addition, as described above, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set long in order to suppress the occurrence of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, the possibility of finding out the result of the second special symbol lottery in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (occurrence of the game state transition triggered by the second big hit of the second special symbol) is extremely low.

(rush mode)
Next, a description will be given of a case where the game state shifts from the normal game state (normal mode) or the high probability time-saving game state (rush preparation mode) to the high probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode). At the time of this state transition, the player is given a benefit advantageous to the player, namely, winning of a prize ball and provision of a variable probability function due to the occurrence of the first big win B.例文帳に追加

In the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode), the game ball is shot (so-called "right hitting") aiming at the game area 1100 on the right side of the center role 2500, so that the game ball wins the second start port 2102. It is the best game method for the player to let them do so.

Here, the second starting port 2102 of this embodiment is provided downstream of the game area 1100 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 . For this reason, the game ball hit to the right reaches the second starting port 2102 after flowing down the movable area of the movable piece 2111 of the normal figure gate 2301 and the special winning opening 2101b, but since the time saving function does not operate, the normal figure gate Even if it passes through 2301, normal game hit (that is, easy winning state of special winning opening 2101b by operation of movable piece 2111) does not occur. Therefore, the game ball hit to the right in the high probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode) almost wins the second starting port 2102.

Therefore, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the second special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is mainly executed. Execution of the first special symbol lottery is limited to the first special symbol lottery put on hold in the game state before the shift when the game state shifts. Then, when the result of the special symbol lottery in this game state is not a big hit for 70 consecutive times, the game is shifted to a normal game state (normal mode). In addition, when the result of any one of the big hits is derived before the special symbol lottery is executed 70 times, the ST number is reset to 70 times and this game state (rush mode, second advantageous game state) is changed. continue.

In addition, in the second special symbol lottery in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, when the big hit is not derived with a probability of 1/45, the small hit is always derived. Then, in the small winning game that occurs at this time, the player can acquire a small number of game balls (for example, 30 balls) as prize balls, although the number is less than the number of game balls that can be acquired in the big winning game. Therefore, in the main game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by the small winning game each time the second special symbol lottery is executed until the next big winning. And, in this game state, a maximum of 70 small winning games can occur continuously. That is, the series of games of the second special symbol until the occurrence of the next big hit becomes the privilege game in which prize balls can be obtained.

In addition, both the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state are set to a short time (1 second). Since it is recommended to execute the second special symbol lottery in this game state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to a long time (600 seconds) so that it takes time to find out the result of the first special symbol lottery. It is also conceivable to However, in this embodiment, the duration of the variable probability function is controlled by the number of executions of special symbols (the number of STs), and the number of STs is counted when the special symbols start to fluctuate. For this reason, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol to which the probability variation function is to be imparted is long, the first special symbol is granted the probability variation function, but the second special symbol is not granted the probability variation function. can occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, by setting the variation time of the first special symbol to the same short time as the second special symbol, the probability state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the simultaneous variation state are different. It prevents occurrence (obscuring the end of the probability change state). In addition, as a modification, when the end of the provision period of the variable probability function is controlled until the occurrence of the next big hit, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the game state may be set to a long time. In this embodiment, when one special symbol lottery leads to a big hit, it is possible to forcibly stop the other special symbol lottery during simultaneous variation, so the end of the probability variation state as described above is unclear. no transformation occurs.

Thus, in this embodiment, the high probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode) can win prize balls in a series of small hit games with the second special pattern even if the big hit is not derived, and the total number of prize balls is greater than the number of winning balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game that occurs in the same mode. Therefore, the most advantageous gaming state for the player is not the high-probability time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode, first advantageous gaming state) but the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode, second advantageous gaming state).

Since the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode) is a gaming state that can occur when the first big hit B is derived in the first special symbol lottery, the player must first enter the normal gaming state (normal mode) or high A game aiming at winning a game ball to the first start port 2101 is performed in a fixed working hours game state (rush preparation mode). Then, when the game state shifts to a high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode) triggered by the occurrence of the first big hit B, the player next starts a game aiming at winning the game ball to the second start port 2102. conduct.

[Control timing chart for each game state]
As described above, in this embodiment, the game on the side of the first special symbol (first special symbol) and the game on the side of the second special symbol (second special symbol) can fluctuate simultaneously. However, the big winning game and the small winning game using the attacker device 2100 cannot be generated redundantly in both games. Then, with reference to FIG.148 and FIG.149, the timing of the simultaneous variation control in each game state is demonstrated.

(Simultaneous fluctuation control timing chart)
FIG. 148 is an example of a timing chart for explaining the simultaneous variation control of this embodiment. FIG. 148(A) is an example of interlocking stop control of the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 142) in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and FIG. ) is an example of interlocking stop control.

As shown in FIG. 148 (A), in the normal mode (normal game state) and the rush preparation mode (high-accuracy short-time game state), when the game ball enters the second start port 2102, the second special symbol changes. The time (second variation time) is set to 600 seconds, and the long-term variation is started. Then, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 2101 (regular winning port 2101a or special winning port 2101b), the variation time (first variation time) of the first special symbol is set to 30 seconds to 60 seconds, and is set in the order of winning. Variation of 1 special design is executed.

In the game on the side of the first special symbol, when the big win is derived, the variation is stopped at the stop symbol of the first big win (step S502a), and the game on the side of the second special symbol is interlocked with the side of the first special symbol. The interlocking flag (second interlocking flag) to be activated is set to ON state (step S505a). Then, the first jackpot game is executed (steps S190a, S200a).

Then, in the game on the side of the second special symbol, the second interlocking setting process (step S250b, FIG. 142) is executed in response to the fact that the second interlocking flag is turned on, and the second special symbol during variation is It is forced to stop and display with the stop symbol that is out (step S1003b).

Here, the second interlocking flag is a big hit game or small hit in which the attacker device 2100 is similarly used on the second special symbol side when the first big win game in which the attacker device 2100 is used on the first special symbol side is executed. This flag is provided for avoiding the execution of the game, but it is also a necessary flag for preparing to enter the rush mode.

Specifically, when the first big hit B occurs in the normal mode (normal game state) and the rush preparation mode (high-probability short-time game state), the game state after the first big win game ends is the rush mode (high Certain non-time-saving game state). In the rush mode after the shift, the game on the second special symbol side based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 becomes mainstream. At this time, if the variation of the second special symbol started before the transition is continued, the game on the side of the second special symbol waits for the variation to stop and enters a standby state. Therefore, the second interlocking flag is a flag necessary for smoothly starting the game in the rush mode.

As shown in FIG. 148(B), immediately after shifting to the rush mode (high-probability non-time-saving gaming state), the variation of the first special symbol suspended in the gaming state before shifting is executed. The variation time of the first special symbol at this time is set to a short time (1 second). And, in the rush mode, the game of the second special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is the mainstream. The second start port 2102 is a prize winning port that allows even a beginner player to win a prize by striking to the right, and since the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 1 second, the variation of the second special symbol occurs frequently. Also, the second special symbol that does not lead to a big hit leads to a small hit.

Therefore, in the game on the side of the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the small winning game (second small winning game) are alternately repeated until the occurrence of the next big win. Then, every time the variation of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (step S502b), the interlocking flag (first interlocking flag) for interlocking the game on the first special symbol side with the second special symbol side is set to the ON state. (step S532b). Then, the second small winning game is executed (steps S230b, S240b), and when the second small winning game ends, the first interlocking flag is returned to the OFF state (step S922b).

In the game on the first special symbol side, the first interlocking setting process (step S250a, FIG. 133) is executed in response to the turning on of the first interlocking flag. At this time, the first special symbols that have not started to fluctuate are placed in a standby state so as not to start fluctuating (step S1021a), and fluctuating starts when the first interlocking flag is turned off (step S130a). In addition, the first special symbol during fluctuation is forcibly stopped and displayed as a stopped symbol that is out (step S1003a).

Thus, in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode in which the game on the side of the first special symbol is the mainstream, the frequency of execution of the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 142) is high, and the rush mode in which the game on the side of the second special symbol is the mainstream. Then, the execution frequency of the first interlock setting process (FIG. 133) is high. In the present embodiment, since there is a concern that the winning game may overlap between the game on the side of the first special symbol and the game on the side of the second special symbol, in order to avoid this, the game on one side When a hit is obtained in , the game on the other side is controlled by the interlocking setting process at that time.

(Game mode transition timing chart)
FIG. 149 is an example of a timing chart showing ideal game mode transitions in this embodiment.

When the player starts playing, first, the normal mode starts. In the normal mode, it is best for the player to hit left and aim at the always winning opening 2101a of the first start opening 2101. Here, when the game ball at the beginning of hitting hits to the right because the launch force is too strong, and the game ball enters the second start port 2102, the second special symbol variation time (second variation time) is long. Long-term variation is performed.

After that, when the player adjusts the shooting momentum and hits to the left, and the game ball wins in the regular winning opening 2101a of the first starting opening 2101, the variation of the first special symbol is executed. The variation time (first variation time) at this time is 30 to 60 seconds depending on the selected variation pattern. In the game on the side of the first special symbol, the first special symbol lottery for winning the jackpot with a probability of 1/399 is executed. When the first big win A is won, the variation is stopped and displayed with the big win symbol A, and the first big win game is executed. At this time, since the second interlocking flag is set to the ON state, the variation of the second special symbol in the long-time variation state is forcibly lost and stopped and displayed as a symbol. Then, the second interlocking flag is returned to the OFF state with the end of the first jackpot game, and the game mode shifts from the normal mode to the rush preparation mode.

In the rush preparation mode, it is best for the player to hit right and aim at the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101.例文帳に追加In addition, in the rush preparation mode, a variable probability function of 70 ST times and a time-saving function for performing winning assistance control for facilitating winning to the special winning opening 2101b are provided.

When the player hits to the right and the game ball wins in the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101, the variation of the first special symbol is executed. The variation time (first variation time) at this time is 30 to 60 seconds depending on the selected variation pattern. In the game on the side of the first special symbol, the first special symbol lottery for winning the jackpot with a probability of 1/45 is executed. Then, when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, the number of times of ST is updated by subtracting one. When the first big win B is won when the number of times of ST is counted as 68, the fluctuation is stopped and displayed in the big win pattern B, and the first big win game is executed. At this time, the second interlocking flag is set to the ON state, but the state is maintained because the variation of the second special symbol is not executed. Then, the second interlocking flag is returned to the OFF state along with the end of the first jackpot game, and the game mode shifts from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode.

In rush mode, it is best for the player to hit right and aim for the second opening 2102 . Also, in the rush mode, the time saving function is not given, and only the probability variable function of 70 ST times is given. Here, the number of STs whose count value was 68 at the end of the rush preparation mode is counted from the count value of 70 again.

Here, the player continues to hit to the right. Since the time-saving function does not operate, the right-handed game ball does not enter the special winning opening 2101b, and enters the second starting opening 2102 below. Since it is easy for a game beginner to enter the second start hole 2102, the game ball enters the second start hole 2102 frequently. Since the variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol at this time is set to 1 second, the variation of the second special symbol is frequently executed.

In the game on the side of the second special symbol, a second special symbol lottery is executed in which a big win is won with a probability of 1/45, and a small win is won when the big win is not won. Then, when the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, the number of times of ST is updated by subtracting one. As a result of the second special symbol lottery, when a small win is obtained, the fluctuation is stopped and displayed with the small win symbol C, and the second small win game is executed. At this time, while the second small winning game is being executed, the first interlocking flag is set to the ON state.

It should be noted that immediately after the start of the rush mode, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b generated in the rush preparation mode before transition is in a pending state, and the fluctuation of these first special symbols is will be executed.

In the game on the side of the first special symbol, the first special symbol lottery for winning the jackpot with a probability of 1/45 is executed. The variation time (first variation time) of the first special symbol at this time is set to 1 second. In the rush mode, since small winning games occur frequently in games on the second special symbol side, the first interlocking flag is also frequently set to the ON state. Therefore, if the first special symbol is fluctuating when the second special symbol is stopped from fluctuating, it is forcibly stopped and displayed as a missing symbol. Then, since the first interlocking flag is returned to the OFF state with the end of the second small winning game, the fluctuation of the next first special symbol is started. And, when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, the number of ST is updated by subtracting one.

In this way, immediately after the start of the rush mode, the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol are efficiently executed in a short period of time, so the subtraction speed of the number of STs is also fast. Then, the variation of the second special symbol and the second small winning game are alternately and repeatedly executed until the count value of the number of times of ST becomes 0 or the next big winning is won.

In the rush mode of the present embodiment, when the big win is not won in the second special symbol lottery, the small win is won, so the second small win game occurs frequently. The number of prize balls that can be obtained during the rush mode is 2100 balls when the number of prize balls in one second small winning game is 30 and the number of STs (70 times) is won. This is larger than the maximum number of winning balls (2000 balls) obtainable in the jackpot game of the present embodiment. Therefore, a series of second small winning games in the rush mode can be a privilege game comparable to the big winning game. In addition, since there is a possibility that the game will be a big win with a probability of 1/45 even during the rush mode, the rush mode is the most advantageous (aimable) game mode for the player.

It should be noted that there is a high possibility that it will be more beneficial for the player if the number of STs in the rush mode is consumed by the number of variations of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is preferable that the first special symbol in the pending state is not carried over to the rush mode. Therefore, when it becomes clear that the shift to the rush mode is made, that is, when it turns out that the first jackpot B is won in the game mode before the shift, the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2101 is suppressed. control may be performed. For example, the operation of the movable piece 2111 may be controlled so as to stop the operation of the time-saving function for assisting the winning of the special winning opening 2101b or to lower the winning assisting function. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 1900 may perform some notification effect.

[Control on peripheral control board]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 and 151. FIG.

[Sub-main processing]
FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing the procedure of sub-main processing of this embodiment. The sub-main process is a process executed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first performs initial setting processing (step S3001). This initial setting process includes a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010, and the like. Note that interrupts are disabled during this initial setting process, and interrupts are enabled after the initial setting process. Then, when the initial setting process ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set to "1" is started (step S3002).

Here, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms, and executes steady processing for 2 ms. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed. Along with setting the flag T, the process of resetting (to 0) the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter is executed. Thus, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to "0".

If the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set to "1" (YES in step S3002), the peripheral control MPU 4140a resets the 16 ms elapsed flag T to "0" (step S3003), and then performs the 16 ms steady process. Execute (step S3004). In the 16ms steady process, based on the command received from the main control board 4100, the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamps/LEDs, the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. are controlled.

After completing the 16ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a returns to the process of step S3002, and repeats the processes of steps S3003 and S3004 each time the 16ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16ms.

On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set to "1" (16 ms elapsed flag T is "0") (NO in step S3002), the peripheral control MPU 4140a keeps the 16 ms elapsed flag T set until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set. Execute loop processing.

[16 ms steady process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the 16 ms steady process (step S3004) executed every 16 ms in the above-described sub-main process (FIG. 150) will be described. FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the 16 ms steady process of this embodiment.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a first executes command analysis processing for analyzing the command received from the main control board 4100 (step S3101). Next, an effect control process for controlling the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed based on the control command (the received variation pattern command, etc.) analyzed in the command analysis process described above (step S3102).

The peripheral control MPU 4140a also executes sound control processing for controlling sounds output from the speakers 130, 222, and 262 (step S3103). Next, a lamp control process for controlling the effects of the lamps/LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed (step S3104). In addition, information for executing effects such as processing for transmitting lamp/LED lighting signals to the lamp drive board 3041 and processing for transmitting drive signals to the drive motors that operate various production units to the motor drive board 3045 is output. information output processing is executed (step S3105). After that, random number update processing which updates the random number which is used for various setting with production control processing of step S3102 is executed (step S3106), 16ms regular processing ends.

Note that the 16ms steady process usually ends within 16ms. The peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the 16 ms steady process from the beginning (process of step S3101) when 16 ms has passed since the start of the process, even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start to the end of the 16 ms steady process. never. That is, when 16 ms has elapsed during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapsed flag is set (step S3002) in the sub-main process, and the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in the sub-main process after the 16 ms steady process ends. (YES in step S3002), the next 16ms steady process is started.

In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S3106) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing of updating the various random numbers is limited to this. is not. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing and the 16 ms steady processing in the above-described sub-main processing (FIG. 150).

(Effect of this embodiment)
According to the present embodiment, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (regular winning port 2101a, the special winning port 2101b) and the second based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 It has a control structure that can simultaneously change 2 special symbols, and the winning area (constant winning opening 2101a, special winning opening 2101b, second start opening 2102) that the player should aim for according to the game state and the operation of hitting the game ball A plurality of game states are provided so that (right-handed (second game state), left-handed (first game state)) are different. In this embodiment, the function display unit 1180 is provided with a game state indicator 1183 including an LED that can clearly inform the player of the timing of performing "right shot" (second game state). Also, it is possible to smoothly switch the hitting method (hitting operation) according to the transition of the game state without making a mistake between "left hitting" and "right hitting".

Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits a control signal for controlling the game state display 1183 to the peripheral control section 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010, thereby instructing the player to "hit right" on the liquid crystal display device 1900. may be notified. Normally, a liquid crystal display device 1900 is arranged in front view (ahead of the front line of sight) of the player. Therefore, when the liquid crystal display device 1900 indicates "right-handed hitting", the player can switch to an appropriate hitting method (hitting operation) without moving the player's line of sight to the front view left end (function display unit 1180). It becomes possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the plurality of game states include a normal game state (normal mode), a high-accuracy short-time gaming state (rush preparation mode), and a high-accuracy non-shortening gaming state (rush mode). In the rush mode, every time a second special symbol lottery based on the winning of a game ball into the second starting port 2102, which is easy to win even for game beginners, is performed, the player has an opportunity to win a prize ball (small winning game or A jackpot game) is provided. Further, in the rush mode, the number of game balls obtainable by the player tends to be higher in the ratio of the number of game balls obtainable in the small winning game than in the big winning game. As a result, since a series of small winning games in the rush mode can be expected to give more game balls than the big winning game, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game related to the small winning game.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, the rush mode (second advantageous gaming state) in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state is a high-accuracy short-time gaming state (rush preparation Mode, first advantageous game state) is a game state more advantageous to the player. And when the current game mode is the rush mode (high probability non-time-saving game state), the time-saving function is activated even if the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (first big hit A) that activates the time-saving function. Control to continue rush mode without activating. Since the small winning game of the present embodiment can provide a game that overturns the preconceived notion that the operation (providing) of the time saving function is advantageous to the player, the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (regular winning port 2101a, special winning port 2101b) and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 When the second special symbol based on the symbol fluctuates at the same time, when a win (big win, small win) is derived on one side, the other of the fluctuating symbols is forcibly stopped and displayed as a losing pattern. As a result, overlapping hits between the game on the side of the first special symbol and the game on the side of the second special symbol are avoided, and before and after the transition when shifting to another game state triggered by the big win. It is possible to prevent the execution of one variation over another.

(Second embodiment)
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present invention, as described above, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (the regular winning port 2101a, the special winning port 2101b) and the game ball to the second starting port 2102 It has a control structure that can simultaneously fluctuate the second special symbol based on the winning. In such simultaneous variable control, the specific game (small hit game, big hit game) between the game on the side of the first special symbol and the game on the side of the second special symbol To avoid overlapping occurrence control is required. In the above-described first embodiment, when one special symbol stops the variation with a stop symbol indicating a specific result (small hit, big hit), if the other special symbol is in motion, the stopped symbol is replaced with a lost symbol. , By controlling so that the other special pattern does not fluctuate during the specific game, it has a control structure that can fluctuate simultaneously.

In the second embodiment, various control patterns of the simultaneously variable control structure will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 186. FIG.

[game board]
FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment of the invention. Members having functions common to those of the game board 4 (see FIG. 114) of the first embodiment described above are assigned the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. Here, a characteristic configuration of the game board 4 of the second embodiment will be described.

In the game area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 of the second embodiment, a normal figure gate 2301, a second starting gate 2102, a special prize winning gate 2101b of the first starting gate 2101, and a big prize winning gate 2103 are arranged in this order from upstream. ing.

In this embodiment, the game ball flowing down the right passage 2545 first reaches the general pattern gate 2301 . Then, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 2301, the normal pattern lottery is executed. A second start port 2102 is provided below the normal map gate 2301 . The second starting port is provided so as to be able to accept both the game balls that have passed through the normal pattern gate 2301 and the game balls that have not passed through. When the game ball is accepted to the second starting port 2102, the second special symbol lottery is executed if a predetermined special starting condition is satisfied.

Directly below the second starting opening 2102, a special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 is arranged. The special prize winning opening 2101b is provided with a pair of movable members (ordinary electric accessories) 2111 that open upward in an inverted "V" shape to convert it into a state in which it is easy to receive game balls (easy-to-receive state). The pair of movable members 2111 normally maintains a closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) with an interval approximately equal to the diameter of the game ball. Since the special prize winning opening 2101b is provided with the second starting opening 2102 in the upper part, the game ball is not accepted when the movable member 2111 is closed. When the normal symbol lottery is won, the movable member 2111 is changed from the closed state to the acceptance easy state, thereby allowing the reception of the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b. When the game ball is received in the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101, the first special symbol lottery is executed if a predetermined special starting condition is established.

In addition, below the special prize winning opening 2101b of the first start opening 2101, the winning of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery becomes the opening operation trigger, and the game ball that flows down the right side passage 2545 can be accepted during operation. An attacker device 2100 is provided. The attacker device 2100 of the present embodiment is a so-called combination attacker device that opens the big prize opening 2103 by opening and closing two opening/closing members (first opening/closing member 2106a and second opening/closing member 2106b) that slide in the front-rear direction. Details of the attacker device 2100 will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, the function display unit 1180 of this embodiment is arranged outside the outer rail 1111 in the lower left portion of the front surface of the front structural member 1110 . In the first embodiment, the function display unit 1180 is provided with an LED capable of clearly informing the timing of performing the "right shot" (second game state) on the game state display 1183, but in the present embodiment, the game state display is provided. A right-handed state indicator 1192 is provided separately from the device 1183 . Details of the function display unit 1180 of this embodiment will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in this embodiment, a 7-segment display 1920 is arranged in the upper right part of the center accessory 2500 and in the upper right part of the liquid crystal display device 1900 . The display of the 7-segment display 1920 is controlled by a peripheral control MPU 4140 a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 . In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display device 1920, respectively, according to the game state. Details of the 7-segment display 1920 will be described later with reference to FIG. 153(C).

As described above, the game board 4 of the present embodiment and the game board 4 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 114) have different configurations as described above, but the game characteristics (recommended game mode transitions) , recommended driving operation in the game mode) are the same.

Next, configurations of the attacker device 2100, function display unit 1180 and 7-segment display 1920 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 153(A) to 153(C).

[Attacker device]
FIG. 153(A) is a simplified structural diagram of the attacker device 2100 provided on the game board 4 of the second embodiment.

The attacker device 2100 includes a large winning opening 2103, a first opening/closing member 2106a and a second opening/closing member 2106b which are operable between a closed state and an open state, and an attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 118) for opening and closing the two opening/closing members. ). The attacker device 2100 of this embodiment is characterized in that two opening/closing members (a first opening/closing member 2106a and a second opening/closing member 2106b) are provided for one big prize winning opening 2103. FIG.

The first opening/closing member 2106a and the second opening/closing member 2106b are normally maintained in a closed state to close the big winning hole 2103 so that the game ball cannot be received in the big winning hole 2103. It is configured as a part of the guide flow path 2110 that guides the game ball that has flowed down the right game area to the game area below the center accessory 2500 .

Then, when a hit occurs in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, after the variation display related to the lottery is completed, the drive control of the attacker driving mechanism 2121 is performed, and the first opening and closing member 2106a and the second opening and closing member 2106a are controlled. The sliding opening/closing operation of the member 2106b in the front-rear direction is performed. The opening/closing operations of the first opening/closing member 2106a and the second opening/closing member 2106b are controlled at the same timing.

Here, the first opening/closing member 2106a and the second opening/closing member 2106b are arranged in parallel on the upstream side and the downstream side of the induction channel 2110 with a gap therebetween. That is, the big winning opening 2103 has two openings capable of receiving game balls when it is in an open state. In addition, the big winning opening 2103 is configured so that the game balls received from either opening merge inside, and reception of the game balls is detected by one count sensor 2122a.

In this way, the attacker device 2100 of the present embodiment opens the big prize opening 2103 by two openings formed by the first opening/closing member 2106a on the upstream side and the second opening/closing member 2106b on the downstream side. It has a combi-attack structure that allows a plurality of game balls rolling in the guide channel 2110 from upstream to downstream when the turns are opened to be received in the big prize winning opening 2103. - 特許庁

[Function display unit]
FIG. 153(B) is an enlarged front view of the function display unit 1180 provided on the game board 4 of the second embodiment. The function display unit 1180 is controlled by the main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100 .

The function display unit 1180 of this embodiment is provided with a right-handed state indicator 1192 consisting of two LEDs above the display section 1181 for informing that it is time to perform "right-handed". Below the right-handed state indicator 1192, there are four LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the big prize opening 2103 when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is "win". A round indicator 1190 consisting of and a first special symbol memory indicator 1184 consisting of two LEDs arranged below the round indicator 1190 and displaying the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of game balls into the first start port 2101 And, the lottery result (first special lottery result) of the first special symbol that is arranged on the right side of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and is drawn by accepting the game ball into the first start port 2101 is used as the first special symbol. A first special symbol display 1185 consisting of eight LED groups for displaying is provided. In addition, below the first special symbol display 1185, a second special symbol memory display 1187 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of game balls to the second start port 2102, and a second special symbol display 1187 For displaying the lottery result (second special lottery result) of the second special pattern which is arranged on the left side of the special pattern memory display 1187 and is drawn by accepting the game ball into the second starting port 2102 as the second special pattern. A second special symbol display 1186 consisting of a group of eight LEDs is provided.

In addition, below the display unit 1181, a game state display 1183 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the game state, and a normal pattern consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to passage of the normal pattern gate 2301 A memory display 1188 and a normal pattern display 1189 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the normal lottery result drawn by the game ball passing through the normal pattern gate 2301 as a normal pattern are provided side by side. there is

The right-handed state indicator 1192 of this embodiment turns on the LED when it is time to perform the "right-handed" (second game state) to inform the player of the "right-handed". In addition, the LED is extinguished when it is time to perform the "left shot" (first game state).

In this embodiment, when it is detected that the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 2301 caused by "right hitting" when it is time to perform "left hitting", a signal to warn the player is sent to the main control board. 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010 . Then, the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 displays a warning message on the liquid crystal display device 1900 to return to left-handed hitting, and sounds an alarm sound for several seconds (for example, 10 seconds). If "right-handed" is still detected after that, penalty control is performed to impose a predetermined penalty that is disadvantageous to the player.

[7 segment display]
FIG. 153(C) is an enlarged front view of a 7-segment display 1920 provided on the game board 4 of the second embodiment. The 7-segment display 1920 is controlled by the peripheral control section 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 .

The 7-segment display 1920 displays information about the variable display (lottery processing) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the number of reservations. The 7-segment display 1920 includes a first special symbol display section 1921 consisting of a 7-segment LED for displaying the variation display (lottery result) of the first special symbol, and a number of pending first special symbols. A first special symbol storage display unit 1922 consisting of two LEDs, a fourth symbol display unit 1923 consisting of one LED for displaying a fourth symbol related to the variation display of the first special symbol, and a variation of the second special symbol A second special symbol display unit 1924 consisting of a 7-segment LED for displaying the display (lottery result), and a second special symbol memory display unit 1925 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of pending second special symbols. , and a fourth symbol display section 1926 consisting of one LED for displaying the fourth symbol related to the variable display of the second special symbol.

The 7-segment LED that constitutes the first special symbol display portion 1921 and the second special symbol display portion 1924 represents a variable display by repeating lighting and extinguishing (that is, blinking) of each segment in order, and depending on the result, a predetermined The variation result (lottery result) is displayed by lighting the segment. During standby, the same segment as when the lottery result is lost is lit.

The two LEDs constituting the first special symbol storage display unit 1922 are turned off when the number of reservations is "0", the upper LED is turned on when the number of reservations is "1", and the lower LED is turned off, Both LEDs light up when the number of holds is "2", the upper LED blinks when the number of holds is "3", the lower LED lights up, and when the number of holds is "4" both LEDs light up. Flashes.

The two LEDs constituting the second special symbol storage display unit 1925 are turned off when the number of reservations is "0", the upper LED is turned on when the number of reservations is "1", and the lower LED is turned off, Both LEDs light up when the pending number is "2". In this embodiment, it is possible to store "1" pending second special symbols.

One LED that constitutes the fourth pattern display units 1923 and 1926 can emit light in red and green instead of monochromatic light. Lights up, and lights up in red when the variation result is a hit (big hit, small hit).

Then, when the game state is the normal game state (normal mode) and the high-accuracy time-saving game state (rush preparation mode), the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the variable display of the second special symbol. is displayed on the 7-segment display 1920 . Further, when the gaming state is a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode), the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed on the 7-segment display 1920, and the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. be done.

Thus, in this embodiment, the display device that displays the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is switched according to the game state. In addition, the transition of the game state is triggered by the big hit of the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, or by the end of the given ST number. When the big win is triggered, the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the 7-segment display 1920 switch the special symbols to be displayed after the big win game ends. In addition, when triggered by the end of the number of ST, when the ST final variation ends and the probability variation flag is set to OFF (step S513a in FIG. 129, step S513b in FIG. 137), the liquid crystal display devices 1900 and 7 The segment display 1920 switches the special symbols to be displayed.

[Special design game specs]
Next, FIG. 154 is an example of various tables showing game specs of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the second embodiment. Here, specs different from the game specs (FIG. 146) in the first embodiment will be described.

First, as shown in FIGS. 154(A) and 154(B), in this embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the variable probability state is 1/51 for both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. Also, the small hit winning probability is always 1/3.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 154(C), there are four types of big hits, which are unchanged, but the presence or absence of the time saving function differs depending on the game state in which each win is won. In this embodiment, a time saving function is given to the jackpots other than the jackpot B of the first special symbol. Therefore, in order to enter the rush mode, there is no choice but to use the big hit B of the first special symbol as a trigger. In addition, as shown in the above-described time saving function setting process (FIG. 132), the time saving function is not given to the big hit that occurs in the rush mode.

As shown in FIG. 154(D), the number of types of small hits increases in this embodiment. In this embodiment, a second small win D is provided in addition to a second small win C that can occur in the second special symbol lottery. The second small win C and the second small win D are different in the opening mode of the big winning opening 2103 in the small win game. The opening pattern E has a short opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) and is opened only once, while the opening pattern F has a shorter opening time (for example, 0.9 seconds). ), is opened twice. When the result of the second special symbol lottery is a small win, a second small win C or a second small win D occurs with a probability of 50%.

It should be noted that, between the opening pattern E and the opening pattern F, the opening pattern F can be expected to win a prize in the big winning opening 2103 . As described above, the attacker device 2100 of the present embodiment is provided with the large winning opening 2103 that opens at two locations, upstream and downstream, of the guide channel 2110 through which the game ball flows down and can receive the game ball. Even if the opening time is short, the opening pattern F, which is opened twice, is more likely to win prizes for the game balls.

Further, as shown in FIG. 154(E), in this embodiment, when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, the variation time of the second special symbol differs according to the variation result. The variation time when the result of the second special symbol lottery is hit is a shortened variation of 5 seconds to 90 seconds, and the variation time when it is lost is a long variation of 600 seconds. Also, when the game mode is the rush mode, the variation time of the first special symbol is a shortened variation with a width of 1 second to 30 seconds.

[Transition of game state]
Next, FIG. 155 is a diagram showing the transition of the game state (game mode) of the second embodiment. Here, specs different from the game state transition (FIG. 147) in the first embodiment will be described.

In the above-described first embodiment, the rush preparation mode can be shifted to the trigger of the occurrence of the first jackpot A (FIG. 146). It is possible to shift with the occurrence of 2 jackpots B (FIG. 154) as a trigger. The transition from the rush preparation mode to another game mode is due to the transition to the normal mode due to the change in the number of STs, or to the rush mode due to the occurrence of the first big win B. Also, the transition from the rush preparation mode to another game mode (normal mode) is due to the change in the number of STs. In rush mode, the mode does not shift even if any jackpot occurs.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the second special symbol lottery in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode leads to a win (minor win, big win), the variation time is shortened by 1 second. Originally, the game mode that encourages the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is the rush mode, but in this, there is a high possibility that the winning to the second starting port 2102 is aimed at in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode. Therefore, when the result of the second special symbol lottery leads to a loss, it is set to a long-time variation (600 seconds), or even if the game ball is launched toward the attacker device 2100 after the small hit result is confirmed, it will be small. By setting the opening timing so as not to be in time for the opening of the big winning opening 2103 in the winning game, or by making it difficult to guess the opening pattern by providing a plurality of types of opening modes, the second opening in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode is performed. To suppress execution efficiency of a special symbol lottery.

In this embodiment, the game in the rush preparation mode in which winning to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101, that is, "right-handed" is recommended is diversified. In the first embodiment, even if the game ball wins in the second starting port 2102 by "right-handed", the variation of the second special symbol takes a long time. I didn't. However, in this embodiment, the variation of the second special symbol in the rush preparation mode is short in the case of deriving the winning result, and the short-term variation occurs with a probability of ⅓ or more. Then, if a big hit result is obtained in the second special symbol lottery, the number of times of ST is newly given and the time saving function is continued. For this reason, interest can be found in the variation of the second special symbol, and the game property in the rush preparation mode is improved.

[Control pattern]
Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the winning of the game ball to the first special symbol and the second start opening 2102 based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 (regular winning opening 2101a, special winning opening 2101b) The outline of the control pattern in the control structure that can simultaneously fluctuate with the second special symbol based on will be described. FIG. 156 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the control pattern of the simultaneous variation control structure. The four control patterns will be outlined below with reference to FIGS. 156(A) to (D).

First, FIG. 156(A) is a timing chart showing a basic control pattern. In the basic control pattern, as described in the first embodiment, when one of the special symbols is a winning result, the other changing special symbol is forcibly replaced with a losing result to stop the variation. .

For example, as shown in FIG. 156(A), when the variation of the second special symbol stops at the small hit stop symbol, the first special symbol during variation changes the determined big hit stop symbol to the predetermined loss stop symbol. It is replaced, and fluctuation is stopped by the deviation stop symbol.

Specifically, in accordance with the control processing of the first embodiment, in the second fluctuation processing (FIG. 137) regarding the second special symbol, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is timed up, and the small hit stop symbol fluctuates. is stopped, the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is set to ON (YES at step S501b → step S502b → step S503b → NO at step S504b → YES at step S531b → S532b). As a result, in the first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) relating to the first special symbol, the first interlocking setting process is executed regardless of the progress of the variation of the first special symbol (YES in step S100a → Step S250a).

Then, in the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 133), the first special symbol during fluctuation is stopped and displayed as a predetermined lost symbol (YES in step S1001a→step S1002a→step S1003a). Here, the process for determining whether or not the first special symbol will win (hit determination process) is the step of the first variation start process (FIG. 127) executed when the first special symbol starts to vary. It is executed in S307a, and the stop design of the first special design is determined along with the start of fluctuation. Therefore, in the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 133), the determined stop symbol (here, the jackpot symbol) is replaced with a predetermined losing symbol.

Thus, in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above, at the timing when one of the special symbols for deriving the hit stops fluctuating, the interlocking flag for interlocking the game on the other special symbol side with the one special symbol side is turned on. state. For this reason, the other special symbol that occurs during the fluctuation of one special symbol is forcibly deviated by the interlocking stop control. (lottery processing) had to be executed.

In the second embodiment, as another control of the basic control pattern of the first embodiment, the interlocking flag is set to the ON state at the timing when the special symbol that leads to the hit starts to fluctuate, and the interlocking flag of the other special symbol is the interlocking flag at the time of the fluctuation start. If is in the ON state, without executing the hit determination process (with no lottery) will be described an example of setting so as to stop the variation in the winning design.

Details of the control processing of the basic control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 157 to 166. FIG.

Next, FIG. 156B is a timing chart showing priority control patterns. The priority control pattern compares the results derived from both special symbols, preferentially executes a special symbol that derives a result advantageous to the player, and stops the other special symbol from fluctuating with a missing symbol.

For example, as shown in FIG. 156(B), when the variation that leads to the small hit is executed with the second special symbol, if the variation that leads to the big hit occurs with the first special symbol, both lotteries As a result of the comparison of the results, the first special symbol deriving a big win advantageous to the player stops fluctuating at the big win symbol. Then, the second special symbol replaces the determined small-hit stop symbol with a predetermined loss stop symbol, and stops fluctuating at the loss stop symbol.

In this way, in the priority control pattern, the special symbols to be prioritized among the special symbols that fluctuate simultaneously according to the lottery result derived from the special symbols are determined. can be executed. In the basic control pattern of the above-described first embodiment, even if the special pattern is a big hit in the hit determination at the start of variation, if the other special pattern that is a small hit stops fluctuating first, it will be forced to lose. Although it was set, there is no chance of unwillingly missing such a big hit special pattern. Therefore, the priority control pattern can maintain the original gameplay of the game machine more than the basic control pattern.

Details of the control processing of the priority control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 167 to 175. FIG.

Next, FIG. 156(C) is a timing chart showing an interruption control pattern. The interruption control pattern interrupts the other special symbol while the winning game is being performed based on the winning result derived from one of the special symbols, and after the winning game ends, the other special symbol restarts the fluctuation of the remaining time. is.

For example, as shown in FIG. 156(C), when a variation for deriving a small hit is performed with the second special symbol and a variation for deriving a big hit is performed with the first special symbol, the second special symbol is a small hit. When the fluctuation stops at the symbol, the first special symbol suspends the temporary fluctuation. Then, a small winning game corresponding to the small winning result of the second special symbol is executed. During this time, the first special symbol suspends variation. When the small winning game ends, the first special symbol restarts the interrupted variation.

Thus, in the interruption control pattern, it is possible to change and execute all the generated first special symbols and second special symbols according to the obtained random numbers. In the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above, one of the simultaneously fluctuating special symbols was forcibly set to lose regardless of the acquired random number, but in the interruption control pattern, the special symbol obtained by the player results in ( Hit judgment results based on random numbers) will not be overturned. Therefore, the interruption control pattern can maintain the original game characteristics of the gaming machine more than the above-described priority control pattern. In addition, since the winning game by the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be shown to be related by the effect in the variation at the time of restarting, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Details of the control processing of the interruption control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 176 to 181. FIG.

Next, FIG. 156(D) is a timing chart showing a reset control pattern. The reset control pattern resets the remaining variation time when resuming the other interrupted special symbol based on the above-described interruption control pattern.

For example, as shown in FIG. 156(D), when a variation for deriving a small hit is performed with the second special symbol and a variation for deriving a big hit is performed with the first special symbol, the second special symbol is a small hit. When the fluctuation stops at the symbol, the first special symbol suspends the temporary fluctuation. Then, a small winning game corresponding to the small winning result of the second special symbol is executed. During this time, the first special symbol suspends variation. Up to this point, the control is the same as the above-described lottery control pattern. In the reset control pattern, when the small winning game is finished and the interrupted variation of the first special symbol is restarted, the variation is restarted after newly setting the variation time after the restart.

As described above, the reset control pattern has a higher degree of freedom in the effect of variation at the time of resuming than the above-described interruption control pattern, so that the amusement of the game can be further enhanced. Also, by setting the variable time at the time of restart according to the game situation, it is possible to provide a recommended game.

Details of the control processing of the reset control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 182 to 186. FIG.

<Basic control pattern>
Next, characteristic control processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. Different control processing will be described below based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

In the basic control pattern of the second embodiment, the forced loss flag of the other special symbol is set to ON at the timing when the special symbol that leads to the hit starts to fluctuate, and the forced loss flag of the other special symbol is turned on when the fluctuation starts. If it is in the ON state, it is characterized by a control structure in which variation is stopped with a winning pattern without executing a hit determination process (without a lottery).

[First fluctuation start process]
FIG. 157 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first variation start process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. Note that processing common to the first fluctuation start processing (FIG. 127) of the first embodiment is denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

After executing the process of step S306a, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the forced loss flag of the first special symbol for setting the first special symbol to be lost without lottery is on. (Step S311a). Then, when the forced removal flag of the first special symbol is not ON (NO in step S311a), the process of step S307a and step S308a for setting the lottery result information by performing lottery for the first special symbol is executed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the flag indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery set in the process of step S308a indicates a winning result (step S313a). Then, if the flag indicates a hit result (YES in step S313a), the forced loss flag of the second special symbol for making the variation of the second special symbol that occurs during the variation of the first special symbol a loss result. is turned on (step S314a). On the other hand, if the flag does not indicate a winning result, that is, if the flag indicates a losing result (NO in step S313a), the process proceeds to step S309a without executing the process of step S314a.

On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a, when the forced loss flag of the first special symbol is ON (YES in step S311a), sets the flag indicating the result of the loss of the first special symbol and the loss information command (step S312a). After that, the process proceeds to step S309a.

Thus, in the first variation start process, when the first special symbol leads to a hit result, by setting the second special symbol forced loss flag to the ON state, it occurs after the first special symbol starts to vary. The second special symbol to be set is set so as to derive a deviation result without lottery.

[First jackpot game process]
FIG. 158 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first jackpot game process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 1st jackpot game process (FIG. 131) of 1st Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached and description is abbreviate|omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the interlocking flag of the second special symbol and the forced loss flag to the off state when the first jackpot game ends (step S751a).

[First interlock setting process]
FIG. 159 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first interlock setting process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. Note that processing common to the first interlock setting processing (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

When the first special symbol is fluctuating (step S1001a), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 moves the lost symbol determined in step S312a of the first fluctuation start process (FIG. 157) to the first symbol. It is displayed on the special symbol display device (step S1101a). After that, the process proceeds to step S1004a.

[Second Fluctuation Start Processing]
FIG. 160 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second fluctuation start process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. Note that processing common to the second fluctuation start processing (FIG. 135) of the first embodiment is denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

After executing the process of step S306b, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the forced loss flag of the second special symbol for setting the second special symbol to be lost without lottery is on. (Step S311b). Then, when the second special symbol forced removal flag is not ON (NO in step S311b), the process of step S307b and step S308b for setting the lottery result information by performing lottery for the second special symbol is executed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the flag indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery set in the process of step S308b indicates a winning result (step S313b). Then, if the flag indicates a hit result (YES in step S313b), the forced loss flag of the first special symbol for making the variation of the first special symbol that occurs during the variation of the second special symbol a result of losing. is turned on (step S314b). On the other hand, if the flag does not indicate a winning result, that is, if the flag indicates a losing result (NO in step S313b), the process proceeds to step S309b without executing the process of step S314b.

On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a sets the flag indicating the result of the second special symbol's deviation and the deviation information command when the second special symbol's forced deviation flag is ON (YES in step S311b) (step S312b). After that, the process proceeds to step S309b.

Thus, in the second variation start process, when the second special symbol leads to the winning result, by setting the forced loss flag of the first special symbol to the ON state, it occurs after the start of variation of the second special symbol. The first special symbol to be set is set so as to derive a deviation result without lottery.

[Second jackpot game processing]
FIG. 161 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second jackpot game process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 2nd jackpot game process (FIG. 139) of 1st Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached and description is abbreviate|omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the interlocking flag of the first special symbol and the forced loss flag to the OFF state when the second jackpot game ends (step S751b).

[Second Small Hit Game Processing]
Figure 162 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second small winning game process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 2nd small hit game process (FIG. 141) of 1st Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached and description is abbreviate|omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the interlocking flag of the first special symbol and the forced loss flag to the off state when the second small hit game is finished (step S951b).

[Second interlock setting process]
FIG. 163 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second interlock setting process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. Note that processing common to the second interlock setting processing (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

When the second special symbol is fluctuating (step S1001b), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 moves the lost symbol determined in step S312b of the second fluctuation start process (FIG. 160) to the second It is displayed on the special symbol display device (step S1101b). After that, the process proceeds to step S1004b.

[Right-handed penalty setting process]
Next, FIG. 164 is a flow chart showing the procedure of right-handed penalty setting processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The right-handed penalty setting process is a process executed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 regarding the provision of a warning and penalty for "right-handed" when it is time to perform "left-handed".

In this processing, when a "right-hand shot" is performed in a gaming state in which a "left-hand shot" is recommended, a warning is issued first, and a penalty is imposed if a "right-hand shot" is performed even after the warning. is set.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not the current game mode is in the normal mode (low-probability short-time state) (step S1201). Then, if the game mode is the normal mode (YES in step S1201), it is determined whether or not "right-handed" has been detected (step S1202). Here, the detection of "right hitting" means that the gate sensor 2303 detects the passage of the game ball to the normal figure gate 2301 arranged in the game area on the right side of the center accessory 2500. FIG. In addition, it is good also as acceptance detection of the game ball to the 2nd start opening 2102. FIG.

The main control MPU 4100a terminates this process when the current game mode is not the normal mode (NO at step S1201) or when there is no detection of "right-handed" even in the normal mode (NO at step S1202). do.

Then, when "right-handed" is detected (YES in step S1202), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not warning has been executed (step S1203). The warning is to notify the player to return to "left-handed". Whether or not the warning has been executed can be determined by confirming whether or not a warning executed flag, which is set when a warning timer, which will be described later, times out, is ON.

If the warning has not been executed (NO in step S1203), the main control MPU 4100a sets the warning time (warning timer) (step S1204). Then, when the warning timer times out (YES in step S1205), the warning executed flag is set to ON (step S1206), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the warning has already been issued (YES in step S1203), the main control MPU 4100a determines that the player continues to hit "right" despite the warning, and imposes a penalty for a predetermined period of time.

The main control MPU 4100a first sets a penalty timer, which is the period for imposing a penalty (step S1211), and sets the second special symbol forced-out flag to the ON state (step S1212). Then, until the penalty timer times out (NO in step S1213), the second special symbol forced loss flag is turned on.

When the penalty timer times out (YES at step S1213), the main control MPU 4100a sets the second special symbol forced removal flag and warning executed flag to the OFF state (step S1214), and ends this process.

In this way, when "right-handed" is detected in the normal mode in which "left-handed" is recommended, the player is first warned to return to "left-handed." Then, if the "right hitting" is still continued, even if the "right hitting" and the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2102 occurs, a penalty period is given in which the result is a deviation without lottery. Since the player is notified (suggested) that a penalty has been imposed (see FIG. 166), the player can be guided to perform an appropriate hitting operation according to the game mode.

Next, characteristic processing of control executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 will be described.

[Liquid crystal display processing]
FIG. 165 is a flow chart showing the procedure of liquid crystal display processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The liquid crystal display process relates to display on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and is one of the effect control processes (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010. FIG.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not the current game mode is the rush mode (high-probability non-time-saving state) (step S3201). Then, if the current game mode is not the rush mode, that is, if it is the normal mode (low-probability non-time-saving state) or rush preparation mode (high-probability short-time state) (NO in step S3201), the second by the main control MPU 4100a It is determined whether or not the winning variation for deriving the winning result is executed on the special symbol side (step S3202). Then, when the hit variation is executed on the second special symbol side (YES in step S3202), the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out (step S3203). On the other hand, when the hit variation is not executed on the second special symbol side (NO in step S3202), normal display effect is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (step S3204).

Here, blackout refers to a display effect in which the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is dark and noisy. The blackout is started when the special symbols subject to variable display on the 7-segment display 1920 start the variation leading to the winning result, and continues until the winning symbols are determined by the variation. The special symbol displayed on the 7-segment display 1920 is due to the winning of the game ball into the starting port that is not recommended to the player in the game mode. Therefore, the blackout can also be said to be a winning notice effect for notifying that a winning variation has occurred due to special symbols that are not recommended in the game mode.

[Right stroke penalty notification process]
FIG. 166 is a flow chart showing the procedure of right-handed penalty notification processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. Right-handed penalty notification processing relates to warning and penalty notification for "right-handed" when it is time to perform "left-handed". is one. Also, it is an effect process corresponding to the right-handed penalty setting process (FIG. 164) executed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. FIG.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not the current game mode is in the normal mode (low-probability short-time state) (step S3301). Then, when the game mode is the normal mode (YES in step S3301), it is determined whether or not "right-handed" is detected (step S3302). Here, the detection of "right hitting" means that the gate sensor 2303 detects the passage of the game ball to the normal figure gate 2301 arranged in the game area on the right side of the center accessory 2500. FIG. In addition, it is good also as acceptance detection of the game ball to the 2nd start opening 2102. FIG.

Peripheral control MPU4140a, when the current game mode is not the normal mode (NO in step S3301) or when there is no detection of "right-handed" even in the normal mode (NO in step S3302), ends this process do.

When the peripheral control MPU 4140a detects "right-handed" (YES in step S3302), the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not a warning has been issued (step S3303). Whether or not the warning has been executed can be determined by checking the state of the warning executed flag set on the main control MPU 4100a side.

Peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a warning time (warning timer) when the warning has not been executed (NO in step S3303) (step S3304). Note that the warning timer may acquire timer information from the main control MPU 4100a described above. Then, the liquid crystal display device 1900 issues a warning to display a message "Please return to left-handed play" (step S3305). At this time, a warning sound may be sounded for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) as long as the warning is suggested. Until the warning timer times out (NO in step S3306), a warning is issued (step S3305), and when the warning timer times out (YES in step S3306), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the warning has already been executed (YES in step S3303), peripheral control MPU 4140a determines that the "right-handed stroke" is continued despite the warning. A period penalty is imposed.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a penalty timer (step S3311). Then, the liquid crystal display device 1900 executes penalty notification to notify that a penalty has been imposed (step S3312). The penalty notification continues until the penalty timer expires, and when the penalty timer expires (YES in step S3313), this process ends.

<Effect of basic control pattern>
Thus, according to the basic control pattern of the present embodiment, since the presence or absence of the interlocking stop control is determined at the timing when the special symbol for deriving the hit starts to fluctuate, the other special symbol to be started after that hits at the time of the fluctuation start. Without executing the determination process (without a lottery), it is possible to stop the variation in the winning design. It is possible to omit useless processing in the other special symbol for which the result of the winning is forcibly set even if the hit determination processing is executed, so that the processing load can be reduced.

<Priority control pattern>
Next, characteristic control processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. Different control processing will be described below based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

In the priority control pattern, the results derived from the first special symbol and the second special symbol are compared, and the special symbol leading to the advantageous result for the player is preferentially executed, and the other special symbol is a losing symbol and the variation is stopped. Characterized by structure.

[First fluctuation start process]
FIG. 167 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first fluctuation start process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. Note that processing common to the first fluctuation start processing (FIG. 127) of the first embodiment is denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

After executing the processing of step S307a, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares with the variation of the second special symbol whether or not the current variation of the first special symbol is advantageous to the player. A first priority determination process for determination is executed (step S321a). Details of the first priority determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After that, the main control MPU 4100a executes the process of step S308a and ends this process.

[First priority determination process]
FIG. 168 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first priority determination process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The first priority determination process is executed as the process of step S321a of the above-described first fluctuation start process (FIG. 167).

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not the second special symbol is fluctuating (step S361a). Then, when there is no second special symbol that is changing (NO in step SS361a), there is no object for comparison, so this process is terminated.

The main control MPU 4100a, when there is a second special symbol that is changing (YES in step S361a), acquires the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol that is changing (step S362a), It is compared with the result of the hit determination process in step S307a of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 167) (step S363a).

When the first special symbol is more advantageous for the player (YES at step S364a), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the second special symbol is a losing result (step S365a). If the result is a deviation (YES in step S365a), the process ends. On the other hand, if the result is not a losing result, that is, if the result is a small hit or a big hit (NO at step S365a), the forced loss flag for forcibly losing the second special symbol is set to ON state (step S366a). ), the process ends.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol is more advantageous for the player (NO in step S364a), the main control MPU 4100a sets the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol to lose (step S367a). ), the process ends.

Thus, in the first priority determination process, if there is a second special symbol that is in process of variation when variation is started with the first special symbol, it is determined which variation result is advantageous to the player, If the first special pattern is advantageous, the second special pattern is taken as the result of losing, and if the first special pattern is not advantageous, the first special pattern is taken as the result of losing, so that the first special pattern and the second pattern fluctuate simultaneously. To prevent overlapping occurrence of a winning game with a special symbol.

[Process during first fluctuation]
FIG. 169 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first fluctuating process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. Note that processing common to the first during-fluctuation processing (FIG. 129) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the forced loss flag of the first special symbol is ON after determining that the variation time of the first special symbol has timed up in the process of step S501a. (Step S551a). The forced out flag of the first special symbol is set to ON state in the process of step S366b of the second priority determination process (FIG. 171) described later.

Then, when the forced loss flag of the first special symbol is ON (YES in step S551a), the main control MPU 4100a replaces the stop symbol of the first special symbol with a loss and turns the forced loss flag off. Set (step S552a).

After that, the main control MPU 4100a displays the determined stop symbol on the first special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7 segment display device 1920) in the process of step S502a. Therefore, when the first special symbol during fluctuation is replaced by the second special symbol whose variation is started later, the stop symbol determined at the time of starting the variation is lost at the timing of stopping the variation of the first special symbol. replace.

[First interlock setting process]
FIG. 170 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first interlock setting process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. Note that processing common to the first interlock setting processing (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the first special symbol is fluctuating in the process of step S1001a, it determines whether or not the forced loss flag of the first special symbol is on (step S1111a ). The forced out flag of the first special symbol is set to ON state in the process of step S366b of the second priority determination process (FIG. 171) described later.

Then, when the forced loss flag of the first special symbol is ON (YES in step S1111a), the main control MPU 4100a replaces the stop symbol of the first special symbol with a loss and turns the forced loss flag off. set (step S1112a). It should be noted that, if the forced loss flag of the first special symbol is not ON (NO in step S1111a), the first special symbol is lost in the hit determination process at the start of variation (step S307a of the first variation start process). result.

After that, the main control MPU 4100a displays the stop design that has been determined by the process of step S307a or step S1112a on the first special design display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7 segment display device 1920) (step S1113a). Therefore, when the first special symbol during fluctuation is replaced by the second special symbol that starts to fluctuate later, the second special symbol stops fluctuating before the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol. If the timing is earlier, the stop symbol determined at the start of the variation is replaced with the loss at the variation stop timing of the second special symbol.

[Second Fluctuation Start Processing]
FIG. 171 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second fluctuation start process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. Note that processing common to the second fluctuation start processing (FIG. 135) of the first embodiment is denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

After executing the process of step S307b, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares with the fluctuation of the first special symbol to determine whether the current fluctuation of the second special symbol is a favorable fluctuation for the player. A second priority determination process for determination is executed (step S321b). Details of the second priority determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After that, the main control MPU 4100a executes the process of step S308b and terminates this process.

[Second priority determination process]
FIG. 172 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second priority determination process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The second priority determination process is executed as the process of step S321b of the above-described second fluctuation start process (FIG. 171).

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not the first special symbol is fluctuating (step S361b). Then, when there is no changing first special symbol (NO in step SS361b), there is no object for comparison, so this process is terminated.

If there is a fluctuating first special symbol (YES in step S361b), the main control MPU 4100a acquires the result of the hit determination process for the fluctuating first special symbol (step S362b), It is compared with the result of the hit determination process in step S307b of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 171) (step S363b).

When the second special symbol is more advantageous for the player (YES at step S364b), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first special symbol is a losing result (step S365b). If the result is a deviation (YES in step S365b), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is not a losing result, that is, if it is a big hit result (NO in step S365b), the forced losing flag for forcibly losing the first special symbol is set to ON state (step S366b), and this End the process.

On the other hand, when the first special symbol is more advantageous for the player (NO in step S364b), the main control MPU 4100a sets the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol to lose (step S367b). ), the process ends.

Thus, in the second priority determination process, if there is a first special symbol that is in process of variation when the variation is started with the second special symbol, it is determined which variation result is advantageous to the player, If the second special pattern is advantageous, the first special pattern is taken as the result of losing, and if the second special pattern is not advantageous, the second special pattern is taken as the result of losing, so that the first special pattern and the second special pattern fluctuate simultaneously. To prevent overlapping occurrence of a winning game with a special symbol.

[Second fluctuating process]
FIG. 173 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second fluctuating process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. It should be noted that processing common to the second during-fluctuation processing (FIG. 137) of the first embodiment will be given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the second special symbol forced loss flag is ON after determining that the second special symbol variation time has expired in the process of step S501b. (Step S551b). The second special symbol forced out flag is set to the ON state in the process of step S366a of the above-described first priority determination process (FIG. 168).

Then, when the forced loss flag of the second special symbol is ON (YES in step S551b), the main control MPU 4100a replaces the stop symbol of the second special symbol with a loss and turns the forced loss flag off. Set (step S552b).

After that, the main control MPU 4100a displays the determined stop symbol on the second special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7 segment display device 1920) in the process of step S502b. Therefore, when the second special symbol during fluctuation is replaced by the first special symbol that has started to float later, the stop symbol that was determined at the time of starting the variation is lost at the timing of stopping the variation of the second special symbol. replace.

[Second interlock setting process]
FIG. 174 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second interlock setting process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. Note that processing common to the second interlock setting processing (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the second special symbol is fluctuating in the process of step S1001b, it determines whether or not the second special symbol forced out flag is on (step S1111b ). The second special symbol forced out flag is set to the ON state in the process of step S366a of the above-described first priority determination process (FIG. 168).

Then, when the forced loss flag of the second special symbol is ON (YES in step S1111b), the main control MPU 4100a replaces the stop symbol of the second special symbol with a loss and turns the forced loss flag off. set (step S1112b). It should be noted that, if the second special symbol forced loss flag is not on (NO in step S1111b), the second special symbol is lost in the hit determination process at the start of variation (step S307b of the second variation start process). result.

After that, the main control MPU 4100a displays the lost stop symbol determined by the process of step S307b or step S1112b on the second special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7 segment display device 1920) (step S1113b). Therefore, when the second special symbol during variation is replaced by the first special symbol whose variation is started later, the variation of the first special symbol is stopped before the variation stop timing of the second special symbol. If the timing is earlier, the stop symbol determined at the start of the variation is replaced with the loss at the variation stop timing of the first special symbol.

Next, characteristic processing of control executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 will be described.

As described above, the special symbol for which the forced loss flag is set to the ON state is replaced with the loss stop symbol at the variation stop timing. Such a special pattern is a hit (small hit, big hit) before replacement, so the display contents (reach effect etc.) such as characters displayed during fluctuation on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and when fluctuation is stopped There is a possibility that a sense of incongruity may occur with the display contents (misalignment) of . For example, it would be unnatural if the character on the player side were dominant in the battle production and was about to win, but suddenly switched to defeat. Since many players perceive the variation results from the effect display of the character or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, it is desired to avoid the unnaturalness (discomfort) caused by the transition of the effect display.

Therefore, in the priority control pattern of the present embodiment, the processing of delaying the timing of notifying the variation result of the special symbol by the effect display of the character or the like on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the effect display representing the loss) is delayed from the timing of stopping the variation of the special symbol. Run.

[Additional Processing of Forced Missing Effect]
FIG. 175(A) is a flow chart showing the procedure of the forced losing effect addition process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The forced-off effect addition process relates to the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and is one of the effect control processes (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010. FIG.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not the forced loss flag of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is on (step S3321). Here, the compulsory loss flag is set to the ON state for the special symbols in which the hit stop symbol is replaced with the loss stop symbol at the variation stop timing. When the forced removal flags of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in the OFF state (NO in step S3321), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, when the forced loss flag of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the ON state (YES in step S3321), the special symbol in which the forced loss flag is set to the ON state It is determined whether or not the object is to be variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (step S3322). As described above, when the game mode is the normal mode or the rush preparation mode, the first special symbol is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and when the game mode is the rush mode, the second special symbol is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Is displayed. Then, when the special symbol for which the forced removal flag is set to ON state is not the object to be variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (NO in step S3322), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, peripheral control MPU 4140a, if the special symbol for which the forced removal flag is set to the ON state is to be variably displayed on liquid crystal display device 1900 (YES in step S3322), peripheral control MPU 4140a adds additional symbols on liquid crystal display device 1900 A failure notification effect is set (step S3323), and this process is terminated.

Here, the additional failure notification effect is an effect of notifying a failure for a predetermined period of time by displaying a character or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (for example, an effect in which the character on the player side loses in a character battle effect). show. Note that display contents other than decorative patterns displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are targeted.

FIG. 175(B) is a timing chart of the special symbol variation and effect display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the additional loss notification effect is set in the above-described forced loss effect addition process.

As shown in FIG. 175(B), the effect display corresponding to the special symbol that is switched from the winning stop symbol to the stop symbol at the variation stop timing is selected based on the winning result, and the effect during variation is the game. There is a high possibility that it is an effect expected by the player (the character on the player side is dominant in the battle effect). It would be unnatural if, despite such an effect being executed, a loss confirmation effect (a player's character's defeat) is suddenly executed at the fluctuation stop timing. Therefore, after the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, the additional loss notification effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the performance transition without discomfort from the expected performance (superiority) to the final performance (defeat), and to provide the performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable (unnatural).

<Effect of priority control pattern>
According to the priority control pattern of the second embodiment, the results derived from the first special symbol and the second special symbol are compared, and the special symbol leading to the advantageous result for the player is preferentially executed, and the other special symbol is executed. Since the variation is stopped at the lost symbol, the special symbol leading to the big hit by the variation stop timing is not treated as the lost result unlike the basic control pattern. Therefore, the priority control pattern can maintain the original game property (game property) of the gaming machine more than the basic control pattern.

In the priority control pattern of the present embodiment, the results derived from the first special symbol and the second special symbol are compared, and the special symbol leading to the advantageous result for the player is preferentially executed. is not limited to In the case of deriving a big hit together, the special pattern that has started to fluctuate first may be prioritized, or the result of priority may be ranked according to the game mode, and the special pattern to be prioritized may be determined according to the ranking. .

In addition, when the performance of the special pattern that is forced to lose is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the additional loss notification performance is set so that the character display performance ends with a delay from the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol. As a result, even the performance display associated with the result of winning can be changed to the performance display for deriving the result of losing, so that the player who reads the result from the performance display of the character or the like can recognize the loss without discomfort. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the production display that gives a sense of incompatibility.

<Interruption control pattern>
Next, characteristic control processing in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. Different control processing will be described below based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

The interruption control pattern is characterized by a control structure in which, while a winning game based on a winning result derived from one special symbol is performed, the variation of the other special symbol is suspended, and the remaining variation is resumed after the completion of the matching game. do.

[First special symbol control process]
FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol control process in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 1st special design control process (FIG. 126) of 1st Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached and description is abbreviate|omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 ends this process when the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is ON in the process of step S100a. In the above-described first embodiment, the first interlocking setting process (step S250a, FIG. 133) is executed to forcibly stop the variation of the first special symbol with the missing symbol, but in the interruption control pattern of this embodiment, the first While the winning game is performed on the side of the second special symbol, the game on the side of the first special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped) as it is, so no processing is performed.

[Second special symbol control process]
FIG. 177 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second special symbol control process in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 2nd special design control process (FIG. 134) of 1st Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached and description is abbreviate|omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 ends this process when the interlocking flag of the second special symbol is ON in the process of step S100b. In the above-described first embodiment, the second interlocking setting process (step S250b, FIG. 142) is executed to forcibly stop the fluctuation of the second special symbol with the missing symbol. While the winning game is performed on the 1st special symbol side, the game on the 2nd special symbol side is interrupted (suspended) as it is, so no processing is performed.

Next, characteristic processing of control executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 will be described.

As described above, in the interruption control pattern, the other special symbol interrupts the variation due to the occurrence of the winning game on one special symbol side, but if the effect performed before the interruption is continued as the effect after the restart, the corresponding game There is a possibility that it may not be suitable as a later presentation.

Therefore, in the interruption control pattern of the present embodiment, the restarting performance change processing is executed to change the performance after the restart of the interrupted special pattern from the specified performance selected at the start of the variation and performed before the suspension.

[Restart effect change processing]
FIG. 178 is a flow chart showing the procedure of restart effect change processing in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. The restart effect change process relates to the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and is one of the effect control processes (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010. FIG.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not a winning game is currently in progress (step S3331). In this embodiment, the interlocking flag is set to the ON state at the start of the winning game, and is set to the OFF state at the end of the game. Therefore, it may be determined whether the interlocking flag of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set to ON state. Then, if the winning game is not in progress (NO in step S3331), there is no interrupted change to be changed in the effect, so this process is terminated.

Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not there is an interrupted variation when the winning game is in progress (YES at step S3331) (step S3332). This can be done by determining whether the first processing flag or the second processing flag is "2". When the first fluctuation process (Fig. 129) or the second fluctuation process (Fig. 137) is executed (that is, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fluctuating), the first processing flag or the second The 2 processing flag is set to "2". Then, if there is no suspended variation (NO in step S3332), there is no effect change target, so this processing ends.

Next, when there is an interrupted variation (YES in step S3332), peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not the variation is a win (step S3333). Then, if it is a hit (YES at step S3333), it is determined whether or not the hit is more advantageous for the player than the hit of the winning game currently being executed (step S3334). Here, the judgment that the winning is advantageous to the player is based on the privilege that the player can obtain, the prescribed priority, etc., in the same way as the judgment of which special symbol is given priority in the above-mentioned priority control pattern. is done accordingly.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, when the interrupted variation derives a winning game that is more advantageous to the player than the winning game currently being executed (YES in step S3334), is a step-up effect as a resuming effect. is set (step S3335), and the process ends.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, when the interrupted variation derives a winning game that is not as great as the winning game currently being executed (NO in step S3334), sets a bonus effect as the effect after restart (step S3336), the process ends.

Further, when the interrupted variation leads to a deviation (NO in step S3333), the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a related effect as a post-restart effect (step S3337), and ends this process.

[Restart production example]
FIG. 179 is a diagram for explaining an example of an effect after restart in the restart effect change process (FIG. 178). Here, as an example, the variation of the second special symbol for deriving the hit is executed first, and the variation of the first special symbol to be executed later is interrupted with the remaining time t at the stop timing of the variation. to explain.

Case (A) is a case for explaining the step-up effect (step S3335). Here, a small win C is generated by the previous second special symbol, and then a big win B is generated by the first special symbol. In this case, as a performance (restart performance) corresponding to the variation (remaining time t) of the first special symbol after the restart, a step-up performance is set to be executed to make it appear as if the small win C has developed into the big win B. . Specifically, an effect is performed in which the waves after the small win game change into rough waves and the big win arrives.

Case (B) is a case for explaining the bonus effect (step S3336). Here, a big hit A is generated by the previous second special symbol, and then a big hit B is generated by the first special symbol. Between the jackpot A of the second special symbol and the jackpot B of the first special symbol, the jackpot A of the second special symbol is given a privilege more advantageous to the player. In this case, as an effect (restart effect) corresponding to the fluctuation (remaining time t) of the first special symbol after the restart, it is as if the big hit game with the first special symbol is given along with the big hit game with the second special symbol. Set so that a bonus effect to be shown is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the rough waves after the big win game subside once and change to rough waves again, and the big win arrives. In addition, in the bonus effect, especially when the interrupted variation leads to a small win, the opening timing of the big winning opening 2103 during the small win game is notified by a countdown display of the remaining time t or the like. A small winning game can be shown as an additional privilege added to the winning game executed when the fluctuation is interrupted.

Thus, in the step-up production and bonus production, the winning game on the first special symbol side and the winning game on the second special symbol side are a series of hits (the operation of the attacker device 2100 in the double hitting game is a series of operations). A production is performed to make it look as if it exists. As a result, it is possible to avoid the performance after resuming from becoming a performance not suitable for the game situation at the time of execution, and it is possible to enhance the interest by showing the continuous wins as a series of wins, so that the game property is high. Games can be provided.

Case (C) is a case for explaining the related effect (step S3337). Here, a small hit C is generated by the previous second special symbol, but the first special symbol interrupted at this time results in a loss. In this case, as a production (restart production) corresponding to the fluctuation (remaining time t) of the first special symbol after the restart, a related production such as the afterglow of the small winning game (expecting development from the small winning game) set to run. Specifically, after the small winning game, there is a temporary wave, but it returns calmly, and an effect is performed that ends without shifting to a new winning game.

It should be noted that, if the interrupted variation leads to a loss result as in the case (C) described above, it is not possible to obtain a performance effect such as a step-up performance or a bonus performance that makes the previous and subsequent winning games related. , may abort the resumption of fluctuations.

180 and 181, as a modified example of the interruption control pattern, a characteristic control process in a pattern of terminating the fluctuation without resuming it when the fluctuation that has been interrupted leads to a deviation result will be described. do. Note that different control processing will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

[First interlock setting process]
FIG. 180 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first interlock setting process in the modified example of the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. Note that processing common to the first interlock setting processing (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, when the first special symbol is fluctuating in the process of step S1001a, determines whether or not the stop symbol that has been determined at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is a loss. (step S1121a). Then, if it is lost (YES in step S1121a), the determined lost symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7 segment display device 1920) (step S1122a). After that, in the process after step S1004a, the process for stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed.

On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a continues the current state, that is, the above-mentioned interruption, when the determined stop symbol of the first special symbol during fluctuation is not a hit, that is, it is a hit (NO in step S1121a). A temporary stop state (interrupted state) is set as in the control pattern (step S1021a), and this processing ends.

[Second interlock setting process]
FIG. 181 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second interlock setting process in the modified example of the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. Note that processing common to the second interlock setting processing (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, when the second special symbol is fluctuating in the process of step S1001b, determines whether or not the stop symbol determined at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is out. (step S1121b). Then, if it is lost (YES at step S1121b), the determined lost symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7 segment display device 1920) (step S1122b). After that, in the process after step S1004b, the process for stopping the variation of the second special symbol is executed.

On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a continues the current state, that is, the above-mentioned interruption, when the determined stop symbol of the second special symbol during fluctuation is not a hit, that is, it is a hit (NO in step S1121b). A temporary stop state (interrupted state) is set as in the control pattern (step S1021b), and this process is terminated.

Thus, in the modification of the interruption control pattern of the present embodiment, the control to forcibly stop the other special symbol at the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol that derives one of the hits in the basic control pattern described above, and the interruption Combination control is performed with the control of temporarily stopping the other special symbol at the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol that derives one of the hits in the control pattern and restarting it after the hit game.

In the modified example, only when the other special symbol is lost at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol for deriving the winning of one, the game is stopped when the other special symbol is a winning. As a result, the aforementioned related effect (case (C) in FIG. 179) is not executed. Therefore, the resuming performance due to the interruption of the fluctuation is either step-up performance or bonus performance, and the execution of the resuming performance itself can be a notice performance (win confirmation performance) with high expectations.

<Effect of interruption control pattern>
According to the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment, all the generated first special symbols and second special symbols can be varied and executed according to the obtained random numbers. In the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above, one of the simultaneously fluctuating special symbols was forcibly set to lose regardless of the acquired random number, but in the interruption control pattern, the special symbol obtained by the player results in ( Hit judgment results based on random numbers) will not be overturned. Therefore, the interruption control pattern can maintain the original game characteristics of the game machine more than the above-described basic control pattern and priority control pattern.

In addition, in the interruption control pattern, while the winning game based on the winning result derived from one special symbol is being performed, the other special symbol is suspended, and the remaining variation is resumed after the matching game ends. At this time, the production (restart production) corresponding to the restarted variation is newly set according to the previous and subsequent game situations (the winning game on one special symbol side and the game derived from the variation). As a result, even if the interrupted variation is resumed, it is possible to provide an effect that does not cause a sense of incongruity. In addition, when the interrupted variation leads to a winning game, the restarting performance can make it appear that the winning game is related to the winning game on the one side of the special symbol, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced. can.

<Reset control pattern>
Next, characteristic control processing in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. Different control processing will be described below based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

In the reset control pattern, while a winning game based on a winning result derived from one of the special symbols is performed, the other special symbol suspends variation, and after the matching game ends, the suspended variation is reviewed according to the game state. It features a control structure that resumes after

[Process during first fluctuation]
FIG. 182 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first during-fluctuation process in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment. Note that processing common to the first during-fluctuation processing (FIG. 129) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 repeats the subtraction of the timer value as the process of step S521a until the fluctuation time of the first special symbol times up in the process of step S501a. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 4100a sets the reset flag to OFF before the process of step S521a (step S561a).

Here, the reset flag is set to the ON state in the process of step S1134a of the first interlock setting process (FIG. 183) described later. The reset flag is a flag that is set to an ON state when a reset setting process for resetting the interrupted variation time according to the game state is executed.

[First interlock setting process]
FIG. 183 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first interlock setting process in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment. Note that processing common to the first interlock setting processing (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the reset flag is ON when the first special symbol is fluctuating in the process of step S1001a (step S1131a). Then, if the reset flag is ON (YES in step S1131a), the current state is continued, that is, it is temporarily stopped (interrupted state) as in the above-described interruption control pattern (step S1021a). End the process.

On the other hand, when the reset flag is not ON (NO in step S1131a), the main control MPU 4100a acquires the timer value of the first variable timer (step S1132a). Then, the acquired timer value is reset according to the game state (step S1133a), and after setting the reset flag to ON (step S1134a), this process is terminated. Here, the processing of steps S1132a to S1134a is set as the reset setting processing. It should be noted that the object to be reset in the interrupted fluctuation is not limited to the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation, but may be the entire control contents related to the fluctuation time such as the fluctuation pattern.

Thus, in the reset control pattern, when the variation of the first special symbol is interrupted, reset setting processing for the variation after restart is first executed. When the reset setting process is executed, the reset flag is set to the ON state, and the first special symbol maintains the reset timer value until the first interlocking flag is released to the OFF state, and is temporarily stopped. Become. Then, when the first interlocking flag is released to the off state and the execution of the first fluctuating process is resumed, the reset flag is returned to the off state, and subtraction of the reset timer value starts (that is, fluctuation is resumed).

[Second fluctuating process]
FIG. 184 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second during-fluctuation process in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment. It should be noted that processing common to the second during-fluctuation processing (FIG. 137) of the first embodiment will be given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 repeats the subtraction of the timer value as the process of step S521b until the second special symbol variation time times up in the process of step S501b. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 4100a sets the reset flag to OFF before the process of step S521b (step S561b).

Here, the reset flag is set to ON state in the process of step S1134b of the second interlock setting process (FIG. 185) described later. The reset flag is a flag that is set to an ON state when a reset setting process for resetting the interrupted variation time according to the game state is executed.

[Second interlock setting process]
FIG. 185 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second interlock setting process in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment. Note that processing common to the second interlock setting processing (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment is given the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the reset flag is ON when the first special symbol is fluctuating in the process of step S1001b (step S1131b). If the reset flag is ON (YES in step S1131b), the current state is continued, i.e., it is temporarily stopped (interrupted state) as in the above-described interruption control pattern (step S1021b). End the process.

On the other hand, when the reset flag is not ON (NO in step S1131b), the main control MPU 4100a acquires the timer value of the second variable timer (step S1132b). Then, the acquired timer value is reset according to the game state (step S1133b), and after setting the reset flag to ON state (step S1134b), this process is terminated.

Thus, in the reset control pattern, when the variation of the second special symbol is interrupted, reset setting processing for the variation after the restart is first executed. When the reset setting process is executed, the reset flag is set to the ON state, and the second special symbol maintains the reset timer value until the second interlocking flag is released to the OFF state, and is temporarily stopped. Become. Then, when the second interlocking flag is released to the off state and the execution of the second fluctuating process is resumed, the reset flag is returned to the off state, and subtraction of the reset timer value starts (that is, fluctuation is resumed).

<Effect of Reset Control Pattern>
According to the reset control pattern of the second embodiment, it is possible to change and execute the first special symbol and the second special symbol generated in the same manner as the above-described interruption control pattern as a result based on all the acquired random numbers. Therefore, the reset control pattern can maintain the original gameplay of the game machine more than the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above.

In addition, the reset control pattern changes the remaining fluctuation time of the interrupted special symbol according to the game state. Here, the special symbol fluctuation interruption is caused by the winning game on the other special symbol side. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game mode after the corresponding game has shifted to another game mode. Therefore, if the variation according to the variation pattern set based on the game mode before transition is resumed as it is, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, according to the reset control pattern, the contents of the control such as the variation time are reviewed for the variation restarted after the winning game, so that the variation according to the game state to be performed is provided without making the player feel uncomfortable. be able to. In addition, since the degree of freedom in the effect in the variation at the time of resuming is increased as compared with the above-described interruption control pattern, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

Concretely, it suffices to review according to the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (FIG. 154(E)). For example, if the variation that derives the second special symbol deviation result is interrupted, if the game mode after the transition is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, it is reset to a long-time variation, and the game mode after the transition is the rush If it is the mode, it can be reset to short-time fluctuation.

Also, when the game mode is the rush mode, the number of times of ST is consumed and the small hit C and the small hit D of the second special symbol are to be generated frequently. Then, with reference to FIG. 186, the resetting setting in the case where the first special symbol for deriving the big hit occurs while the number of times of ST remains in the rush mode will be described.

FIG. 186 is a timing chart for explaining reset setting processing for interrupted variation in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment. As described above, in the rush mode, when the first special symbol for deriving a big hit occurs while the number of STs remains, the first special symbol is displayed after the number of STs given in the current game is digested as much as possible. I want to welcome a big hit game (that is, giving a new number of STs).

Therefore, when the remaining ST number of times becomes less than the predetermined number (here, less than 5) and the big hit variation occurs in the first special symbol, the big hit variation is interrupted by the small winning game of the second special symbol. The post-restart fluctuation time that is reset when the power supply is restarted is set to the long time t1. The long time t1 is, for example, a time obtained by extending the remaining time t of the original fluctuation, and is a time during which a small winning game can be expected to occur.

While the big hit variation of the first special symbol resumes the variation for a long time t1, the small winning variation of the second special symbol occurs, and the stop timing of the small winning variation comes. Then, the big hit variation is interrupted again. Since the variation time of the second special symbol in the rush mode is a short variation of 1 second (FIG. 154(E)), the number of STs is digested at a good tempo.

Then, when the number of remaining STs becomes 1, the post-restart fluctuation time to be reset is set to the short time t2. The short time t2 is, for example, a time obtained by shortening the remaining time t of the original variation, and is a time that does not end the variation even if the variation of the second special symbol in which the ST number becomes 0 occurs during that time. be. As a result, the big hit variation of the first special pattern, which is frequently interrupted, can be stopped in the probability variable state where the ST number is effective, that is, it is determined as a big hit result, thereby disturbing the original game performance of the game machine.例文帳に追加never

Thus, according to the reset control pattern, the fluctuation time after restarting the fluctuation of the interrupted special symbols can be adjusted according to the game state, so that not only the fluctuation control of the interrupted special symbols, The variation efficiency of the special symbols in the game state can also be adjusted. Therefore, since it is possible to flexibly cope with a wide variety of assumed game characteristics, it is possible to further enhance the interest in the game.

In addition, in the reset control pattern as well as the above-mentioned interruption control pattern, the effect (resume effect) corresponding to the restarted variation is changed to the previous game situation (one special symbol side winning game and the game derived from the variation) If a new setting is made according to the condition, it is possible to provide an effect that does not cause a sense of discomfort. In addition, when the interrupted variation leads to a winning game, the restarting performance can make it appear that the winning game is related to the winning game on the one side of the special symbol, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced. can.

As described above, according to the present invention, a control structure that employs one or a combination of the basic control pattern, priority control pattern, interruption control pattern and reset control pattern mentioned in the first and second embodiments, To avoid overlapping occurrence of a specific game (a small win game, a big win game) between a game on the side of a first special symbol and a game on the side of a second special symbol, and to enable simultaneous variation. Here, even if the winning of the game balls to the winning area occurs at the same time, only one lottery game is performed according to the priority, and the other lottery games are in a standby state. The difference between the winning tempo of the game balls (that is, the game tempo of the player) and the lottery game tempo has caused a decrease in interest in the game. In the present invention, the simultaneous variation control can prevent the loss of interest in the game as described above.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine formed by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

1 pachinko machine 2 outer frame 3 main body frame 4 game board 5 door frame 1100 game area 1180 function display unit 1200 game panel 1900 liquid crystal display device 2100 attacker device 2101 first start opening 2101a regular winning opening 2101b special winning opening 2102 second starting opening 2111 Movable piece (ordinary electric accessories)
2301 Normal figure gate 4000 Main board 4010 Peripheral control board (effect control means, unfavorable game state suggestion means, effect change means)
4100 Main control board (game control means, first lottery game execution means, second lottery game execution means, specific game execution means, interlocking control means, result replacement means, other detection means, disadvantageous game state generation means, result change means, Temporary stop means, restart means, forced termination means, reset means)

Claims (1)

a first lottery execution means for executing a first lottery based on winning of game media in a first prize area within the game area;
a second lottery execution means for executing a second lottery based on winning of game media in a second prize area within the game area;
movable lottery execution means for executing a normal lottery based on detection of a game medium and operating a movable member when the lottery result is a predetermined result;
variable display executing means capable of executing variable display of symbols based on the first lottery or the second lottery;
A first specific game execution means for executing a first specific game capable of imparting a game profit accompanied by operation of a conditional device with a probability different according to the game state based on the first lottery or the second lottery;
A second specific game execution means for executing a second specific game capable of giving a game profit that is less than the first specific game that does not involve the operation of the condition device , based on the second lottery;
Specification of shifting the game state to a specific game state different from the normal game state triggered by the execution of the first specific game executed in response to the drawing of the specific lottery result by the first lottery executing means. game state transition means;
Triggered by the execution of the first specific game executed in response to the derivation of a special lottery result by the first lottery executing means, the game state is changed to either the normal game state or the specific game state. special game state transition means for transitioning to a different special game state;
lottery frequency suppression means for suppressing the execution frequency of the second specific game by setting the variable display that can be executed based on the second lottery for a long time;
Lottery frequency improving means for increasing the execution frequency of the second specific game by setting the variable display that can be executed based on the second lottery in the specific game state to a short time shorter than the long time,
with
In the specific game state, although the frequency with which the movable member is operated by the movable lottery executing means is not increased, the lottery probability of executing the first specific game is higher than in the normal game state. The variable display based on the second lottery is set to the short time by the lottery frequency improving means, and is higher than the gaming profit given in the first specific game that can be executed based on the second lottery. A lottery state that is most advantageous for players who hope that the total game profit given by the second specific game that can be executed a plurality of times during the period from to the execution of the first specific game will increase. can be,
As a variation display of symbols executed based on the lottery of the second lottery execution means in order to suppress the execution frequency of the second specific game in the normal game state, the first lottery execution means in the normal game state The variable display for a longer time than the longest variable display among the symbol variable displays executed based on the lottery can be executed,
Different from the specific game state, the special game state is different from the specific game state in that the game profit more than the game profit given in the first specific game executed based on the lottery of the second lottery executing means is obtained multiple times. Although it can not be expected to be granted by the second specific game, the lottery probability that the first specific game will be executed is higher than the normal game state, and the first lottery is executed. A game machine, wherein the frequency of movement of the movable member by the movable lottery executing means is set higher than the normal game state and the specific game state so that the frequency of winning is increased.

Images